Home

TEOM 1400ab - User Manual

1. 7 Locate the interface board Figure J 5 Figure J 5 Interface board 1 P291 13 gr RB 142 vend 8 1 FEMALE wi MALE FEMALE f 14 25 15 9 9 15 N SENSOR 25D ACCU 15D AUX 15D 2 000000000 gt mn g v PA 5 ioe 5 P882 m J FEMALE wale D m 9 15 O es 9 6 25 USER 15D e O AMBTMP 9D Sa 8 1 t a 1 7 7 S 4 c 1 c 1 Al S N 7 5 E A A 3 Ss 1 H 3 A S P R n T 3 R 2 E 2 2 2 9 1 1 E o E g 1 RL481 RL402 05 f amp N P302 O 3 3 3 3 amp H LF m Aor s eL403 7 4 4 4 4 ess 5 EARTH O EET 3 SPARESSR SSR20 SSR202 SSR203 1 GNDA U382 15 8 1 Q O 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 e R304 O s 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 0 n gt Lu 8 x 8 z 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 i b U303 O 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 lt n 7 S SSR109 SSR161 we o a RN201 RN102 C x Aall E 1 BG 182 BG 181 PT1 4 RN181 J l BR591 2 P101 1 NO I PORI PORI 8 Place the positive lead of the digital multimeter on the test point labeled 10 V red and the negative lead on test point GND black Figure J 5 9 Locate potentiometer R304 Figure J 5 and adjust it until the reading is 10 000 VDC 0 001 V APPE
2. 2 24 2 4 Installing the Sampling System sessessess 2 26 2 4 1 Flow Splitter Assembly seeeeeeeseee 2 26 2 4 2 Tripod Assembly cere em RR AREEREF RAS ERES 2 31 2 4 3 Sampling System Setup ssssessess 2 36 2 4 4 Sample Tube Assembly sesseeeeeee 2 43 2 4 5 Inlet Selection osi mee ett EU duis pu facettes a b n 2 47 2 4 5 1 Installing a Sample Inlet sssse 2 48 2 4 5 2 Converting from a PM 10 to a PM 1 Monitor 2 50 2 4 5 8 Converting from a PM 10 to a PM 2 5 Monitor 2 51 2 4 5 4 Converting from a PM 10 to a U S TSP Monitor 2 53 2 4 5 5 TEOM Monitor Adjustment Factors 2 54 2 5 Housing the Instrument Outdoors s src 2 55 SECTION 3 SAMPLE PREPARATION esses nennen nnne 3 1 3 1 Filter Replacemerit npe tiec eut een nee etse ted 3 1 3 1 1 First Time Filter Installation eese 3 1 3 1 2 Routine Filter Installation sene 3 11 3 1 3 Filter Pre Conditioning eene 3 14 3 1 4 Filter Hemoval ooo ee a Ub e EM deben es 3 15 PAGE X Revision B 003 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Table of Contents continued 3 2 lieri E 3 17 3 2 1 Filter EMG eh ae edi od 3 18 3 2 2 When
3. The active volumetric flow control system maintains a constant volumet ric flow at the flow rate specified by the user by incorporating ambient pressure and temperature sensors e Available with a choice of sample inlets for PM 10 PM 2 5 PM 1 or TSP measurements e Sample filters can be analyzed after exposure for heavy metals using standard laboratory techniques such as AA or ICAP Pace 1 2 Revision B 001 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION Viewing and entry of instrument parameters are made possible by a menu driven user interface Keypads are available in English Spanish and German Internal data logging of up to 40 weeks with one data record stored every hour Each record may contain up to eight user selectable variables Two levels of password protection low and high lock These can be used to restrict access to instrument functions Advanced RS232 support This allows users to retrieve real time and stored information and change instrument parameters both remotely and at the sampling location Seven built in averaged analog inputs scalable as 2 or 10 VDC with user defined conversions to engineering units The averaging time is equal to the user defined data storage interval Averaged values may be logged internally Three real time analog outputs allow straightforward connections to data loggers or chart recorders These outputs can be conf
4. i 1400ab Site 1171400 Yersion 3 012 Instrument Serial 22416 x Hi we ms Down Load Data Registers Real time Graph Key Pad 118 1 44 1g Prnt Yara Prnt Varg 0 5 Prnt Var5 Prnt Var6 RS Para 1 RS Para 2 il 0 14 RS Para 3 RS Para 4 v 30 Min MC v O1 Hr MC 08 Hr MC 035 24 Hr MC 04 05 88 11 42 04 05 33 11 43 04 05 9311 44 04 05 3311 45 04 05 33 11 47 Protect SEcTION 10 RPComm SOFTWARE Pace 10 36 Revision B 000 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure 10 27 Control j buttons on the Real Time Clears all data listed on the right hand side ofthe Real Time Graph screen Graph screen This includes the data being displayed Decreases the scale of the x and y axes concurrently With this icon selected press and hold the left mouse button and make a box around an area inside the graph that you want to zoom into Once the box is finished release the mouse button The graph will be resized according to the box dimensions Decreases the scale of the x axis With this icon selected press and hold the left mouse button at the beginning of the area that you want to zoom into Drag the cursor horizontally to the end of the zoom area and release the mouse button The graph will be resized according to the new x axis dimensions Decrease the scale of the y axis With this icon selected press and hold the left mouse button at the
5. APPENDIX B PROGRAM REGISTER CODES Pace B 5 Revision B 001 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor PROGRAM REGISTER CODES 075 099 D WOGRANREGTERCOWESWES E err sons weet me meme s p o qnss Dm sewer id mee meme 9 rios Poor songs wanes id mae meme o 9 ensis oer sone wens me meme o 0 ross Dm sons wn Pre meme o oss eren uns me meine o o enses Storage Variables change erases storage NA os 8 Coa fra ne arene Storage Value 1 Storage Value 2 N A Storage Value 4 N A 090 Storage Value 5 N A v enses Storage Value 7 N A 098 Storage Vie 8 NA NA Na Wa not editable N A UA UA A wa ante Cavin core ewe om o v 5 ws ams Cannon moaca om ois fo 9 5 Lows wea meer ses we o o wc wr wsCainoma sre e m fo 9 5 one cum aeie CCUG emn os NA NA mee 099 Accu Cums Can nene verea wm re Na Na ens Program Register Code is the same as in version 1 software for compatibility APPENDIX B PROGRAM REGISTER CODES Pace B 6 Revision B 001 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor PROGRAM REGISTER CODES 100 124 Cumulative Time of Viewed ACCU Channel Cumulative Volume of Viewed ACCU Channel 102 Viewed ACCU Variable 1 103 Viewed ACCU Minimum 1 104 Viewed ACCU Maximum 1 105 106 Viewed ACCU Minimum
6. Figure 2 45 Removing the rubber leg holder 3 Place one leg of the tripod onto the tripod foot SECTION 2 SYSTEM INSTALLATION PAGE 2 31 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 4 Place a metal bracket over the rubber base of the tripod leg and into the 2 slots on the tripod foot Figure 2 46 Figure 2 46 Placing the l E metal bracket on the tripod N foot i 1 5 Ensure that the bracket is placed over the rubber base on the end of the tripod leg Figure 2 47 Figure 2 47 Proper placement of the metal bracket SECTION 2 SYSTEM INSTALLATION Pace 2 32 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 6 Insert a plain washer then a lock washer onto each threaded end of the bracket Figure 2 48 Figure 2 48 Washers placed on the metal bracket 7 Install the nuts on the threaded ends of the bracket and tighten them with a 3 8 crescent wrench Figure 2 49 NOTE Hand tighten both nuts on the bracket before tightening them with the crescent wrench to ensure that the bracket is positioned properly on the tripod leg and tripod foot Figure 2 49 Tightening the metal bracket onto the p tripod foot SECTION 2 SYSTEM INSTALLATION Pace 2 33 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 8 Repeat steps 1 through 7 for each leg of the tripod
7. 2 Null The ACCU System will continue sequential sampling in this manner until the user stops the sampling routine or until the monitor disqualifies a channel because the pressure drop of the installed filter cartridge causes the bypass flow to fall outside of the acceptable limits Section 7 Section 14 ACCU System Pace 14 32 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 14 5 View ACCU System SCREEN The user can view the operating statistics of the ACCU System when in the View ACCU System screen Figure 14 31 Figure 14 31 View ACCU System screen Volume Curr Chan VIEW ACCU SYSTEM 3 Time gt 89400 20 368 1 Youcan display the View ACCU System screen on the four line display of the control unit in two different ways 1 When in the Main screen Figure 14 16 press the lt STEP SCREEN gt key on the control unit s keypad to display the Menu screen Figure 14 17 When in the Menu screen press the up 1 and down lt gt arrow keys to select View ACCU System and then press the lt ENTER gt key 2 Press the lt 1 gt and lt 4 gt keys and then press the lt ENTER gt key The View ACCU System screen contains the following information 3 Time Section 14 ACCU System This field contains the number of the ACCU chan nel that is currently being viewed Press the right lt gt arrow key to increase the channel by one Press the l
8. 3 Push one end of the cut piece of the 3 8 flow line tubing into the SENSOR FLOW fitting at the rear of the control unit Figure 2 14 SENSOR FLOW T SECTION 2 SYSTEM INSTALLATION Pace 2 11 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor NOTE The Series 1400a Monitor uses push to connect fittings for all air flow lines To engage these connections the air tube must be pushed completely into the fitting so that the tube is fully inserted and cannot be pulled out While pushing the tubing into the fitting there is an intermediate stop at an O ring You must push the tubing past the O ring to completely engage the tubing inside the fitting and prevent air leaks To disengage the connection push the small collar located at the end of the fitting toward the fitting and pull the tube out 4 Locate one of the large in line filters Figure 2 15 Figure 2 15 Large in line filter with the flow arrow A highlighted 5 Push the filter onto the open end of the 3 8 flow line tubing so that the flow arrow on the filter points away from the control unit Figure 2 16 Figure 2 16 In line filter BYPASS SENSOR connected to the 3 8 flow y line tubing on the sensor flow fitting Note that the flow arrow A on the filter points away from the control unit SECTION 2 SYSTEM INSTALLATION Pace 2 12 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate
9. 4 Grasp the silver handle and move the shipping latch upward with your thumb Figure 3 5 Figure 3 5 Lifting the shipping latch on the silver handle 5 Pull down on the silver handle Figure 3 6 SECTION 3 SAMPLE PREPARATION Pace 3 3 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure 3 6 Pulling the silver handle down Holding rod 6 Pull the holding rod off the latch plate Figure 3 7 Figure 3 7 Releasing the holding rod on the mass transducer 7 With the mass transducer unlatched grasp the black knob Figure 3 4 and swing the bottom of the mass transducer downward exposing the tapered element TE Figure 3 8 An old TEOM filter may be already installed on the TE Refer to Section 3 1 4 to remove this filter NOTE If the control unit is operating power is applied to the control unit when you open the mass transducer the tapered element TE will automatically stop oscillating SECTION 3 SAMPLE PREPARATION Pace 3 4 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure 3 8 Opening the mass transducer 8 Pick up a new TEOM filter from the box of filters Figure 3 9 with X Do not handle TEOM the filter exchange tool Figure 3 1 so that the filter disk lies filters with your fingers between the fork and the upper tab of the tool and the hub of the filter lies between the tines of the fork Figur
10. SET TIME 16 20 03 15 Jan 01 Second gt 0 Minute 20 SET TIME 16 20 03 15 Jan 01 Second gt 0 Minute 20 APPENDIX A OVERVIEW OF INSTRUMENT SCREENS Revision B 001 Pace A 5 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure A 11 Set Analog Outputs screen Max Volt gt A01 Var A01 Min Figure A 12 Set Analog Outputs screen with additional lines displayed Max Volt A01 Var A01 Min APPENDIX A OVERVIEW OF INSTRUMENT SCREENS SET ANALOG OUTPUTS 10 VDC 30 Min MC 0 00 SET ANALOG OUTPUTS 10 VDC 30 Min MC 0 00 500 00 01 Hr MC 0 00 500 00 Tot Mass 0 00 5000 00 10 VDC Revision B 001 Pace A 6 Revision B 001 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Fi A 13 Set Contact oe SET CONTACT CLOSURE Cont 1 Pre gt Status NAND 7 00 Cont 2 Pre Pres Drop Figure A 14 Set Contact Closure screen with SET CONTACT CLOSURE additional lines displayed Contl1 PRC gt Status NAND 7 00 Cont2 PRC Pres Drop Figure A 15 Set RS 232 Mode screen SET RS 232 MODE Mode None gt None Print On Line Figure A 16 Set RS 232 Mode screen with additional SET RS 232 MODE lines displayed Mode None gt None Print On Line AK Protocol German Prot Store to Print APPENDIX A OVERVIEW OF INSTRUMENT SCREENS Pace A 7 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure A 17 Com P
11. gt and right lt gt arrow keys to display the channel that you want to reset 4 Press the lt CTRL gt key and hold it down 5 Press the lt LAST FIRST gt key to reset the channel that is currently being displayed If you want to view or change the criteria of a channel after you have reset it go to step 5 If you do not want to view or change the criteria of a channel after you have reset it go to step 8 6 Press the lt STEP SCREEN gt key to display the Set ACCU System screen Section 14 4 When in the Set ACCU System screen you can change or view or change the criteria of a channel 7 Press the lt ENTER gt key Go to step 8 8 Press the lt F1 gt or lt RUN gt key to reset the instrument and resume data collection NOTE If the Set ACCU System screen for the current channel contains a PRC 62 Curr Ti Da condition that specifies both a time and date press the lt F7 gt key to decrease the date time value by one day or press the lt F8 gt key to increase the date time value by one day This procedure also works for adjusting both the minimum and maximum val ues SEcrioN 14 ACCU System Pace 14 35 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 14 7 ACCU System MAINTENANCE The sample distributor cone and sample distributor of the ACCU System require periodic maintenance Requirements for routine cleaning are site specific Generally the cone shoul
12. ANALOG VOLTAGE OUTPUT GAIN ADJUSTS 0 12 3 Bg mie 123 12 eee Cn n mw Jumper Settings for Output Channels 123 123 mmi Com 2V 10V N w N w N w N w The Output Channels are factory set to 0 10 VDC jumpers on pins 2 amp 3 To RTU 60 FD A12 PORT N w A a o oo e eo N c AR a EZI Z Ez EZI ANALOG OUTPUTS The following values define the location of analog input channel 0 on the two identical 15 pin analog I O ANALOG I O connectors on the front and back of the control unit Input Channel Signal Ground Location on L shaped board 0 Signal pin 7 Ground pin 8 Analog board channel 4 Each of the six analog inputs available on the external analog EXT ANALOG connector on the back of the control unit may be configured in the same manner SEcTION 9 DATA INPUT AND OUTPUT Pace 9 3 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor The pin assignments on the 15 pin external analog ANALOG I O connector for analog input channels 1 6 are shown below along with the location of the jumpers on the L shaped analog input output board Figures 9 3 9 4 and 9 5 Input Channel Signal Ground Location on L shaped board 1 Signal pin 1 Ground pin 2 Analog board channel 10 2 Signal pin 3 Ground pin 4 Analog board channel 11 3 Signal pin 5 Ground pin 6 Analog board channel 12 v The value for the 4 Signal pin
13. where nnnnn the unit s serial number x data type s storage data yy file number 01 02 etc 5 If you want all the data that is stored in the data storage buffer to be downloaded at each scheduled download time go to step 6 If you want the data download to begin at the storage pointer position go to step 7 6 Place your mouse cursor on the white box located to the left of Download all data and click once with your mouse A black checkmark will appear inside the box to confirm your choice Go to step 8 7 Place your mouse cursor on the white box located to the left of Download from storage pointer and click once with your mouse A black checkmark will appear inside the box to confirm your choice Go to step 8 8 When the schedule has been completed select OK to save your changes The scheduled downloads for the next 24 hours are listed in the scheduled download list on the Connection List screen For example Figure 10 22 shows a scheduled download for 04 05 2001 at 12 00 pm for unit 1400ab site 1 Figure 10 22 Example of a Figure 10 22 rampe Of 405 200 112 00 1400ab Site H Connection List screen 9 Data downloads can be scheduled for each connection listed in the connection list If more than one download is scheduled for the same time the downloads will occur in the order that they are listed in the Scheduled Download box NOTE R amp P recommends that you schedule data down
14. APPENDIX H Mopem COMMUNICATIONS Pace H 5 Revision B 000 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 8 When in the AK Protocol Setup screen place your cursor on the small black down arrow located to the right of the white box in the top left hand of the screen A menu will display Figure H 4 Select the appropriate modem connection listed Figure H 4 AK Protocol AK Protocol Setup Setup screen with menu displayed COMIT OK COW O x COM2 USRobotics 56K Internal Modem Station Number 4 4 052 Channel Number 0754 048 Cancel Comm Setup gt gt Delay Time J Phone Number Connection Command APPENDIX H MopEM COMMUNICATIONS Pace H 6 Revision B 000 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 9 Select the Comm Setup gt button Figure H 4 The Properties screen Figure H 5 will display Pigura Hs Piepellins screen Connection Country region Enter the area code without the long distance prefix Area code Phone number Connect using HEB tls Salar Configure Use country region code and area code ros APPENDIX H Mopem COMMUNICATIONS Pace H 7 Revision B 000 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 10 Select the Configure button The Modem Properties screen will now display with the modem type displayed in the blue bar at the
15. Flows screen with additional lines displayed SET TEMPS FLOWS T Case gt 50 00 50 00 T Air 50 00 50 01 T Cap 50 00 49 98 F Main F Aux T A S P A S Amb Temp Amb Pres FAdj Main FAdj Aux The Set Temps Flows screen contains the following information SECTION 6 SOFTWARE SETUP T Case This field contains the setting and current value of the temperature C inside the control unit The default setting is 50 C and can be adjusted when the monitor is in the Setup Mode The current value can not be edited T Air This field contains the setting and current value of the temperature C of the air stream as it enters the mass transducer The default setting is 50 C and can be adjusted when the monitor in the Setup Mode The current value can not be edited T Cap This field contains the setting and current value of the temperature C inside the mass transducer The default setting is 50 C and can be adjusted when the monitor is in the Setup Mode The current value can not be edited F Main This field contains the setting and current value of the main SENSOR FLOW flow rate l min The default setting is 3 l min and can be adjusted when the monitor is in the Setup Mode The current value can not be edited Pace 6 7 Revision B 003 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor F Aux T A S P A S Amb Temp Amb Pres FAdj Main SECTION 6 SOFTWARE SETUP This field contai
16. Section 3 4 Verify the calibration of the mass transducer once a year Section 12 2 1 Verify the ambient air temperature measurement once a year Section 12 2 2 Verify the ambient pressure measurement once a year Section 12 2 3 Perform a flow audit once a year Section 12 2 4 Calibrate the ambient temperature sensor once a year Service Manual Calibrate the ambient pressure sensor once a year Service Manual Pace 12 9 Revision B 001 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor As of February 2001 R amp P began manufacturing the Series 1400a Monitor with newly designed mass flow controllers the Second Generation Flow Controller Design in the control unit If you purchased your Series 1400a Monitor before February 2001 or if the serial number on your monitor is 140AB234170011 or below your control unit has the original version mass flow controllers If you purchased a monitor with the original mass flow controller design follow the instructions in Appendix J If your monitor has the Second Generation mass flow controllers installed refer to the Service Manual for the mass flow controller software and hardware calibration procedures Also if you purchased the Flow Controller Upgrade Kit 55 7758 and installed the Second Generation mass flow controllers in your Series 1400a Monitor refer to the Service Manual for the mass flow controller software and hardware calibration pro
17. i 1400ab Site 11400 Yersion 3 012 Instrument Serial 22416 KA lt gt 1 Y Down Load Data Registers Real time Graph Key Pad E Storage Data Down load Graph Stora ge Pointers Storage Data 05 Apr 93 08 09 05 000 8 23 13 0 031 APPENDIX A OVERVIEW OF INSTRUMENT SCREENS Pace A 23 Revision B 001 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure A 50 Control buttons on the Storage Moves the storage pointer to the first record in the buffer The POISE Screen displayed position of the storage pointer will change unless the storage pointer was already at the beginning of the buffer Moves the storage pointer to the last record in the buffer The displayed position of the storage pointer will change unless the storage pointer was already at the end of the buffer ee o Moves the storage pointer back x number of records where x is defined in the Change Record Step box Moves the storage pointer forward x number of records where x is defined in the Change Record Step box Change Record Step box The step size can be 1 5 10 100 or 1000 APPENDIX A OVERVIEW OF INSTRUMENT SCREENS Pace A 24 Revision B 001 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure A 51 Registers screen a 1400ab Site 117400 Yersion 3 012 Instrument Serial 22416 ho M M PRC Name Value 1 Second 0 Minute 2
18. 5 Remove the two fuses from the insert Figures 2 6 and 2 7 Figure 2 6 Close up of the fuse holder insert with a fuse installed Figure 2 7 Placing the fuses into the fuse holder insert 6 Install the proper fuses into the insert Use 2A fuses for 115 VAC operation or 1A fuses for 230 VAC operation SECTION 2 SYSTEM INSTALLATION Pace 2 7 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure 2 8 left Installing the fuse insert into the fuse power cord socket and power line filter Figure 2 9 right Closing the cover on the power line filter Figure 2 10 The power line filter with the correct voltage A highlighted X Always wear appropriate anti static devices when working with the system electronics 7 Install the insert into the power line filter Figure 2 8 and close the cover Figure 2 9 so that you can read the correct voltage in the window Figure 2 10 POWER FUSE ii NT i PATASHNICK CO ING USA SERIAL NO 8 Remove the top cover of the control unit by unscrewing the screws holding the top cover plate in place Figure 2 11 9 Attach an antistatic wrist strap to your wrist Attach the other end of the antistatic wrist strap to the unit s enclosure SECTION 2 SYSTEM INSTALLATION Pace 2 8 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure 2 11 Top cover of the control uni
19. Appendix C For example the user can setthe monitor s time parameter by using command code 26 while in Operating Mode 5 Appendix C Pace L 12 Revision B 000 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor L 3 4 Down oap STORAGE This command allows the user to download data records that are stored in the monitor s internal data buffer The data download will begin at the current location of the storage pointer and end at the most recently recorded data record When the user selects this command the personal computer PC will request the number of datarecords that they want to download Figure L 8 Figure L 8 TEOMCOMM Main screen with request for number of data records to be downloaded displayed V3 TEOMCOMM Auto EIN sf al TEOMCOMM v1 41 Request the value of a register Modify the value of a register Set instrument mode Download storage Set storage pointer Fast Storage Out Exit program Enter number of records to download CA A11 _ Fi Help F2 Comm Config F3 Set Station F4 Options APPENDIX L TEOMCOMM Sortware Pace L 13 Revision B 000 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor If the user wants to download all available data records from the current position of the storage pointer to the end of the storage buffer the user should enter an A If the user wants to download a specific number of records starting at the storag
20. Construction of old style PM 1 and PM 2 5 inlets APPENDIX G INLET MAINTENANCE Pace G 17 Revision B 001 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor V Do not scrub the interior of the inlet You may damage the Teflon coating APPENDIX G INLET MAINTENANCE Follow these steps to maintain the old style PM 2 5 and PM 1 inlets 1 Remove the cyclone inlet from the flow splitter 2 Disassemble the inlet 3 Soak the inlet in soapy water any non organic laboratory deter gent is appropriate Do not scrub the interior of the inlet Scrubbing may damage the Teflon coating IMPORTANT Do not scrub the interior of the inlet Scrubbing may damage the Teflon coating 4 Rinse the inlet several times with deionized water The last rinse may be with acetone to facilitate drying The inlet also can be dried with air 5 Reassemble the inlet and cap it until you are ready to use it or install the inlet onto the flow splitter Pace G 18 Revision B 001 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor G 4 MainTENANCE or ACCU INLET The in line PM 2 5 ACCU inlet Figures G 23 and G 24 must be cleaned periodically to prevent the buildup of particulate matter and contaminants R amp P recommends cleaning this part every time a TEOM filter is exchanged in the sensor unit of the instrument Figure G 23 Schematic drawing of the In line PM 2 5 ACCU inle
21. Digital Output Components Output relay P C B 00 AA 10 000382 Input solid state relay early 1400 04 000387 Output solid state relay 00 AA 04 000392 Low energy output relay 00 AA 04 000396 Output solid state relay 240 VAC 00 AA 04 000404 Miscellaneous Components early 1400 AA AB 15 VDC power supply all models 10 000233 Amplifier P C B 00 AA 50 000356 Amplifier P C B exchange 00 AA 50 000356 Mass transducer assembly exchange 00 AA 56 002441 Pressure transducer 00 AA 14 000381 Relay board 00 AA 10 000382 Fan 15 VDC 00 AA 10 000385 APPENDIX E CONSUMABLES AND PARTS Pace E 2 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Heater power transformer 24 VAC 00 AA Probe air thermistor 00 AA Frequency counter P C B all models Frequency counter P C B exchange all models Computer power transformer 00 AA Sensor unit heat 120 240 VAC 00 AA Replacement shoes 3 for tripod all models Filter exchange tool all models Display keypad with English overlay AA AB Display keypad with Spanish overlay AA AB Display keypad with German overlay AA AB Key for instrument enclosure all models Early Series 1400 Specific Components Analog I O P C B Analog I O P C B exchange Main computer P C B Main computer P C B exchange Bypass flow splitter filter assembly Operator display keypad Series 1400a AA Specific Components Analog I O P C
22. Ensure that the instrument is in the Stop Mode 2 Transmit the proper values in PRCs 2 through 6 3 Execute the SF26 command APPENDIX C Two Way SERIAL COMMUNICATION Pace C 6 Revision B 000 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor AK Protocol Ask Storage Command ASTO COM 2 WAY SETTINGS RS Para 1 52 ASCII code for the 1 digit Station Number for example 4 052 The Station Number is always 1 digit in length ASCII code representation of the 2 digit Channel Number for example KO 075 048 The Channel Number is Reais 13049 always 2 digits in length Optional Up to 3 ASCII codes can be added to response from the instrument In this case lt CR gt and lt LF gt ASCII codes 013 and 010 are appended to the response Enter 0 if nothing is to be appended Lee eee ce To em oem BENIN 1 0 ERN NEA I I MN EX IRR NUN Ask Storage command 4 digit Ask Storage command RS Para 3 13010 gt 2 digit Channel Number as defined edes Number of current status conditions didis EIE ES cL NRRENNE storage This can be smaller than The number of records to be E requested number due to end of file downloaded from the instrument s Storage Marker moved to after last storage Downloading begins at the LE record transmitted Not right filled storage marker which can be set Up to 3 digits appended to the end of the entry for RS Para 3 a a RENE ee So The instrument th
23. Muxviewr doc Muxviewr exe Muxviewr hlp Muxviews hlp Screen mux Teomcomm cfg Teomcomm exe View bat View cfv NOTE You also can download these files from the R amp P website Appendix D APPENDIX M TEOMPLUS SorrwARE Pace M 2 Revision B 000 Operating Manual Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 3 Copy these files into the TEOMPLUS folder APPENDIX M TEOMPLUS SorrwARE Pace M 3 Revision B 000 Operating Manual Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor M 2 CONNECTING THE PERSONAL ComPUTER PC To THE ConTROL UNIT The TEOMPLUS software supports the use of either COM 1 or COM 2 on the PC Follow these steps to connect the PC to the control unit 1 Connect one end of the 9 to 9 pin computer cable to one of the RS232 ports on the control unit 2 Ensure that nothing is connected to the other RS232 port of the control unit 3 If your personal computer PC is equipped with a 9 pin RS232 connector go to step 4 If your personal computer is equipped with a 25 pin connector go to step 5 4 Plug the other end of the 9 to 9 pin computer cable into the 9 pin RS232 port of your PC Go to step 8 5 Locate the 9 to 25 pin computer cable adapter 6 Plug the 9 to 25 pin computer cable adapter into the 25 pin port on your PC 7 Plug the other end of the 9 to 9 pin computer cable into the 9 to 25 pin computer cable adapter Go to step 8 NOTE Do not use the 9 to 25 pin modem cable to
24. Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION 1 5 THEORY OF OPERATION The Series 1400a Monitor is a true gravimetric instrument that draws ambient air through a filter at a constant flow rate continuously weighing the filter and calculating near real time 10 minute mass concentrations In addition the instrument computes the total mass accumulation on the collection filter as well as 30 minute 1 hour 8 hour and 24 hour averages of the mass concentration The use of a hydrophobic filter material along with sample collection at above ambient temperature 50 C reduces the necessity for humidity equilibration Both analog and RS232 outputs are available to transmit the measurements to a user s data acquisition system The instrument s internal storage buffer can store a large amount of data for later viewing on the instrument s display or downloading over the RS232 output When the instrument samples the ambient sample stream first passes through the PM 10 inlet Figure 1 2 At its design flow rate of 16 7 l min this inlet allows particles smaller than 10 um diameter to pass through At the exit of the PM 10 inlet the 16 7 l min flow is isokinetically split into a 3 l min sample stream that is sent to the instrument s mass transducer and a 13 7 l min exhaust stream Inside the mass transducer this sample air stream passes through a filter made of Teflon coated borosilic
25. PC will request the new Operating Mode Figure L 7 Figure L 7 TEOMCOMM Main screen with request for new operating mode displayed V3 TEOMCOMM an d ee Ss sf al TEOMCOMM v1 41 Request the value of a register Modify the value of a register Set instrument mode Download storage Set storage pointer Fast Storage Out Exit program Enter mode number _ lt i Run 2 Data Stop 3 Stop All 4 F5 5 User Defined Fi Help F2 Comm Config F3 Set Station F4 Options APPENDIX L TEOMCOMM Sortware Pace L 11 Revision B 000 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor After the user enters the appropriate value for the new Operating Mode the PC will display a confirmation message that states that the instrument s Operating Mode has been successfully changed The user may choose between the following Operating Modes Operating Mode 1 Operating Mode 2 Operating Mode 3 Operating Mode 4 Operating Mode 5 APPENDIX L TEOMCOMM SorrwARE This selection puts the monitor into the Run Mode Section 6 This selection puts the instrument into the Setup Mode Section 6 This selection puts the instrument into the Stop Mode Section 6 This selection toggles the Analog Output 1 field between its normal operating mode and its use as a Status Watch indicator Section 4 This selection allows the user to exercise the SFxx command Set Function xx defined in the AK Protocol
26. PM 10 Monitor Figure 14 26 Set ACCU System screen additional lines displayed with channel 2 set for time sampling Figure 14 27 Set ACCU System screen additional lines displayed with channel 3 set for time sampling After you entered the proper PRC variables and values in channel 1 then you would display the rest of the ACCU channels and set the first PRC variable field to PRC 100 Time with a minimum permissible value of 0 and a maximum permissible value of 3600 Figures 14 26 and 14 27 SET ACCU SYSTEM 1 gt Time 2 Null SET ACCU SYSTEM 1 gt Time 2 Null After the ACCU System has exposed all of the flow channels for their predefined lengths of time the instrument will not use these channels again until the user resets them Section 14 ACCU System Pace 14 30 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure 14 28 Set ACCU System screen additional lines displayed with channel 1 set for sequential sampling 14 4 1 6 SEQUENTIAL SAMPLING The ACCU System can be configured to sample on a certain number of channels for a predetermined amount of time and then later return to those channels and sample on them again for the same amount of time The user assigns the length oftime during which each channel is active To set up the ACCU System for sequential sampling the user must enter PRC 100 Time as the first variable of each fl
27. Revision B 000 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor L 3 6 Fast Storace Out This command allows the user to download records stored in the data storage buffer using the Fast Store Out RS232 Mode Section 9 This command can be used only when the personal computer PC is connected directly to the monitor It can not be used when the PC is connected to a modem The Fast Storage Out command is similar to the Download Storage command The Fast Storage Out command allows the user to download data records that are stored in the monitor s internal data buffer The data download will begin at the current location of the storage pointer and end at the most recently recorded data record When the user selects this command the computer will request a filename which the Figure L 11 TEOMCOMM TEOMCOMM software program will use to save the data Figure L 11 Main screen with request for file name to store data displayed V3 TEOMCOMM avo tpfe Ex ws al TEOMCOMM v1 41 Request the value of a register Modify the value of a register Set instrument mode Download storage Set storage pointer Fast Storage Out Exit program Enter filename to store data _ Fi Help F2 Comm Config F3 Set Station F4 Options APPENDIX L TEOMCOMM Sortware Pace L 17 Revision B 000 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor The user must enteran MS DOS compliant fi
28. TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure 6 2 Overview of operating modes Operating Mode 1 Press the lt F1 gt or lt RUN gt key Operating Mode 2 Operating Mode 3 Operating Mode 4 Press the lt DATA STOP gt key Setup Mode SECTION 6 SOFTWARE SETUP Pace 6 2 Revision B 003 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor SECTION 6 SOFTWARE SETUP Operating Mode 3 Operating Mode 4 Setup Mode This operating mode indicates that the unit has computed the first total mass value but mass con centration and mass rate values are not yet available This operating mode indicates that unit is fully operational The monitor normally resides in this mode All mass values are being computed by the instrument When the unit is in this operating mode it continues to draw a sample flow and maintain operational temperatures but it does not collect any data Certain operating parameters such as temperatures and flow rates can only be changed in this mode because doing so during data collection Operating Modes 1 4 wouldaffect the data Press the DATA STOP gt key to enter the Setup Mode while in any operating mode When the unit is in the Setup Mode S the user can change all of the system s parameters To leave the Setup Mode and start data collection press either the lt F 1 g
29. The information lines contain the following information Mass Conc This field contains the 10 minute mass concentra tion average ug m This is a sliding average that 1s updated every two seconds This value cannot be changed by the user 30 Min MC This field contains the 30 minute mass concentra tion average ug m This is a sliding average that is updated every 30 minutes on the half hour This value cannot be changed by the user SECTION 4 SOFTWARE OVERVIEW Pace 4 7 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor SECTION 4 SOFTWARE OVERVIEW 01 Hr MC 08 Hr MC This field contains the 1 hour mass concentration average ug m This is a sliding average that is updated every 60 minutes on the hour This value cannot be changed by the user This field contains the mass concentration average with a user definable period 2 23 hours ug m This 1s a sliding average that is updated every 60 minutes on the hour The default period is 8 hours The period can be changed Section 6 but the average that this variable generates cannot be changed by the user NOTE Mass concentration averages of less than 24 hours can be averaged using data logging equipment to compute sliding 24 hour averages and 24 hour averages that do not necessarily start and end at midnight as well as averages on other user defined time scales 24 Hr MC Tot Mass Case Temp Air Temp Cap Temp T
30. These screens may vary slightly from your computer s screens if you are operating RPComm under other Windows operating systems The newest version of RPComm available from the R amp P Web site www rpco com is equipped with Autorun This means that every time you turn on your personal computer PC the RPComm software application will automatically begin running If you close the RPComm software application to use other software you may start it manually from the Start menu Follow these steps to run RPComm 1 Select the Start button on your PC s screen 2 When the Start menu displays select Programs the RPComm folder and then RPComm Figure 10 2 Section 10 RPComm SOFTWARE Pace 10 3 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure 10 2 Selecting Programs from the Start menu then the RPComm folder and RPComm My Computer CD ROM Disc oo e Network Shortcut to Neighborhood Lexmark Optra PS2 A America Online 3 0 for Windows 95 FW America Online 4 0 New Office Document ZY Open Office Document US Accessories US Adobe US Adobe Acrobat US America Online AOLpress AudioRack32 US Diablo LE Hoyle Mediamatics Software MPEG LE New Visio Drawing A Norton Antivirus Norton CrashGuard JS Norton Utilities US Norton Web Services US Novell US Online Services poANYWHERE 32 Lz Quicken US QuickTime for Windows L R
31. This parameter can be edited when the monitor is in any operating mode This field contains the number of data fields that the monitor will store per record The default setting for this parameter is 8 variables This parameter can be edited when the monitor is in any operating mode IMPORTANT All data stored in the internal data logger are lost when you change the value of the Stor Vars This field contains the station location variable This parameter contains an ASCII string which is a representation of a numeric field Appendix J that can be up to three digits long The ASCII string is stored with every record in the internal data logger and is transmitted every time data are sent to a serial device The default setting for this parameter is 48048048 which is the ASCII code for 000 This parameter can be edited when the monitor is in any operating mode Follow these steps to change the Stor Var 1 8 variables 1 Press the DATA STOP key 2 When in the Main screen Figure 6 1 press the STORE key to display the View Storage screen Section 8 3 When in the View Storage screen press the STEP SCREEN key to display the Set Storage screen Figure 6 9 You also can press the 0 and 9 keys and then press the ENTER key to display the Set Storage screen 4 Press the EDIT key The gt cursor will now change to the cursor 5 When in the Set Storage screen press
32. Top Window Load Communications Window TEOM Series 148B8a Monitor Page 1 Wait Time ve Std five Std fidj fidj Temp Temp Pres Pres Main Flow fiux Flow Muxview Load Communications Window 1 Hr Mass Conc 8 Hr Mass Conc 24 Hr Mass Conc Filt Load Case Temp fi r Tenp Cap Temp Enclosure Temp Main Flow Auxiliary Flow Serial Number Amb Temp Cal Constant Amb Pres Press lt F2 gt to toggle command mode APPENDIX M TEOMPLUS SorrwARE Wait Time five Std five Std Adj Adj Temp Temp Pres Pres Main Flow fiux Flow Revision B 000 Mm E3 Muxviewr v5 1 Pace M 15 Revision B 000 Operating Manual Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor SCAN OFF To stop the PC from automatically scanning instru ment values enter SCAN OFF after the cursor and then press the lt Enter gt key on your PC s key board You should always perform this command before disconnecting the cable connection between the PC and the control unit SCAN ON To enable the PC to automatically scan instrument values enter SCAN ON after the cursor and then press the lt Enter gt key on your PC s keyboard You should perform this command to allow the PC to resume its automatic scanning feature REPORT To save selected variables to a file or to send these values to a serial printer to be printed enter RE PORT after the cursor and then press the lt Enter gt key on your PC s keyboard The
33. absolute pressure not corrected to sea level Verify the monitor s ambient pressure by measuring the current ambient station pressure in mm Hg with an external measurement device To convert from Atmospheres 0 C to mm Hg multiply by 760 To convert from millibars to mm Hg multiply by 0 75012 To convert from inches Hg 32 F to mm Hg multiply by 25 4 Verify that the value of the for Amb Pres field is within 10 mm Hg of the measured ambient pressure If this is not the case perform the ambient pressure calibration procedure Service Manual Pace 5 9 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor v Do not run a flow audit procedure during a valid sampling run Figure 5 11 Removing the PM 10 inlet 5 3 3 Flow Aupit PROCEDURE R amp P recommends that the flow audit procedure be performed before initiating your first sample run The flow audit procedure checks the flow rates in the Series 1400a Monitor and can be done with minimal disturbance of the instrument s normal operating configuration The tolerances in this audit procedure should not be confused with the tighter specifications outlined in the calibration procedures of the Service Manual Perform the ambient air temperature verification Section 5 3 1 pressure verifica tion Section 5 3 2 and leak check Section 3 before executing the flow verification procedure Section 5 3 3 Tools Needed Fl
34. arrow keys to select the appropriate PRC from a list of predefined settings This field contains the comparison or logical opera tor lt gt gt lt gt AND or NAND used to compare Cont PRC and the constant value When in the Edit Mode use the up T and down lt 4 gt arrow keys to select the appropriate operator from a list of predefined settings This field contains the constant value against which Contl PRC is compared This field contains the program register code PRC Appendix B ofthe variable whose current value is to be tested When in the Edit Mode use the up T and down arrow keys to select the appropriate PRC from a list of predefined settings This field contains the comparison operator lt lt gt gt lt gt or logical operator AND or NAND used to compare Cont2 PRC and the constant value When in the Edit Mode use the up T and down arrow keys to select the appropriate operator from a list of predefined settings This field contains the constant value against which Cont2 PRC is compared The monitor performs an evaluation of the designated PRC s current value for each contact closure channel This test includes a comparison operator lt lt gt gt lt gt or a logical operator AND or NAND and a constant value with which the PRC is compared If the result of the comparison for an output channel is true the monitor closes the circuit
35. circuits is turned off This is an emergency state that is activated by pressing the lt STOP ALL gt key on the instrument s key pad To leave this mode press either the F1 or lt RUN gt key to enter Operating Mode 1 or the DATA STOP gt key to enter the Setup Mode This field contains the status of analog output chan nel 1 A O 1 Ifthe A O 1 field of the Main screen status line is blank analog output is operating in its usual fashion Section 9 Ifthe A O 1 field contains a analog output 1 is being used as a status watch indicator When defined in this fashion analog output 1 transmits a full scale signal for example 10 VDC if the channel is configured for 10 VDC operation ifa status condition exists in the temper atures flows or oscillation ofthe mass transducer If no such status condition exists analog output chan Pace 4 4 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 38 nel 1 operates in its usual fashion Section 10 When in the Main screen press the lt F5 gt key to display the in the A O 1 field and use the analog output channel as a status watch indictor This field contains the filter loading percentage Section 3 It indicates the portion of the TEOM filter s total capacity that has been used Because this value is determined by the pressure drop of the main sample flow line the instrument will always show a nonzero
36. depends on the number of data fields system variables stored in each record The instrument always stores the time date and station number in each record and eight other system variables can be defined by the user in the Set Storage screen Section 6 Figure 8 1 displays the capacity of the monitor s internal data storage Because header information is stored in each record the capacity of the data logger does not decrease proportionately with an increase in the number of data fields per record Data records can be viewed on the screen of the monitor Section 8 1 and or downloaded through the RS232 port Section 9 When this buffer is filled the oldest data points are replaced with the most recent information first in first out Figure 8 1 Approximate internal data storage Internal Data Storage Capacity capacity Data Fields per Record Capacity in Records Capacity in Time Minumum storage capacity Most configurations store more data Computed using a storage interval of 30 minutes SECTION 8 VIEWING STORED DATA Pace 8 1 Revision B 003 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 8 1 View STORAGE SCREEN The View Storage screen Figure 8 2 allows users to view the data records stored in the monitor s internal data logger circular storage buffer The fields in this screen cannot be edited Figure 8 2 View Storage Ed VIEW STORAGE 2056 16 20 03 15 Jan 01 gt Mass
37. directs the unit to use the average temperature and pressure values to regulate the volumetric flow through the system The instrument is delivered with the following temperatures and pressures settings Standard temperature 25 C Standard pressure 1 atmosphere atm Average temperature 25 C Average pressure atmosphere atm If the user receives the Series 1400a Monitor directly from R amp P the only change that the user must make before using the instrument for U S EPA equivalent PM 10 measurements is to choose how they want the monitor to control the volumetric flow actively Section 6 3 1 or passively Section 6 3 2 If the user wants to use the instrument for U S EPA equivalent PM 10 measurements they must ensure that the standard temperature is set to 25 C and the standard pressure is set to 1 atm regardless of the values that they entered for the average temperature and average pressure settings Also ifthe monitor has been used before and the user wants to return It to its original settings the user should first re initialize the unit Section 13 before selecting the active or passive volumetric flow control setting The unit also uses the parameters in the Set Temps Flows screen to determine how to report the measured mass concentration levels The user can choose to report the mass concentration levels to actual Section 6 3 3 or standard conditions Section 6 3 4 If the user chooses to se
38. for this parameter is 8 which causes the monitor to compute 8 hour averages The user can select any averaging time between 2 and 23 hours for this parameter This parameter can be edited when the monitor is in the Setup or Stop All Mode The 1400a monitor makes a minor empirically established adjustment to the mass concentration data to achieve results comparable to the PM 10 reference methods This is done using the formula Y A BX The Const A value must be set its default value of 3 0 to allow the Series 1400a Monitor to be used as an equivalent method for PM 10 measurements This parameter can be edited when the monitor is in the Setup Mode The 1400a monitor makes a minor empirically established adjustment to the mass concentration data to achieve results comparable to the PM 10 reference methods This is done using the formula Y A BX The Const B value must be set to its default value of 1 03 to allow the Series 1400a Monitor to be used as an equivalent method for PM 10 measurements This parameter can be edited when the monitor is in the Setup Mode The Series 1400a monitor makes Soft Rate soft ware and hardware adjustments for internal clock drift correction This value is set before the instru ment leaves R amp P and should not be changed unless the user loads new software into the instrument If Pace 6 21 Revision B 003 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate
39. two pins that it covers pins 2 and 3 and replace it over the middle pin and the other pin that was not previously covered pins 1 and 2 7 To change the jumper settings for output channels 2 and 4 repeat step 6 NOTE To change the analog output jumpers hardware settings back to 10 VDC replace the jumpers to pins 2 and 3 Ensure that the software settings are changed accordingly SEcTION 9 DATA INPUT AND OUTPUT Pace 9 17 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 8 Replace the cover of the control unit 9 Plug the monitor into its power source 10 Turn the monitor on 11 Press the lt A O gt key on the monitor s keypad This will display the Set Analog Outputs screen Figure 9 12 12 Press the lt EDIT gt key 13 Change the value for the Jumpers variable s in the appropriate fields Section 9 2 1 IMPORTANT The three analog outputs 1 2 and 4 must always be set to the same voltage scale 14 Check the calibration of the analog board Service Manual SEcTION 9 DATA INPUT AND OUTPUT Pace 9 18 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure 9 15 Default configuration of contact closures Figure 9 16 Pin Assign ments of contact closures 1 and 2 on 15 pin analog output connector 9 3 Contact CLosure Circuits The user can monitor the unit s operation and filter life by using two user definabl
40. 10 Monitor Figure A 47 Download Graph screen i 1400ab Site 11400 Version 3 012 Instrument Serial 22416 E Downloaded 12 records 4 5 99 11 16 33 AM Down Load Data Registers Real time Graph Key Pad qe nennen enne nne enn enne nnne Storage Data Down load Graph Storage Pointers 22 Mass Conc Noise 15323 0 4 0 07 04 05 99 09 57 04 05 9910 02 04 05 9910 08 04 05 9910 13 04 05 99 10 19 APPENDIX A OVERVIEW OF INSTRUMENT SCREENS Pace A 21 Revision B 001 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure A 48 Control buttons on the Download Clears all data listed on the right hand side of the Download Graph Graph screen screen This includes the data being displayed Decreases the scale of the x and y axes concurrently With this icon selected press and hold the left mouse button and make a box around an area inside the graph that you want to zoom into Once the box is finished release the mouse button The graph will be resized according to the box dimensions Decreases the scale ofthe x axis With this icon selected press and hold the left mouse button at the beginning of the area that you want to zoom into Drag the cursor horizontally to the end ofthe zoom area and release the mouse button The graph will be resized according to the new x axis dimensions Decreases the scale ofthe y axis With this icon selected
41. 10 38 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure 11 1 Main screen with keypad locking level A highlighted Section 11 Password Protection The Series 1400a Monitor offers three levels of keypad locking unlock mode low lock mode and high lock mode The Main screen displays the current keypad locking level on its status line Figure 11 1 The instrument is always in the unlock mode when it is first shipped from R amp P allowing the user full access to all of the functions of the monitor OK 4 11 Mass Conc gt 30 Min MC 01 Hr MC The three states of password protection are defined as Unlock U mode The user has access to all capabilities of the instru ment Low lock L mode The user can view all of the instrument screens or restart data collection by pressing the Fl or lt RUN gt key but cannot edit any of the system variables Also the user can change the operating mode of the instrument while in the low lock mode to perform functions such as a filter exchange High lock H mode The user cannot make any changes from the keypad except for turning off the high lock mode with the proper password Also the user can only view the operation of the instrument through the current screen on the four line display The keys for moving the cursor and switching to different screens are disabled when the monitor is in the high lock mode SECTION 11 PASsworD PR
42. 12 5 SECTION 12 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE AND VERIFICATION PROCEDURES Revision B 001 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure 12 6 Pulling the silver handle down Holding rod 8 Pull the holding rod off the latch plate Figure 12 7 Figure 12 7 Releasing the holding rod on the mass transducer 9 With the mass transducer unlatched grasp the black knob Figure 12 4 and swing the bottom of the mass transducer downward exposing the tapered element TE Figures 12 8 and 12 9 SECTION 12 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE AND VERIFICATION PROCEDURES Pace 12 6 Revision B 001 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure 12 8 Opening the mass transducer Figure 12 9 The mass transducer in its open position with thermistor removed 10 Place a piece of plastic or another protective material over the exposed TEOM filter 11 Using a soapy water alcohol or freon solution clean the entire air inlet Figure 12 10 A soft brush may be used to remove particu late matter on the insides of the walls SECTION 12 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE AND VERIFICATION PROCEDURES Pace 12 7 Revision B 001 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure 12 10 Air inlet inside the mass transducer ust esttdsipb t engan TA t nnn 77 AAA adl 12 Allow the air inlet to dry 13 Remove the protective material from th
43. 14 4 1 1 ACCU Samp ine BY Time or Day To set up an ACCU channel to sample at a specific period of time during the day enter PRC 62 Curr Ti Da in one ofthe PRC variable fields of the channel Section 14 4 The monitor computes time in a 24 hour format Be sure to enter a beginning sampling time in the minimum permissible value field and an ending sampling time in the maximum permissible value field For example if you wanted the channel to begin sampling at 9 00 a m you would enter 900 in the minimum permissible value field If you wanted the channel to end sampling at 2 00 p m you would enter 1400 in the maximum permissible value field Figure 14 19 SET ACCU SYSTEM 1 gt Curr Ti Da Null To set the channel to sample for an entire day from midnight of one day to the following midnight of the next day you would enter 0 12 00 a m in the minimum permissible value field and 2359 11 59 p m in the maximum permissible value field Section 14 ACCU System Pace 14 24 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure 14 20 Set ACCU System screen with channel 1 set for specific time date sampling 14 4 1 2 ACCU Sampune BY SPEciFIC Time DATE To set up the ACCU channel to sample for specific time periods during specific days you would first enter PRC 62 Curr Ti Da in one of the PRC variable fields of the channel Section 14 4 Then you w
44. 16 Revision B 000 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor NOTE Phone numbers should be entered with country codes city or area codes and then the phone number For the U S 1 518 555 5555 23 Select the OK button The Connection Type screen will now appear as the active screen on your computer 24 When in the Connection Type screen select the OK button 25 To connect to one of the instruments through the modem high light the connection name on the Connection List screen Figure H 1 and then select the Connection icon on the tool bar t The modem connection will now be initiated When communica tion is established the Download Data screen will be displayed Figure H 7 NOTE Ifthe connection is successful the unit s serial number will be displayed at the top of the screen If the connection is not successful or if there is no instrument attached then the serial number will be blank or will display 99999 Ifthe modem loses its connection wait at least 1 minute before trying to establish another connection This allows the modem to reset itself 26 After the connection has been verified disconnect the modem connection to the instrument 27 Attach the male end of the 9 to 9 pin cable to the RS232 connec tor on the other instrument 28 Repeat steps 15 through 26 using appropriate values for the required parameters refer to your instrument s Operating Ma
45. 2 110 Viewed ACCU Maximum 3 Dm eine ACCU wanes Program Register Code is the same as in version Viewed ACCU Variable 2 115 116 117 118 119 120 122 APPENDIX B PROGRAM REGISTER CODES Eme meme v wa 5 wow o pv 5 Twa e xa s enc perae o we 5 wp ow pv 5 Du ow o p 55 enc perae o we 5 wow o p 5 Du o o p 5 enc perae o was wp ow o pv s Dee T pa sa a se a ccs not editable N A V A V A N A N A N A A not editable not editable 1 2 3 4 S X not editable afo D ma e De 1 software for compatibility Pace B 7 Revision B 001 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor PROGRAM REGISTER CODES 125 153 Frequency 1 Mass Calibration Verification hz not editable N A N A Audit KO Calibration Constant Twa wa owe rote 2 Current Input Voltage C not editable N N Current Ambient Temperature C not editable Current Ambient Pressure m not editable Instrument Type 0 AA 1 AT 2 AB code not editable A A t V a Current A I Type 0 Equat 1 WSpd 2 WDir code EE AME NENETT Current A I of Full Scale FS ambient A NA NA FTS Flow calculated volumetric flow l min Code for Contact Closure Operators 0 1 lt 2 2 3 2 4 5 5 lt gt 6 AND 7 NAND 7 4 13 4 4 B B 4 4 B 0 3 44 5 6 7 4 I o APPEND
46. 24 1995 the U S EPA approved the modification of the Series 1400a Monitor to include new features in units with serial numbers containing the AB designation These changes include but are not limited to the redesign of the mass transducer new layout of the control unit inclusion of sensors for ambient tempera ture and pressure and the use of mass flow controllers designed by R amp P The Series 1400a Monitor contains the following features e New mass transducer design provides improved mass resolution for short term measurements Instrument operation at 1 2 or 3 l min to provide time resolved mass measurements in locations ranging from clean background monitoring stations to highly polluted urban areas Incorporates R amp P s AB technology for enhanced measurement stabil ity for mobile installations Filter based direct mass monitoring using R amp P s patented TEOM technology that never requires mass recalibration The instrumentation contains no radioactive components and has a 2 year warranty Continuous dust monitor with U S EPA approval EQPM 1090 079 that complies with the California ARB 1 hour acceptance criteria for mass concentration precision TEOM instrumentation has German T V approval for TSP measurements Mass and time resolution mass transducer minimum detection limit of 0 01 ug The instrument has a precision of 5 0 ug m for 10 minute averaged data and 1 5 ug m for 1 hour averages
47. 7 Ground pin 8 Analog board channel 13 jumpers variable should be ali 4 G doin 10 Anal g board ch 114 set to 10 VDC for most 5 Signal pin TOUR pm SIDE poate conditions 6 Signal pin 11 Ground pin 12 Analog board channel 15 Analog input channels 1 6 can be jumpered on the L shaped analog input output board as 2 VDC 10 VDC or 4 20 mA channels 10 15 on the board Figure 9 4 Analog input jumpers te LI acm x Li LI EY wees a A d J ers dirus s SEcTION 9 DATA INPUT AND OUTPUT Pace 9 4 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure 9 5 L shaped analog input output board located inside the control unit q x a a bl Telly 4133 amp tee perc LY uncus ME T MI ni E X MEC HE s Fl ee Input jumpers SEcTION 9 DATA INPUT AND OUTPUT Pace 9 5 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 9 1 1 View ANALOG INPUTS SCREEN The View Analog Inputs screen Figure 9 6 displays the current values of the monitor s analog and meteorological inputs Figure 9 6 View Analog Inputs screen VIEW ANALOG INPUTS A I 0 gt 0 000 A I 1 17 363 A I 2 27 463 Youcan display the View Analog Inputs screen on the four line display ofthe control unit in two different ways 1 When in the Main screen Figure 9 7 press the lt STEP SCREEN gt key to display the Menu screen Figure 9 8 When in the
48. 9 Slide the flow splitter up through the center hole of the tripod Figures 2 50 and 2 51 Figure 2 50 Center hole of the tripod with the holding ring A and the tightening knob B highlighted Figure 2 51 Tripod with an installed flow splitter A highlighted 10 Tighten the tripod s holding ring onto the flow splitter with the tightening knob Figure 2 50 SECTION 2 SYSTEM INSTALLATION PAGE 2 34 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 11 Adjust the legs of the tripod Figure 2 52 to position the open end of the flow splitter at a height of 1 5 m to 1 8 m above the roof Figure 2 52 Adjusting the legs on the optional support tripod 12 Center the tripod over the roof opening 13 Fasten the tripod feet to the roof with wood screws Figure 2 53 The length and type of screws required to fasten the tripod feet to the roof depends upon the type of roof surface The tripod feet also may be attached to a pallet or 3 4 marine plywood with the pallet or plywood secured by concrete blocks or sand bags Figure 2 53 Screwing the i tripod foot onto the roof surface 14 You must now assemble the sampling system components Sec tion 2 4 3 SECTION 2 SYSTEM INSTALLATION Pace 2 35 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 2 4 3 SAMPLING System SETUP Follow these steps to install th
49. ACCU Installation eseseeeenneee 14 7 14 2 3 Installing the Optional ACCU Stand 14 11 14 2 8 1 Optional ACCU Stand Compilation Package 14 11 14 2 3 2 Assembling the Optional ACCU Stand 14 12 14 2 3 3 Mounting the ACCU Enclosure Onto the Optional Stand sssssss 14 13 14 3 Filter Cartridge Installation and Exchange 14 14 14 3 1 Filter Cartridge Installation ssseeessssse 14 14 14 3 2 Filter Cartridge Exchange ssesesseesss 14 18 14 4 Set ACCU System Screen sss 14 19 14 4 4 Defining an ACCU Channel sese 14 23 14 4 1 14 ACCU Sampling by Time of Day 14 24 14 4 1 2 ACCU Sampling by Specific Time Date 14 25 14 4 1 3 ACCU Sampling by Concentration Level 14 26 PAGE XIII Revision B 003 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Table of Contents continued 144 14 Episodic Sampling omae ete ttes 14 27 14 4 1 5 Time Sampling eeeseeeeeeeeee 14 29 14 4 1 6 Sequential Sampling sseesssessss 14 31 14 5 View ACCU System Screen ssssssssesees 14 33 14 6 Resetting ACCU Channels seseenne 14 35 14 7 ACCU
50. Ask Storage Command The user can download a specified number of records from the internal data logger from the current position of the data storage pointer The location of this storage pointer may be defined by the SSTO command The values on each line of output are delimited by commas SSTO Set Storage Command The user can change the location of the data storage pointer in the internal data logger and is used in conjunction with the ASTO command described above The data storage pointer is always located immediately after the last record transmitted through the RS232 port via the AK Protocol If the circular buffer overwrites this location or ifthe ASTO or SSTO commands have not been used the data storage pointer is positioned at the oldest record in the internal data logger APPENDIX C Two Way SERIAL COMMUNICATION Pace C 1 Revision B 000 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor The following pages show how RS Para 1 through RS Para 4 are defined in the AK Protocol and also detail the format of the transmission and response messages of the commands listed above APPENDIX C Two Way SERIAL COMMUNICATION Pace C 2 Revision B 000 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor AK Protocol Ask Register Command AREG COM 2 WAY SETTINGS 52 ASCII code for the 1 digit Station Number for example 4 052 The Station Number is always 1 digit in length RS Para 1 ASC
51. B Analog I O P C B exchange Analog I O P C B external Analog I O P C B external exchange Upgrade to analog I O external exchange Main computer P C B Main computer P C B exchange Series 1400a AB Specific Components Main computer P C B Main computer P C B exchange Analog I O P C B Analog I O P C B exchange LED status light Probe air thermistor Amplifier P C B Amplifier P C B exchange Mass transducer assembly exchange Interface P C B Interface P C B exchange Temperature sensor cable 10 m APPENDIX E CONSUMABLES AND PARTS Revision B 003 03 000386 56 000389 10 000394 10 000394 03 000395 56 000493 0004 10 000447 55 002013 0001 10 001589 0USA 10 001589 0SPN 10 001589 0GER 20 005922 10 000383 10 000383 10 000390 10 000390 32 000403 10 000388 10 001595 0008 10 001595 0008 10 001595 0016 10 001595 0016 59 002268 0001 10 001594 0006 10 001594 0006 10 001594 0006 10 001594 0006 10 001595 0016 10 001595 0016 05 001794 56 002744 50 002820 50 002820 54 003582 50 003232 50 003232 51 003355 Pace E 3 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Transformer 15 V Transformer 12 V Connecting Cables Electric amp air cable 2 m 1 air flow line AB Electric amp air cable 10 m 1 air flow line AB Electric amp air cable 20 m 1 air flow line AB Electric amp air cable 2 m 2 air flow line AB Electric amp air ca
52. BY SELLER SHALL IMMEDIATELY VOID AND CANCEL ALL WARRANTIES WITH RESPECT TO THE AFFECTED PRODUCTS THE OBLIGATIONS CREATED BY THIS WARRANTY STATEMENT TO REPAIR OR REPLACE A DEFECTIVE PRODUCT SHALL BE THE SOLE REMEDY OF BUYER IN THE EVENT OF A DEFECTIVE PRODUCT EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PROVIDED IN THIS WARRANTY STATEMENT SELLER DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED ORAL OR WRITTEN WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCTS INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ALL IMPLIED WAR RANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE SELLER DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE PRODUCTS ARE ERROR FREE OR WILL ACCOMPLISH ANY PARTICU LAR RESULT PAGE V Revision B 003 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Equipment Ratings The following information can be used to determine the power service requirements for the TEOM 1400 1400a Monitors not including the sampling pump Line Voltage 115 V 60 Hz 1 0 Amp 230 V 50 Hz 0 5 Amp IMPORTANT Disconnect the power cord from the power source output while servicing the instrument to prevent electrical hazard Environmental Ranges The instrument and its sample pump must be installed in a weather sheltered location that is heated in the winter and air conditioned in the summer NOTE There may be hazardous line wire accessible inside the enclosure Installation Category 11 PAGE VI Revision B 003 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Parti
53. C5 N 99 Description of Status Codes PRC 041 N A N A Co A 1 Mass Transducer 2 Temperature 4 Flow Rate 8 1 N oa N a N o o Filter Exchange 6 Voltage N A X N co N N o N wo o wo eo oO Co A A Alou Wolo wo wo A NI lolo oO G0 o AB BRjoljco e co oa N 102 O wo A o A o NTN oO o w N w N APPENDIX C Two Way SERIAL COMMUNICATION Pace C 4 Revision B 000 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor AK Protocol Enter Register Command EREG COM 2 WAY SETTINGS RS Para 1 ASCII code for the 1 digit Station Number for example 4 052 The Station Number is always 1 digit in length RS Para 2 75048 ASCII code representation of the 2 digit Channel Number for example KO 075 048 The Channel Number is always 2 digits in length codes 013 and 010 are appended to the response Enter 0 if nothing is to be appended RS Para 3 13010 Optional Up to 3 ASCII codes can be added to response from the instrument In this case CR and lt LF gt ASCII ee eem mm T e Le T cem 3 lca ae Em E Enter Register command 4 digit Enter Register command BLUE c rpm mm EARE T ie sees ee el lt gt variable whose value is being may ped 1o 3 digits long and is not digits long Do not right fill if the PRC E e e Up to 3 digits appended to the end of referenced by
54. Comm Config F3 Set Station F4 Options APPENDIX L TEOMCOMM Sortware Pace L 5 Revision B 000 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 4 The TEOMCOMM program will prompt the user to enter a new station number and channel number Enter 4 for the station number and KO for the channel number NOTE All alphabetic letters must be capitalized Ensure that the letter K is followed by a zero 0 not the letter O 5 Press the lt Enter gt key on your PC s keyboard 6 Press the lt F2 gt key on the PC s keyboard to display the v The communication TEOMCOMM Communications Setup screen Figure L 3 parameters of the Series 1400a monitor and the NOTE The original configuration ofthe TEOMCOMM software should match TEOMCOMM software must the default settings of the monitor If you want to connect the monitor to a PC match in order for the Cotmp ter dd Cormihicsts through a modem you may need to change the settings of the Baud Connec properly with the monitor tion Com Port and Phone fields Figure L 3 TEOMCOMM Communications Setup Screen BIDDER I aw d e EJ ef al TEOMCOMM v1 41 Baud Parity Data 1 1208 None 1 hits 2408 Even 1 8 bits i 48808 Odd i Ea 96808 C 1 19266 Stop Hardware Handshake Flow Control i x1 1 bit None None i 1 2 hits 1 CTS and DSR 1 XON KOFF 1 CTS Only 1 DSR Only Co
55. Conc 74 9 30 Min MC 72 3 You can display the View Storage screen on the four line display of the control unit in three different ways 1 Press the lt STORE gt key on the control unit s keypad 2 When in the Main screen Figure 8 3 press the STEP SCREEN gt key to display the Menu screen Figure 8 4 When in the Menu screen press the up lt T gt and down lt gt arrow keys to select View Storage and then press the lt ENTER gt key 3 Press the lt 0 gt and lt 8 gt keys and then press the lt ENTER gt key Figure 8 3 Main screen OK 4 Mass Conc gt 30 Min MC 01 Hr MC Figure 8 4 Menu screen LISTING OF SCREENS gt Set Temps Flows Set Hardware View ACCU System SECTION 8 VIEWING STORED DATA Pace 8 2 Revision B 003 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor The View Storage screen contains additional lines that cannot be seen when the screen first displays on the control unit s four line display Figure 8 5 Press the up lt T gt and down lt gt arrow keys to move the gt cursor on the screen up or down one line at a time To move the cursor up six lines press the lt SHIFT gt key and hold it down while pressing the up lt T gt arrow key To move the cursor down six lines press the lt SHIFT gt key and hold it down while pressing the down arrow key To move the cursor to the first line of the screen press the lt CTRL gt key a
56. Display the contents of the TEOMPLUS folder that you created in Section M 1 on your PC s screen If you want to display the monitor s current set points and values for all operation param eters go to step 5 If you want to display the cumulative time and volume for each channel of the ACCU system go to step 6 If you want to display an overview of the analog inputs received by the instrument go to step 7 APPENDIX M TEOMPLUS SorrwARE Pace M 6 Revision B 000 Operating Manual Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 5 Place your cursor on the View bat file and click twice with your mouse The TEOMPLUS VIEW screen Figure M 4 will display Refer to Section M 4 for further information on the TEOMPLUS VIEW screen Go to step 8 Figure M 4 TEOMPLUS VIEW screen Top Window VIEW Muxviewr v5 1 TEOM Series 1400a Monitor Page 1 12 41 16 27 Dec 99 E Ave Time Mass Rate 14 3 ug 300 0 Mode 1 Mass Conc 79 4 ug m 3 Status OK Total Mass 974 56 ug 300 0 No Curr Conditions 30 Min Mass Conc 2 3 ug m 3 O1 Hr Mass Conc 78 4 ug m 3 Q8 Hr Mass Conc 85 8 ug m 3 0 037 24 Hr Mass Conc 69 3 ug m 3 187 05684 hz Filt Load Volts 18 60 Wait Time Case Temp C 0 04 Ave Temp Air Temp x C 0 22 Std Temp Cap Temp C 0 06 Ave Pres Enclosure Temp O 0 14 Std Pres Main Flow l min 9005 Adj Main Flow Auxiliary Flow P 7 l mn 10259 Adj Aux Flow Serial Number 2374
57. ENCLOSURE Pace K 15 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor K 7 MAINTENANCE The outdoor enclosure requires little maintenance The only item that requires periodic attention is the air conditioner s condenser air inlet which is located inside the top right corner of the air conditioner housing Clean the air inlet filter by flushing it with warm water and allowing it to dry thoroughly Recoat the filter with McLean Midwest RP Super Filter Coat adhesive 22 002678 or an equivalent adhesive Ifthe air conditioner filter is damaged you can purchase new filters 32 003022 from R amp P Clean the screen on the back of the pump box periodically to keep it free of contamination APPENDIX K COMPLETE OUTDOOR ENCLOSURE Pace K 16 Revision B 000 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Appendix L TEOMCOMM Software TEOMCOMM isa communications software package developed by R amp P to provide interactive remote communication with the Series 1400a Monitor The user can use this software application to download data stored in the instrument and retrieve and set instrument operating parameters remotely TEOMCOMM has two communication modes direct and modem Direct commu nication is accomplished when the unit has a direct cable connection with a personal computer PC Modem communication is accomplished when the unit has a connec tion with a PC through t
58. Figure 2 2 Power line filter with voltage setting indicator A highlighted Figure 2 3 Back panel of TEOM control unit with the fuse power cord socket and power line filter A ambient temperature sensor connector B ACCU connector C 25 pin 2 Consult a licensed electrician if you are uncertain of the electrical electrical HARE to i requirements in your area If the voltage setting is appropriate for Sen E i wiped Sow your installation go to step 8 If the voltage setting is not appro connection F and pump priate for your installation go to step 3 connection G highlighted OO cc SO OE D URED A W a a LEM TESTE BYPASS SENSOR OW PUMP FLOW FL fs SECTION 2 SYSTEM INSTALLATION Pace 2 5 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 3 Place the blade of a small slotted screwdriver in the slot on top of the fuse power cord socket and power line filter Figure 2 4 and open the cover Figure 2 4 Opening the cover of the fuse power cord socket and power line filter with a screwdriver 4 Place the blade of a small slotted screwdriver in the top of the fuse holder insert Remove the insert by sliding it out of the power line filter Figure 2 5 Figure 2 5 Removing the fuse insert with the screwdriver SECTION 2 SYSTEM INSTALLATION Pace 2 6 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor
59. Flow Controllers This appendix describes the maintenance and verification procedures for the Original Design Mass Flow Controllers of the Series 1400a Monitor Appendix K Complete Outdoor Enclosure This appendix describes the set up and operation of the Complete Outdoor Enclosure an air conditioned and heated instrument enclosure that houses the Series 1400a Monitor and optional data logging hardware Appendix L TEOMCOMM Software This appendix describes the screens and operation of the TEOMCOMM software program Appendix M TEOMPL US Software This appendix describes the screens and operation of the TEOMPLUS software program Pace 1 6 Revision B 001 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION 1 3 APPLICATION RANGE OF THE SERIES 1400A Monitor The Series 1400a Monitor is a real time device used for measuring the particulate matter mass concentration of particulate matter smaller than 10 um diameter in outdoor and indoor ambient air as well as for other particle size cut points TEOM instruments are the only filter based mass monitors that measure the mass of particulate matter suspended in gas streams in real time This is made possible through the use of an inertial mass transducer patented in the U S and internationally by Rupprecht amp Patashnick Co Inc The monitor is ideally suited for applications demanding real time ambient air particulate matter monitoring in
60. Follow these steps to install a control unit in a rack 1 Locate the two rack mounts Figure 2 28 Figure 2 28 Rack mounts Ret 2 Fasten the rack mounts to the control unit Figures 2 29 and 2 30 by screwing them to the sides of the unit near the front panel with the six 10 32x3 8 screws provided with the rack mounting kit Figure 2 29 Screwing the rack mount onto a TEOM control unit SECTION 2 SYSTEM INSTALLATION Pace 2 19 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure 2 30 Front of TEOM control unit with rack mounts installed 3 Install the TEOM control unit onto the rack by screwing the rack mounts to the front of the rack supports Figure 2 35 NOTE If the back of the rack is not accessible you must install the air flow and electric connections on the back of the control unit Section 2 3 before attaching the control unit to the rack SECTION 2 SYSTEM INSTALLATION Pace 2 20 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure 2 31 Three TEOM control units installed in a rack 4 You must now assemble the sensor unit connections Section 2 3 4 SECTION 2 SYSTEM INSTALLATION PAGE 2 21 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 2 3 4 SENSOR Unit CONNECTIONS Follow these steps to assemble the sensor unit connections 1 Install the sensor
61. INSTRUMENT OUTDOORS The instrument can be located outside of an air monitoring station if sufficient protection is provided from adverse weather conditions and enough ventilation is supplied to ensure cooling in the summer An optional heated and air conditioned Complete Outdoor Enclosure is available for housing the sensor unit control unit and pump Figure 2 82 The enclosure has room in its rack for a data logger modem or other appropriately sized equipment The foundation for the outdoor enclosure should be sturdy If the user wants to mount it on a roof the support structure of the enclosure must be attached directly to the roof rather than to auxiliary walkways or platforms Contact R amp P to purchase an enclosure and refer to Appendix K for instructions on setting up the Complete Outdoor Enclosure Figure 2 82 Complete Outdoor Enclosure with instrument installed SECTION 2 SYSTEM INSTALLATION Pace 2 55 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor This page left intentionally blank SECTION 2 SYSTEM INSTALLATION Pace 2 56 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor X Do not handle TEOM filters with your fingers Figure 3 1 Close up of the filter exchange tool A and a TEOM filter B Section 3 Sample Preparation This section explains how to install and replace sample filters and discusses the length of the sample
62. Menu screen press the up 1 and down 1 arrow keys to select View Analog Inputs and then press the lt ENTER gt key 2 Press the 2 and 3 keys and then press the lt ENTER gt key Figure 9 7 Main screen OK 4 Mass Conc gt 30 Min MC 01 Hr MC Figure 9 8 Menu screen LISTING OF SCREENS gt Set Temps Flows Set Hardware View ACCU System The View Analog Inputs screen contains additional lines that cannot be seen when the screen first displays on the control unit s four line display Figure 9 9 Press the up lt T gt and down lt gt arrow keys to view the additional lines of the View Analog Inputs screen SEcTION 9 DATA INPUT AND OUTPUT Pace 9 6 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure 9 9 View Analog Inputs screen with addi tional lines displayed A I A I A I A I Wind Spd Wind Vel Wind Dir VIEW ANALOG INPUTS gt 0 000 17 363 27 463 15 957 1 640 2 983 41 885 0 0 0 0 0 0 The View Analog Inputs screen contains the following information SEcTION 9 DATA INPUT AND OUTPUT A TO A TI A T2 A 13 This field contains the average analog input 0 engineering units value The averaging time is determined by the interval parameter set on the Set Storage screen Section 6 The average input value for analog input channel 0 is assigned program register code PRC 114 Appendix B
63. Modi fied PM 10 sample inlet installed onto a flow splitter B with the entrance to the sample inlet A highlighted 3 Perform a leak check on the system Section 3 4 SECTION 2 SYSTEM INSTALLATION Pace 2 49 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 2 4 5 2 CONVERTING FROM A PM 10 ro A PM 1 Monitor Follow these steps to convert the PM 10 Monitor to a PM 2 5 Monitor using the sharp cut cyclone SCC PM 1 second stage inlet 1 Remove the PM 10 inlet from the top of the flow splitter by pulling it straight upward Figure 2 79 Figure 2 79 Removing the PM 10 inlet from the flow splitter 2 Apply a small amount of silicone grease to the 2 O rings inside of the base of the SCC PM 1 inlet Figure 2 74 3 Install the SCC PM 1 inlet onto the top of the flow splitter by pushing it straight down until it hits a stop 4 Apply a small amount of silicone grease to the two O rings inside of the base of the PM 10 inlet Figure 2 71 or 2 72 5 Install the PM 10 inlet onto the top of the SCC PM 1 inlet by push ing it straight down until it hits a stop 6 The Series 1400a Monitor is now configured as a PM 1 monitor There is no difference in monitor programming or operation with the SCC PM 1 second stage inlet installed SECTION 2 SYSTEM INSTALLATION Pace 2 50 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure 2 80
64. Muxview Report Selection Window dialog box Figure M 13 will now display as the active screen Select the appro priate parameters and press the Enter key Press Figure M 13 TEOMPLUS the End key to exit from the REPORT command VIEW screen with Muxview Report Selection Window dialog box displayed S VIEW MUXVIEWR OF x Bato neje m er um A Top Window Report Selection Window Muxviewr v5 1 Reporting is K On lt See Specific Help Report Output Location Printer Report File Name muxview rpt Filename Date Autonaming Of f On Starting Page First Line 6 Ending Page End Last Line 23 Enter END to print to the end of the configuration Use Database Format i Yes Report Event Type At Interval On Discrete Event Report Time Interval mins 1 Discrete Variable APPENDIX M TEOMPLUS SorrwARE Pace M 16 Revision B 000 Operating Manual Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor REPORT ON REPORT OFF APPENDIX M TEOMPLUS SorrwARE When the REPORT function is turned on the PC saves the following columns of values to a file or sends the values to a serial printer to be printed Date The date dd mmm yy is expressed in ASCII characters Time The time hh mm ss is expressed in ASCII characters MC Sliding 10 minute average mass concentra tion 30 Min MC 30 minute average mass concen tration 01 Hr MC 1 hour average mass concentration 08 Hr MC 8 hour average mass concentrati
65. Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 8 Install one end of the electrical cable to the electrical connector on the ACCU enclosure Figure 14 8 Figure 14 8 Electrical connector and sample flow outlet located on the right hand panel of the ACCU System enclosure c Cd Electrical connector e Sample flow outlet em amp PATASHNICK CO INC Albany N ee NO acenaao3255408 9 Install the other end of the electrical cable to the connector la belled ACCU on the back panel of the control unit Section 2 10 Install the filter cartridge s into the ACCU System channels Section 14 3 11 Turn the control unit on 12 Perform a leak check Section 3 Section 14 ACCU System Pace 14 10 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 14 2 3 INSTALLING THE OPrioNAL ACCU STAND 14 2 3 1 X OPrioNAL ACCU STAND CowPiLATION PACKAGE The optional ACCU stand package contains the following items Figure 14 9 Section 14 ACCU System Right vertical support A Left vertical support B Cross support C Right gusset D Left gusset E Gusset support F Right horizontal support G Left horizontal support H 2 gusset spacers I 10 1 4 inch split washers J 10 1 4 inch flat washers K 10 1 4 20 x 5 8 long hex bolts L 10 1 4 20 hex nuts M 4 3 8 inch sealing washers N 4 3 8 16 x 3 4 i
66. PAGE 9 34 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 18 Press the lt ENTER gt key The instrument will begin downloading data to the PC or other serial data recording device such as a data logger immediately after you press the lt ENTER gt key NOTE If you leave the monitor in the Fast Store Out Mode after the monitor has transmitted the last data record in its data storage buffer the monitor will continue to transmit stored data records to the PC or other serial data recording device as data records are stored in its data storage buffer The user sets the rate at which data records are stored in the data storage buffer and the stored variables that will be downloaded to the PC or other serial data recording device when in the Set Storage screen Section 6 19 When the data download is complete set the RS232 protocol to None 20 Disconnect the RS232 cable from the monitor and the PC or other serial data recording device SEcTION 9 DATA INPUT AND OUTPUT Pace 9 35 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 9 4 4 2 PRINT ON LINE Mope The user must set up the monitor to download data records using the Print On Line Mode before they have been recorded This RS232 protocol will download data to a PC or other serial recording device while the unit is recording data records Follow these steps to download data using the Print
67. PM 10 Monitor Figure 2 17 left Installing the 3 8 to 1 4 reducer fitting into the sensor in line filter Figure 2 18 right Close up of the 3 8 to 1 4 reducer fitting Figure 2 19 1 4 black sensor flow tubing of the electric and air connecting cable connected to the reducer fitting 6 Locate the 3 8 to 1 4 reducer fitting Figure 2 18 and push it into the open end of the filter Figure 2 17 7 Install the 1 4 black sensor flow tubing of the electric and air connecting cable into the reducer fitting Figure 2 19 8 Install the electrical connector of the electric and air connecting cable Figure 2 20 into the SENSOR UNIT connection Figure 2 21 on the back of the control unit SECTION 2 SYSTEM INSTALLATION Pace 2 13 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure 2 20 The electrical connector of the electric and air connecting cable that fits into the control unit Figure 2 21 Back of control J unit with the electric and air connecting cable attached to the SENSOR UNIT connection A Ne 9 You must now assemble the bypass flow connections Section 2 3 2 2 SECTION 2 SYSTEM INSTALLATION Pace 2 14 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure 2 22 Bypass flow components with parts disassembled 3 8 flow line tubing A large bypass in line filter
68. PM 10 Monitor SECTION 6 SOFTWARE SETUP Hard Rate Version the user loads new software into the instrument the Soft Rate value will return to its default setting 0 The user must then follow the procedure for setting the internal clock Service Manual to set the Soft Rate to its appropriate value The Series 1400a monitor makes Hard Rate soft ware and hardware adjustments for internal clock drift correction This value is set before the instru ment leaves R amp P and should not be changed unless the user loads new software into the instrument If the user loads new software into the instrument the Hard Rate value will return to its default setting 0 The user must then follow the procedure for setting the internal clock Service Manual to set the Hard Rate to its appropriate value This field contains the monitor s software revision number This parameter can not be edited Pace 6 22 Revision B 003 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 6 5 Set SroRAGE SCREEN The Set Storage screen Figure 6 10 determines which variables are stored in the monitor s internal data logger how many data fields exist per record and the interval at which records are stored The capacity of the data logger as measured by the number of records depends upon the number of data fields system variables stored ineach record The instrument always stores the time date and station num
69. Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure 2 34 Close up of electric and air connections on the side of the sensor unit with the holding screws A highlighted 2 3 5 MOVING THE SENSOR Unit Connectors The electric and air connectors on the side of the sensor unit may be moved to the back of the unit to facilitate installation or to avoid right angle bends or kinks in the tubing Follow these steps to move the sensor unit connectors 1 Remove the 8 screws that hold the electric and air connector assembly in place Figure 2 34 2 Open the sensor unit 3 Remove the electric and air connector assembly from the open ing in the back of the sensor unit by pulling on the electric cable and air hose Figure 2 35 NOTE Do not disconnect the electric cable and air hose connections from the electric and air connector assembly SECTION 2 SYSTEM INSTALLATION PAGE 2 24 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure 2 35 The inside of the sensor unit showing the electric and air connections with the electric and air connector assembly A highlighted 4 Turn the electric and air connector assembly over and reinsert the assembly into the openings at the back of the sensor unit Figure 2 36 Figure 2 36 Close up of the electric and air connec tions on the back of the sensor unit 5 Replace the 8 scr
70. SECTION 6 SOFTWARE SETUP Pace 6 12 Revision B 003 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 6 3 2 Passive Vo_umetric FLow CONTROL The Series 1400a Monitor uses mass flow controllers to ensure a constant and precise flow through the instrument The mass flow controllers use the actual active volumetric flow control setting or average passive volumetric flow control setting temperature and pressure values to regulate the volumetric flow through the system The active volumetric flow control setting directs the unit to use the actual ambient temperature and pressure to regulate the volumetric flow through the system The passive volumentric flow control setting directs the unit to use the average tempera ture and pressure values to regulate the volumetric flow through the system The average temperature and average pressure used by the instrument may vary with season and altitude If the user wants the unit to use the average temperature and pressure to control the volumetric flow they should manually adjust the average temperature and average pressure settings as climatic conditions change The user usually has to adjust the average pressure only once for the average barometric pressure at the sampling site i e station pressure not adjusted to sea level However the user generally must adjust the average temperature periodically often 4 times per year in accordance with changing average ambient tem
71. Serial 22416 OK 4 28 AU 16 38 Mass Conc gt 1 8 38 Min MC 1 4 Bi Hr MC 1 8 SEcTION 10 RPComm SOFTWARE Pace 10 34 Revision B 000 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 10 3 CREATING A REAL TIME GRAPH RPComm can display any system register s in a real time graph Each register value is updated and graphed every second NOTE The Windows operating system screens shown in this section are from the Windows 98 operating system These screens may vary slightly from your computer s screens if you are operating RPComm under other Windows operating systems Follow these steps to create a real time graph 1 When in the Download Data screen Figure 10 23 select the Real Time Graph tab to display the Real Time Graph screen Figure 10 26 2 In the lower right hand corner of the screen is a list of system registers Using the scroll bar examine the list of registers and place a checkmark next to the registers that you want to graph As registers are chosen the values will appear on the graph The color key on the upper right hand portion of the screen shows the variables being graphed and their corresponding colors 3 Refer to Figure 10 27 for a complete description of the control buttons on the Real Time Graph screen SEcTION 10 RPComm SOFTWARE Pace 10 35 Revision B 000 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure 10 26 Real Time Graph screen
72. System Maintenance sesee 14 36 APPENDIX A OVERVIEW OF SOFTWARE SCREENS esses A 1 A 1 Series 1400a Monitor Software Screens uues A 1 A2 RPComm Software Screens ssseee A 17 A 3 TEOMCOMM Software Screens eeeeseeeseeseee A 29 A 4 TEOMPLUS Software Screens eseeeeeeeeenr A 32 APPENDIX B PROGRAM REGISTER CODES eeeseeseseseeeeeeeennennnn nnns B 1 APPENDIX C Two Way SERIAL COMMUNICATION eeeeeeeee nnns C 1 Gils AK Protocols eei E e We Nae sts C 1 C 2 German Ambient Network Protocol eeeeeeee C 10 APPENDIX D INSTALLING NEW SOFTWARE eese D 1 D 1 Installing New System Software ssseesssesss D 2 D 1 1 Obtaining Updated Instrument Software D 2 D 1 2 Loading New System Software Into the Monitor D 3 D27 Installing REGODITS a eor pereo ettet prebere isst es D 6 D 2 1 Uninstalling Previous Versions of R amp P Software D 6 D 2 2 Obtaining RPComm Installation Files D 6 D 2 3 Installing RPComm Onto a Personal Computer PC D 6 D 2 4 Updating the List of Program Register Codes In BPOOImI usi eI ime D 7 APPENDIX E CONSUMABLES AND PARTS s 0s0eeseeeeseeseeeeeeeeeceaeeeaeeeeeeeseeeeeess E 1 Ed Qonsumables cei e eredi E 1
73. Temp Date Time Conditions RH Temp Date Time Weights W1 W2 WS W I Exposure Stats Val Time Tot Time Volume Conditions RH Temp Date Time Conditions RH Temp Date Time Weights W1 W2 W3 W F Conditions RH Temp Date Time Conditions RH Temp Date Time Exposure Stats Val Time Tot Time Volume Conditions RH Temp Date Time Conditions RH Temp Date Time Pace F 2 APPENDIX F FILTER Loc Revision B 001 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Appendix G Inlet Maintenance This appendix contains maintenance procedures for the PM 10 inlet modified PM 10 inlet sharp cut cyclone SCC PM 1 and PM 2 5 inlets old style PM 1 and PM 2 5 cyclone inlets and the in line PM 2 5 ACCU inlet G 1 CLEANING THE PM 10 anb Mooiricp PM 10 INLETS Supplies and tools recommended for maintenance Ammonia based general purpose cleaner Cotton swabs Small soft bristle brush Paper towels Distilled water Silicone based stopcock grease Small screwdriver Small crescent wrench Pocket knife R amp P recommends cleaning and maintaining the PM 10 inlet every 1 to 3 months of continuous operation This includes removing the inlet from the unit cleaning it and checking its O ring for signs of damage or wear Because the PM 10 inlet is similar in construction
74. a Series 1400a TSP monitor 1 Remove the PM 10 inlet from the top of the flow splitter by pulling it straight upward Figure 2 79 2 Apply a small amount of silicone grease to the two O rings inside the base of the TSP inlet Figure 2 76 3 Install the TSP inlet onto the top of the flow splitter by pushing it straight down until it hits a stop Figure 2 76 4 The Series 1400a Monitor is now configured as a TSP monitor There is no difference in monitor programming or operation with the TSP inlet installed SECTION 2 SYSTEM INSTALLATION Pace 2 53 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure 2 81 Set Hardware screen 2 4 5 5 TEOM Monitor ADJUSTMENT FACTORS The following statement refers to the variables designated Const A and Const B on the Set Hardware screen Figure 2 81 of the Series 1400a Monitor SET HARDWARE Const A gt 3 000 Const B 1 030 Soft Rate 0 000000 This statement also can be found on R amp P s website www rpco com under the Frequently Asked Questions FAQ area for the Series 1400a Monitor Any new information regarding this issue also will be included in this area of the website To make an informed decision as to the choice of the TEOM monitor adjustment factors it is important to understand the origin ofthe adjustment factors The TEOM monitor makes a minor empirically established adjustment to the mass concentra tion
75. a register Modify the value of a register Set instrument mode Download storage Set storage pointer Fast Storage Out Exit program Fi Help F2 Comm Config F3 Set Station F4 Options APPENDIX A OVERVIEW OF INSTRUMENT SCREENS Pace A 29 Revision B 001 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure A 57 Communica tions Setup screen li 5 TEOMCOMM iof x Aw x cepe Es es al TEOMCOMM v1 41 Baud 1200 2400 4800 9600 19208 Stop x 1 bit i 12 hits Connection Com Port 1 Direct 1 COM1 i 1 Modem 1 COM2 1 Comk F2 Save Changes Parity None Even Odd Data hits 1 8 hits Hardware Handshake Flow Control 1 No L Coma 2F8 831 APPENDIX A OVERVIEW OF INSTRUMENT SCREENS ne 1 CTS and DSR 1 CTS Only 1 DSR Only Settings Phone Number Addr CHex gt IRQ Modem Init None E 1 XON ROFF ra CATQEVSG 641248C18D25 1 7 60 1 Pace A 30 Revision B 001 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure A 58 Send String screen Pac Mi E3 gf al TEOMCOMM v1 41 Trailer 6661 6661 666 6661 6661 Fi Main F2 Save Changes F3 Send Header F4 Send Trailer APPENDIX A OVERVIEW OF INSTRUMENT SCREENS Pace A 31 Revision B 001 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor A 4 TEOMPLUS Sortware Screen
76. and pressing the lt ENTER gt key The two digit screen number for each screen is shown in Figure 4 9 For example the screen number of the Main screen is 18 You can display the Main screen by pressing the lt 1 gt key the lt 8 gt key and then the ENTER key SECTION 4 SOFTWARE OVERVIEW Pace 4 12 Revision B 002 10 Monitor TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM Operating Manual Figures 4 9 Hierarchy of software screens 9z usas uope noje S14 411 uag UOHEUUYUOD OM LL usexog uoneJqye Bojeuy SpJowssegd1es LZ U99J9S euyeq ez ueaJog s ndu Bojeuy maA OL usas ci usag ueis s NOOV PS vl ueaJog ulejs S fYDOVNelA gi usas 61 ueejos eJewpieHu1es Swo J sduJe 38S 60 usas eDeJojsjes g0 uee os oDeJojS MIAA 20 uaaIDS sBumes Aenn z wog go ueais SPO cec SH PS cc uas ansoj peuo S o u a0S sindino Bojpeuyjes c0 U99J5S SUL Jes oc ueeJ5s nue A L0 U99JOS SepoD snjejsjuauno gi ueaJoS ure Pace 4 13 SECTION 4 SOFTWARE OVERVIEW Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 4 3 2 POSITIONING THE Cursor Many of the monitor s screens have several lines of information that cannot be seen when the screen is displayed on the four line display Press the up T and down 1 arrow keys Figure 4 6 to move the cursor o
77. connect the control unit with the PC The 9 to 25 pin modem cable is configured for use only with a modem 8 Ensure that the Main screen Figure M 1 is displayed on the control unit s four line display Figure M 1 Main screen OK 4 11 Mass Conc gt 30 Min MC 01 Hr MC APPENDIX M TEOMPLUS SorrwARE Pace M 4 Revision B 000 Operating Manual Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 9 Press the lt F2 gt key on the control unit s keypad until an N None Mode displays in the RS232 Mode field of the Main screen s status line Figure M 2 The instrument must remain in the None Mode while executing the computer routines described in this section RS232 Mode field Figure M 2 Main screen with the RS232 Mode field OK 4 highlighted Mass Conc gt 30 Min MC 01 Hr MC APPENDIX M TEOMPLUS SorrwARE Pace M 5 Revision B 000 Operating Manual Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor M 3 RUNNING THE TEOMPLUS Sortware Follow these steps to begin running and stop running the TEOMPLUS software program 1 Connect the personal computer PC to the control unit Section M 2 2 Press the RS232 key on the monitor s keypad to display the Set RS232 Mode screen Figure M 3 Figure M 3 Set RS 232 Mode screen SET RS 2 3 2 MODE Mode None gt None Print On Line 3 When in the Set RS232 Mode screen ensure that the RS232 proto col is set to None Section 9 4
78. control circuit maintains the oscillation at a constant amplitude A precision electronic counter measures the oscillation frequency with a 2 second sampling period The tapered element is in essence a hollow cantilever beam with an associated spring rate and mass As in any spring mass system if additional mass is added the frequency of the oscillation decreases This can be seen by observing the frequency on the four line display of the TEOM control unit Section 8 and operating the Series 1400a Monitor both with and without a filter in place In a spring mass system the frequency follows the equation f K My 5 1 where f frequency radians sec K spring rate M mass K and M are in consistent units The relationship between mass and change in frequency can be expressed as Pace 1 13 Revision B 001 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor v The instrument com putes a baseline frequency before computing mass concentration results SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION where dm change in mass K spring constant including mass conversions f initial frequency Hz f final frequency Hz When this equation is rearranged you can solve for the spring constant K dm K 3 Thus K the calibration constant for the instrument can be easily determined by measuring the frequencies with and without a known mass pre weighed filter cartridge In actual operatio
79. data from the current storage pointer position to the end of the data buffer After the data are downloaded the storage pointer will move to the end of the data storage buffer Aborts the download This action will set the storage pointer to the record location where the download was aborted Copies the selected data to the Windows clipboard The data can then be imported and used in other programs Sends the selected data to the Download Graph screen Stores the data to a file The file is saved in a comma delimited ASCII format Opens a data file that has been previously saved to disk for display or graphing Clears the data currently being displayed Downloaded 134 records 12 7 98 10 06 50 AM When the download has been successfully completed a message will appear in the Dialog box indicating how many records were downloaded SEcTION 10 RPComm SOFTWARE Pace 10 20 Revision B 000 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure 10 18 Downloaded storage data i 1400ab Site 11400 Version 3 012 Instrument Serial 22416 ite ES Y Il B x Downloaded 12 records 4 5 99 11 16 33 AM X Down Load Data Registers Real time Graph Key Pad 05 Apr 99 05 Apr 99 05 Apr 99 05 Apr 99 05 Apr 99 05 Apr 99 05 Apr 99 05 Apr 99 05 Apr 99 05 Apr 99 05 Apr 99 P14 05 Apr 99 10 15 05 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 SEcTION 10 RPComm SoFTWARE Pace 10 21 Rev
80. filter lifetime The Series 1400a Monitor always must be operated with a filter installed in the mass transducer Be sure to install a filter before applying power to the instrument Also this section explains how to turn on the instrument and perform a leak check 3 1 FILTER REPLACEMENT Do not handle new TEOM filters with your fingers Use the filter exchange tool Figure 3 1 provided with the instrument to replace filters 3 1 1 First Time FILTER INSTALLATION Follow these steps to install a TEOM filter before the first sampling run 1 Ensure that the filter exchange tool Figure 3 1 is clean and free of any contamination that might be transferred to the TEOM filter 2 Open the door of the sensor unit Figures 3 2 and 3 3 SECTION 3 SAMPLE PREPARATION Pace 3 1 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure 3 2 TEOM sensor unit Rupprecht amp Patashnick Co Inc TEOM Particulate Mass Monitor Series 1400 Sensor Unit Figure 3 3 TEOM sensor unit with door open 3 Locate the silver handle on the front of the mass transducer Figure 3 4 Note that there is a shipping latch in the middle of this handle SECTION 3 SAMPLE PREPARATION Pace 3 2 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure 3 4 Mass trans ducer in the closed position with the silver handle A and black knob B high lighted
81. gt arrow keys to increase or decrease the value of the PRC by 1 To increase the PRC variable by 10 steps at a time press the lt SHIFT gt key and hold it down while pressing the up T arrow key To decrease the PRC variable by 10 steps at a time press the lt SHIFT gt key and hold it down while pressing the down lt gt arrow key To increase the PRC variable to the highest numerical PRC possible press the lt CTRL gt key and hold it down while pressing the up lt T gt arrow key To decrease the PRC variable to the lowest numerical PRC possible press the lt CTRL gt key and hold it down while pressing the down arrow key Press the lt ENTER gt key to save the change If the cursor is shown on the screen and there is no keypad activity for 10 seconds the cursor will automatically return to the gt cursor SECTION 4 SOFTWARE OVERVIEW Pace 4 19 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 4 3 6 Units Key The lt UNITS gt key Figure 4 6 switches the monitor s four line display between displaying numbers and units of measure If numeric values are shown on the display press the lt UNITS gt key to display units of measure in place of the numbers Figure 4 14 Conversely select the lt UNITS gt key when units of measure are shown on the instrument to display numeric values Figure 4 14 Main screen with units of measure OK 4 displayed Mass Co
82. installed on a filter cartridge 14 3 FILTER CARTRIDGE INSTALLATION AND EXCHANGE The ACCU System has been designed to accept any filter cartridge that will physically fit into the ACCU enclosure This is accomplished through the use of universal filter cartridge fittings The maximum filter cartridge size that can be accommodated by the system is approximately 5 cm 2 inch in diameter and 38 cm 15 inch in length Although the procedures for the installation and exchange of different cartridges may vary they all will still be installed by following the same general procedure described below R amp P recommends installing and exchanging filter cartridges only when the instru ment is in the Setup Mode so that mass concentration measurements are not affected Press the DATA STOP gt key to enter the Setup Mode 14 3 1 FILTER CARTRIDGE INSTALLATION A length of conductive tubing is provided for each of the ACCU System s eight channels This conductive tubing should always be installed in the corresponding fitting whenever a filter cartridge is not installed in the channel Follow these steps to install an ACCU filter holder 1 Ensure that the filter cartridge has the proper fittings installed on its inlet Figures 14 10 and 14 12 and outlet Figures 14 11 and 14 12 E Section 14 ACCU System Pace 14 14 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure 14 11 Outlet fitting p
83. loses its connection wait at least 1 minute before trying to establish another connection This allows the modem to reset itself 40 RPComm can now be used as described in Section 10 APPENDIX H MopEM COMMUNICATIONS Pace H 18 Revision B 000 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 41 To connect to a different instrument through the serial switching device the current connection must be terminated Select the Disconnect icon amp on the tool bar to terminate the current connection 42 Enter the proper command codes for the desired instrument as described in step 35 and initiate the modem connection as ex plained in step 39 If the modem loses its connection wait at least 1 minute before trying to establish another connection This allows the modem to reset itself APPENDIX H MopEM COMMUNICATIONS Pace H 19 Revision B 000 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor This page left intentionally blank APPENDIX H MopEM COMMUNICATIONS Pace H 20 Revision B 001 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Appendix I ASCII Codes The following is a list of ASCII codes that are used in the TEOMCOMM software Code Character 048 049 050 051 052 053 054 055 056 057 OANIDNBRWNK CO 065 066 067 068 069 070 071 072 073 074 075 076 077 078 079 080 081 082 083 084 085 086 087 088 089 090 Nexz xdSg
84. necessary If the O ring is still in good condi tion apply a thin film of silicone grease to the O ring Also apply a light coating of silicone grease to the aluminum threads of the acceleration assembly Figure G 8 Figure G 8 Acceleration assembly with O ring and threads highlighted Acceleration assembly threads Impactor nozzle O ring 7 Reinstall the insect screen and align the top plate markings with the lower plate markings The four holes in the top plate should align with the four spacer standoffs Install the top plate onto the lower plate and tighten the four pan head screws APPENDIX G INLET MAINTENANCE Pace G 6 Revision B 001 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor G 1 3 CLEANING THE Lower COLLECTOR ASSEMBLY Follow these steps to clean and maintain the lower collector assembly NOTE Most of the contamination in the inlet is usually found on the collector plate 1 Using a general purpose cleaner with a paper towel clean the collector assembly walls and plate Figure G 9 Figure G 9 Inside of bottom of inlet assembly with collector plate high lighted Collector plate 2 Clean the three vent tubes You may need to use a cotton swab to clean these vent tubes Figure G 10 Figure G 10 Cleaning the vent tubes of the lower inlet assembly APPENDIX G INLET MAINTENANCE Pace G 7 Revision B 001 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulat
85. on the control unit s keypad If the edit indicator is shown on the screen and there is no keypad activity for 10 seconds the cursor will automatically return to the gt cursor SECTION 4 SOFTWARE OVERVIEW Pace 4 18 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure 4 13 Main screen with the cursor dis played 4 3 5 DisPLAv Key The display DISP key Figure 4 6 allows the user to change the variables that are displayed on the Main screen When in the Main screen press the up lt T gt and down lt gt arrow keys to move the cursor to the line on which you want the new variable to appear and press the DISP key After you press the DISP key a will appear in place of the gt cursor to indicate that the instrument is waiting for the input of a program register code PRC Appendix B Figure 4 13 Enter the three digit PRC for the new variable that you want to be displayed and press the lt ENTER gt key OK 4 11 Mass Conc 30 Min MC 01 Hr MC For example to bring the current value for the instrument calibration constant to the current line press the lt DISP gt key 07 lt 4 gt lt 2 gt and then the ENTER key If you make a mistake while entering this sequence press the lt ESC gt key Also the arrow keys can be used to select a PRC after you press the lt DISP gt key Press the up T and down lt
86. original calibration Refer to Section 1 for a detailed explanation of how the calibration constant K is derived SECTION 12 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE AND VERIFICATION PROCEDURES Pace 12 11 Revision B 001 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure 12 11 KO Confirma tion screen Figure 12 13 Main screen Figure 12 14 Menu screen 12 2 1 1 KO CONFIRMATION SCREEN The KO Confirmation screen Figure 12 12 allows the user to verify the monitor s K calibration KO Confirm 209 44188 um ds without a filter 287 5318 209 44186 Audit KO 9683 Oscillating frequency with a filter Youcandisplay the KO Confirmation screen on the four line display ofthe control unit in two different ways 1 When in the Main screen Figure 12 13 press the lt STEP SCREEN gt key to display the Menu screen Figure 12 14 When in the Menu screen press the up T and down lt gt arrow keys to select KO Confirma tion and then press the lt ENTER gt key 2 Press the lt 1 gt and lt 7 gt keys and then press the lt ENTER gt key OK 4 Mass Conc gt 30 Min MC 01 Hr MC LISTING OF SCREENS gt Set Temps Flows Set Hardware View ACCU System SECTION 12 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE AND VERIFICATION PROCEDURES Pace 12 12 Revision B 001 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor The KO Confirmation screen contains additional lines that cannot be seen whe
87. outdoor indoor or industrial settings In its most common configuration it calculates mass concentration mass rate and the total mass accumulation on the TEOM filter cartridge under the following conditions Flow rate through sample inlet 16 7 l min 1 m hr Main flow rate 3 l min Temperature of sample stream 50 C Particulate matter concentration less than 5 ug m to several g m NOTE The temperature of the sampled air may vary be tween 40 and 60 C The sensor and control units must be weather protected within the range of 2 to 40 C The user may purchase a Complete Outdoor Enclosure Appendix K that will hold the sensor unit control unit and pump The enclosure also has room in its rack for a data logger modem or other appropriately sized equipment The ambient temperature sensor can measure temperatures ranging from 25 to 105 C with an accuracy of 2 C The ambient pressure sensor is rated from 0 68 to 1 09 atm and is specified to have a maximum eroor of 1 5 in the temperature range of 0 to 85 C The Series 1400a Monitor smooths both the average temperature and average pressure over a period of approximately 15 seconds The Series 1400a Monitor uses the PM 10 inlet to perform a 10 um particle size cutoff When fitted with a total suspended particulate TSP inlet deigned for 1 m h operation instead of the PM 10 inlet the instrument functions as a TSP monitor Other size selective inlets are available from R a
88. particulate matter concentration exceeds 200 ug m In this case the bypass sample stream would pass through cartridges 2 through 8 according to the time of day except when the particulate matter concentration measured by the monitor exceeds 200 ug m If the user anticipates that a particular set of qualification criteria will result in a cartridge overload R amp P recommends that the user define two or more neighboring cartridges with the same criteria For example if channels 5 and 6 are both defined with the same criteria and channel 5 later becomes disqualified because its pressure drop is too high the bypass flow would jump over channel 5 to channel 6 which would continue testing with the same criteria as channel 5 R amp P recommends that the user exchange cartridges and define ACCU channels only when the monitor is in Setup mode so that the collection of mass concentration data is not affected by such changes The ACCU System is active only when the instrument is collecting data in Operating Modes 1 2 3 or 4 The monitor always passes the sample stream through the internal bypass of the ACCU System when the instrument is in the Setup Mode or the Stop Mode After the user leaves the Setup Mode or the Stop Mode by pressing the lt F1 gt or lt RUN gt key the ACCU System will become active after one minute The monitor also waits one minute to activate the ACCU System after the monitor is turned on Section 14 ACCU System Pace 14
89. press and hold the left mouse button at the beginning of the area that you want to zoom into Drag the cursor vertically to the end of the zoom area and release the mouse button The graph will be resized according to the new y axis dimensions Enables panning Panning allows the user to move the graph area so that a different section ofthe x or y axis will be displayed without affecting the scale of either axis With this icon selected place the mouse cursor somewhere within the graph area and hold down the left mouse button Move the mouse to display the desired section of the graph Selecting this icon will undo the last zoom or panning step Rescales the x and y axes so that all the graphs for the selected data are displayed Toggles between the two possible x axis scales date and time and time only This does not affect the way the data are displayed on the graph These two boxes define the number of axis divisions on the graph The left box refers to the x axis and the right box refers to the y axis The number of divisions on the axis can be set to 5 10 15 or 20 Increasing the number of divisions results in a finer axis grid Decreasing the number of divisions results in a courser axis grid This does not affect the way the data are displayed on the graph APPENDIX A OVERVIEW OF INSTRUMENT SCREENS Pace A 22 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure A 49 Storage Pointer screen
90. registers that you wish to view You also can select the Select All Regis ters icon to choose all of the registers As registers are selected they will appear on the left hand side of the screen zi 3 Select the Read Registers icon to read the selected registers from the unit All the current values will appear in the list on the left hand side of the screen next to their corresponding label 4 To save the register list to a file select the Save icon The user will then be prompted to select a location and file name This list can be useful for troubleshooting SEcTION 10 RPComm SOFTWARE Pace 10 33 Revision B 000 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 10 2 6 2 VIEWING THE INSTRUMENT VIRTUAL KEYPAD A virtual keypad is available for use in RPComm versions 3 012 and higher This keypad looks exactly like the keypad on the unit and shows the same current information as on the unit s four line display Follow these steps to view the virtual keypad 1 When in the Download Data screen Figure 10 23 select the Key Pad tab to display the virtual keypad Figure 10 25 NOTE If the virtual display s status line shows a number line as the top line and does not show the proper display RPComm is not communicating with the unit properly 2 Operate the virtual keypad as you would the keypad on the unit Figure 10 25 Virtual keypad 1 1400ab Site 11400 Version 3 012 Instrument
91. software program 1 Ensure that your PC is in MS DOS mode 2 When the MS DOS prompt displays press the Enter key on your PC s keyboard 3 When the MS DOS prompt displays again enter the following command after the prompt CD TEOMCOMM 4 Press the Enter key on your PC s keyboard 5 If you want to run TEOMCOMM with a monochrome monitor go to step 6 If you want to allow a time delay while running TEOMCOMM go to step 8 If you want to create a SESSION LOG file for debugging purposes go to step 10 If you simply want to begin running the TEOMCOMM software program go to step 12 6 When the MS DOS prompt displays enter the following command after the prompt TEOMCOMM M 7 Press the Enter key on your PC s keyboard 8 When the MS DOS prompt displays enter the following command after the prompt TEOMCOMM T NOTE The is the number of seconds that you want to allow for the time delay The default setting for the monitor is 0 5 seconds 9 Press the Enter key on your PC s keyboard 10 When the MS DOS prompt displays enter the following command after the prompt TEOMCOMM D APPENDIX L TEOMCOMM SorrwARE Pace L 3 Revision B 000 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 11 Press the lt Enter gt key on your PC s keyboard 12 When the MS DOS prompt displays enter the following command after the prompt TEOMCOMM 13 Press the lt Enter g
92. system These screens may vary slightly from your computer s screens if you are operating RPComm under other Windows operating systems Follow these steps to schedule an automatic data download 1 When in the Connection List screen Figure 10 3 select the Schedule Download icon The Schedule Downloads screen Figure 10 21 will now display Figure 10 21 Schedule 1400ab Site 1 Downloads screen B4 WES Senna Bien MM ac Tuesday E m 0 00 y WINDOWS v Wednesday m cm Ed deba 5 Hec ES _JFTP Software IPSwitch Saturday m 0 00 New Folder Down load from storage pointer Cancel Down load all data OK 2 Select the box next to the day s of the week that you want the data to be downloaded You may choose a single day each week or any other combination of days 3 Select the time s on the chosen day s that the data are to be downloaded The data can be downloaded up to 4 times a day Section 10 RPComm SOFTWARE Pace 10 27 Revision B 000 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 4 Select the directory location where you want the downloaded data to be stored R amp P recommends that you create a separate direc tory for data downloads and that you remove these files from this directory on a regular basis because the file serial number can track only 100 files The data file will be saved under a file name according to the following convention nnnnnxyy txt
93. the lt EDIT gt key 10 Press the up 1 and down 1 arrow keys to select AK Protocol and then press the lt ENTER gt key NOTE When using the TEOMCOMM software to operate the instrument set the RS232 protocol to AK Protocol to perform all of the commands on the TEOMCOMM Main screen Figure L 1 However if you want to download data with TEOMCOMM using the Fast Storage Out RS232 Mode Sections 9 and L 3 6 set the RS232 protocol to Fast Store Out APPENDIX L TEOMCOMM SorrwARE Pace L 25 Revision B 000 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 11 Press the 0 and 7 keys and then press the ENTER key to display the Com 2 Way Settings screen Figure L 17 Figure L 17 Com 2 Way Settings screen COM 2 WAY SETTINGS RS Para 1 52 RS Para 2 75048 RS Para 3 13010 12 When in the Com 2 Way Settings screen enter the following parameters in these fields RS Para 1 52 RS Para 2 75048 RS Para 3 13010 RS Para 4 0 13 Press the ENTER key 14 Press the lt ESC gt key to display the Series 1400a Main screen Figure L 18 Figure L 18 Series 1400a Main screen OK 4 11 Mass Conc gt 30 Min MC 01 Hr MC 15 Ensure that the PC is communicating with the monitor through TEOMCOMM by selecting one of the commands from the TEOMCOMM Main screen Section L 3 APPENDIX L TEOMCOMM SorrwARE Pace L 26 Revision B 000 Operating Manu
94. the correct mass flow set point Flow Rate with this information using the following formula STP Pace 1 18 Revision B 001 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION 273 15 Ave Pres Flow_Rate Flow_Rate X x 12 Ave Temp 273 15 1 0 where Flow Rate Control set point to mass flow controller equivalent flow at 0 C and 1 Atmosphere Flow Rate Volumetric flow rate set point l min to be 3 0 l min for the sample main flow and 13 67 l min for the auxiliary flow Section 6 Ave Temp Seasonal average temperature entered by the user C Ave Pres Seasonal average barometric pressure entered by the user Atmospheres where 1 Atmosphere 1013 2 millibars or 760 mm Hg NOTE When using actual conditions for active volumetric flow control substitute the actual local temperature and pressure for the average temperature and pressure variables in equation 12 PM 10 mass concentration data reported to the U S EPA must be referenced to standard cubic meters of air based on a standard temperature and pressure of 25 C and 1 Atmosphere atm respectively For the instrument to report mass concentra tions according to this EPA standard the user must ensure that the standard temperature Std Temp and standard pressure Std Pres entered in the instrument equal 25 C and 1 Atmosphere Section 6 These are the default values for the in
95. the lower temperature are as follows Enclosure Temperature if applicable 25 C Case Temperature 30 C Air Temperature 30 C Cap Temperature 0 C off A packet is available from Thermo Fisher Scientific to assist agencies in applying for this user modification PAGE Revision B 003 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor U S EPA Designation continued On March 3 1994 the U S EPA approved the operation of the TEOM 1400 and 1400a monitors at alternate main flow rates of 1 and 2 l min in addition to the standard setting of 3 l min The following main and auxiliary flow rates apply to the approved flow rate settings 3 l min Main Flow 13 67 l min Aux Flow No change to Flow Splitter 2 l min Main Flow 14 67 l min Aux Flow Use 2 l min Adapter 36 001664 1 l min Main Flow 15 67 l min Aux Flow Use 1 l min Adapter 57 001297 When operating the instrument at the lower alternate flow settings replace references to the 3 l min main flow and 13 67 l min auxiliary flow with the actual flow rates used On October 24 1995 the U S EPA approved the modification of the TEOM 1400a monitor to include new features in units with serial numbers containing the AB designation These changes include but are not limited to the redesign of the mass transducer new layout ofthe control unit inclusion of sensors for ambient temperature and pressure and the use of mass flow controllers designed by The
96. the model number of the unit and copyright date Figure 4 2 Figure 4 1 Front panel of TEOM control unit with the four line display A keypad B and POWER button C highlighted Figure 4 2 Title screen P 2 Series 1400a Monitor Copyright 2001 Rupprecht Patashnick SECTION 4 SOFTWARE OVERVIEW Pace 4 1 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure 4 3 Main screen with the status line A and information lines B highlighted Figure 4 4 Main screen with the current status condition A current operating mode B status watch A I 1 Mode C filter loading percentage D current RS232 mode E protection level F and current time G highlighted SECTION 4 SOFTWARE OVERVIEW 4 2 Main SCREEN The Main screen Figure 4 3 shows information regarding the existence of any status conditions the current operating mode and certain operational information This screen is divided into two sections the status line at the top of the screen and three information lines below the status line Figures 4 3 and 4 4 OK 44 Mass Conc 30 Min MC 01 Hr MC BOO OK 4 Mass Conc gt 30 Min MC Ol Hr MC If the Main screen is not currently displayed on the control unit s four line display you can display the Main screen in two different ways 1 Press the MAIN STATUS key on the control unit s keypad 2 Press the 17 key the 87
97. the password function to control access to the unit s operation refer to Section 11 If you will not be using the unit s password function go to step 18 18 If you will be setting up the ACCU System with the Series 1400a Monitor refer to Section 14 If you will not be setting up the ACCU System go to step 19 19 Press the lt ESC gt key to display the Main screen 20 Press the F1 or RUN key to start data collection SEcTION 5 Basic OPERATION Pace 5 5 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure 5 9 View Storage screen 5 2 Posr SAMPLING VERIFICATION AND DATA RETRIEVAL This section explains how to verify the sampling run status and retrieve the sampling run data Follow these steps to verify the sampling run status and retrieve the sampling run data 1 Check the sampling run status on the Main screen and note any status code other than OK If there were any status codes other than OK press the MAIN STATUS key to display the Current Status Codes screen Section 7 When in the Current Status Codes screen verify the validity of the sampling run 2 Connect the monitor to the personal computer PC with the 9 to 9 pin RS232 cable Section 9 3 If you want to set the storage pointer to the first data record to be downloaded go to step 4 If you do not want to move the storage pointer go to step 7 4 Press the STORE key on your moni
98. their setpoints before the instrument changes from Operating Mode 1 to 2 The default setting is 1800 seconds This parameter can be edited when the monitor in any operating mode NOTE R amp P recommends that the user set the Wait Time to 1000 or higher to avoid damaging the instrument and to maintain accurate data reporting MR MC Ave SECTION 6 SOFTWARE SETUP This field contains the monitor s MR MC averaging time sec This value is the length of time over which total mass values are averaged to compute real time mass rate and mass concentration values Section 1 The default setting for this value is 300 seconds This parameter can be edited when the monitor is in any operating mode Pace 6 20 Revision B 003 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor TM Ave XX Hr MC Const A Const B Soft Rate SECTION 6 SOFTWARE SETUP This field contains the monitor s TM averaging time sec This value is the length of time over which frequency values from the mass transducer are aver aged to compute real time total mass readings Section 1 The default setting for this value is 300 seconds This parameter can be edited when the monitor is in any operating mode This field contains the XX Hr MC parameter This value gives the user a choice of averaging times hours shown on the Main screen following the 1 hour mass concentration average The default value
99. to Replace TEOM Filters sesssss 3 18 3 3 Turning On the Series 1400a Monitor ssss 3 19 3 4 Deak Check eo de RI t RAS ia 3 21 SECTION 4 SOFTWARE OVERVIEW eeeeseeeeeeeneneneenn nennen nnns nnn nnne 4 1 db TE SOreeria coca terret Pede bete Ee niet ui honra ced cc End ea 4 1 4 2 Malt SCIBOlT su ooa pene vi tard tbe benef E sedesque Pide TR PERO 4 2 4 2 1 Stat s LiNE PT 4 3 4 2 2 Information Lines eeseeseseeee 4 7 4 3 Navigating Among Screens sesssseeene 4 10 4 3 1 GV AS merase E 4 10 4 3 2 Positioning the Cursor c ccceeeseceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeees 4 14 4 3 3 Menu Screen EE 4 15 4 3 4 EDIT cmm 4 17 4 3 5 Display KOy tee eenaa ot aa a 4 19 4 3 6 Units Nay ceu duse a hath ces E auc mer aded 4 20 4 3 7 NO and YES Keys uc eI ee eren 4 21 4 3 7 4 Changing a NO or YES value ssssss 4 21 4 3 7 2 Changing a Negative Concentration Value 4 21 Section 5 BASIC OPERATION cda oot aote tS dee pepe bois tutu mone 5 1 5 1 Programming the Monitor cccseeeeccceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 1 5 2 Post Sampling Verification and Data Retrieval 5 6 5 3 Verification Audit Procedures scccccccesssesereeeeeeeeeesssnnaaees 5 8 5 3 1 Verifying the Ambient Air Temperature 5 8 5 3 2 V
100. to move the storage pointer and to display other data records stored in the monitor s internal data logger To move the storage pointer to and view the next highest data record press the right lt gt arrow key For example if the user was viewing data record number 78 and wanted to move the SECTION 8 VIEWING STORED DATA Pace 8 4 Revision B 003 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor storage pointer to data record number 79 they would press the right lt gt gt arrow key To move the storage pointer to the next lowest data record press the left lt lt gt arrow key To move the storage pointer forward by 10 data records at a time press the lt SHIFT gt key and hold it down while pressing the right lt gt gt arrow key To move the storage pointer backward by 10 data records at a time press the lt SHIFT gt key and hold it down while pressing the left arrow key To move the storage pointer forward by 100 data records at a time press the lt CTRL gt key and hold it down while pressing the right lt gt arrow key To move the storage pointer backward by 100 data records at a time press the lt CTRL gt key and hold it down while pressing the left lt gt arrow key To move the storage pointer to the beginning of the storage buffer to the very first data record stored press the lt FIRST LAST gt key To move the storage pointer to the end of the storage buf
101. to the modified PM 10 inlet the maintenance procedures are the same for both inlets G 1 1 REMOVING THE INLET Follow these steps to remove and disassemble the inlets 1 To remove the inlet lift the entire inlet assembly upward off the flow splitter 2 Remove the rain jar and set it aside 3 Disassemble the upper and lower inlet halves by unscrewing counterclockwise the top acceleration assembly from the lower collector assembly Figure G 1 APPENDIX G INLET MAINTENANCE Pace G 1 Revision B 001 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure G 1 Schematic drawing of the PM 10 inlet Acceleration assembly fa MLM Rain jar UP APPENDIX G INLET MAINTENANCE PAGE G 2 Revision B 001 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure G 2 Marking the top plate deflector and lower plate Figure G 3 Removing the four pan head screws G 1 2 CLEANING THE Top ACCELERATION ASSEMBLY Follow these steps to clean and maintain the top acceleration assembly 1 Mark the top plate deflector cone and lower plate with a pencil to facilitate proper orientation when reassembling the assembly after cleaning and maintenance Figure G 2 p Lower plate auppreen ETE pin 87 0059 2 Using a Phillips screwdriver remove the four pan head screws from the top of the top plate Figure G 3 Lift the top plate off the fou
102. top of the screen Figure H 6 Generally the values that your system chooses for variables on this screen are appropriate for a proper connection However if your unit and modem experience communication difficulties these settings may need to be al tered Setting the Maximum speed variable to the baud rate of the Series 1400a Monitor generally solves any communications problems Contact your modem s manufacturer for more informa tion if necessary Figure H 6 Modem Propeler screen USRobotics 56K Internal Modem Properties 21x General Connection Options Distinctive Ring Forwarding m USRobotics 56K Internal Modem Pott Speaker volume Off E High Maximum speed 115200 r Cancel 11 Select the OK button to exit the Modem Properties screen The Properties screen Figure H 5 will now appear as the active screen on your computer 12 Select the OK button to exit the Properties screen The AK Protocol Setup screen Figure H 4 will now appear as the active screen on your computer APPENDIX H MopEM COMMUNICATIONS Pace H 8 Revision B 000 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 13 When in the AK Protocol Setup screen enter the phone number to be called in the Phone Number box at the bottom of the screen Enter the phone number as you would write it i e XXX XXX XXXX NOTE Phone numbers should be entered with country codes ci
103. unit on a sturdy surface directly below the 4 cm 1 1 2 diameter hole in the roof 2 Install the electric connector of the electric and air connecting cable Section 2 2 into the 25 pin connection port on the TEOM sensor unit Figure 2 32 The other end of the electric and air connecting cable should be connected to the control unit Section 2 3 2 Figure 2 32 Electric and air connecting cable installed on the sensor unit 3 Install the other end of the 1 4 black sensor flow tubing of the electric and air connecting cable into the air inlet on the side of the sensor unit Figure 2 32 NOTE Ensure that the electric and air connection cable is protected and that the flow lines are not bent sharply or kinked 4 If you can install the electric and air connecting cable on the sensor unit without kinking or causing a right angle bend to the cable go to step 5 If your sensor unit is mounted in a position where the electric and air connecting cable would be kinked or bent at a right angle go to Section 2 3 5 SECTION 2 SYSTEM INSTALLATION Pace 2 22 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 5 Remove the end cap from the air inlet on top of the sensor unit Figure 2 33 Figure 2 33 Close up of the top of the sensor unit air inlet with end cap removed 6 You must now assemble the flow splitter Section 2 4 1 SECTION 2 SYSTEM INSTALLATION PAGE 2 23
104. usually included with most standard commercial modems If no software program was included Hyper Terminal which is included with the Windows operating system can be used Set the modem s communication parameters to work with the Series 1400a Monitor The following list contains the commands that should be set and the corresponding command codes Various commercial especially older modems may have differ ent command codes for the functions listed Consult your modem s instruction manual for proper commands Communication Parameter Command Code Software reset restore default parameters amp FO Force DCD Data Carrier Detect ON at all times amp CO Ignore DTR Data Terminal Ready from instrument amp DO Set auto answer to ring S0 1 Set local flow control to RTS CTS Code varies Store settings in profile 0 amp WO Use stored settings in profile 0 on power up amp YO Once the connection has been verified disconnect your com puter from the modem Attach the 9 to 9 pin cable to the RS232 connector on the front or back of the monitor Attach the null modem adapter to the other end of the 9 to 9 pin cable NOTE Not all null modem adapters can be used in this application because pin connections are not standard The null modem adapter 10 005671 that is available from R amp P is acceptable for use with the Series 1400a Monitor If your modem is equipped with a 9 pin connector go to step 11 If y
105. value even if no filter is mounted in the mass transducer New filters generally exhibit filter loading percentages of 15 to 30 at a main flow rate of 3 l min and less at lower flow rates TEOM filter cartridges must be exchanged before this value reaches 10096 to ensure the valid ity ofthe data generated by the instrument At some point above 100 the main flow drops below its set point If the filter loading percentage is higher than 30 at a main flow rate of 3 l min when a new TEOM filter is placed on the mass transducer or if the lifetime of consecutive TEOM filter cartridges becomes noticeably shorter inspect the in line filter in the main flow line Section 12 and replace it if necessary This field contains the RS232 mode It defines the current function of the 9 pin RS232 connectors on the front and back panels of the TEOM control unit Youcan select the RS232 mode when in the Set RS 232 Mode screen Section 9 IMPORTANT Never connect serial devices to the front and back RS232 ports of the instrument at the same time This can cause the RS232 features of the monitor to malfunc tion SECTION 4 SOFTWARE OVERVIEW This field contains the protection indicator Section 11 of the Series 1400a Monitor It incorporates three states of password protection e Unlocked U Mode The user has access to all capabilities of the instrument Pace 4 5 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particul
106. will download the appropriate number of records and save them on its hard drive Also the PC will display a confirmation message that will show the number of data records that were saved to the appropriate file name NOTE After TEOMCOMM downloads the data records user should immediately change the monitor s RS232 Mode to None or AK Protocol APPENDIX L TEOMCOMM Sortware Pace L 19 Revision B 000 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor L 3 7 Exit PROGRAM v The TEOMCOMM This command stops the TEOMCOMM software program from running and returns program disconnects any the personal computer PC to an MS DOS prompt If the user established modem existing communication communication when running TEOMCOMM the modem connection will be auto links when the user exits the program matically disconnected when the user selects the Exit Program command APPENDIX L TEOMCOMM SorrwARE Pace L 20 Revision B 000 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor L 4 TEOMCOMM Communications SETUP SCREEN The user can change the communication parameters of the TEOMCOMM software program when in the TEOMCOMM Communications Setup screen Figure L 14 When in the TEOMCOMM Main screen Figure L 1 press the lt F2 gt key on the personal computer s PC s keyboard to display the TEOMCOMM Communications Setup screen Figure L 14 TEOMCOMM Communications Setup Screen EDI
107. 0 l min and observe the actual reading on the flow meter After approximately 10 seconds adjust poten tiometer R201 Figure J 5 on the mass flow controller board until the flow is correct within 0 2 l min 26 Set the F Aux field to 18 0 l min and observe the actual reading on the flow meter After approximately 10 seconds adjust poten tiometer R205 Figure J 5 on the mass flow controller board until the flow is correct within 0 2 l min APPENDIX J ORIGINAL DESIGN Mass FLow CONTROLLERS Pace J 9 Revision B 000 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 27 Repeat steps 25 and 26 until both conditions are met 28 Set the F Aux field to its operational rate step 12 and observe the actual reading on the flow meter After approximately 10 seconds adjust potentiometer R201 on the mass flow controller board until the flow is correct within 0 2 l min 29 Change the average temperature located on the left hand side of this field and the average pressure located on the left hand side of this field back to their original values step 13 30 Turn off the control unit 31 Install the main and bypass flow lines onto the back panel of the control unit Section 2 32 Connect the electric cable that links the control unit with the sensor unit 33 Replace the top cover of the control unit 34 Turn on the control unit and make sure that the pump is on 35 Perform a system leak check Se
108. 008 06 002229 06 002229 06 001628 Pace E 4 Revision B 003 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Battery clock for U39 revision B board 06 001629 Battery for U33 revision B board 06 001628 Battery round revision B board 12 002049 Parts for Inlets O rings used in PM 10 inlet O ring 1 1 4 ID Viton 22 002853 3026 O ring 2 3 8 ID BUNA 22 000485 1036 Jar for PM 10 inlet 55 010841 PM 10 screw 6 32 x 1 4 21 003721 0004 PM 10 standoff 12 000620 0020 O rings used in 1 2 TSP adapter 1 2 O ring BUNA 22 000485 1014 O rings used in 1 1 4 TSP adapter 1 1 4 O ring BUNA 22 000485 1026 Fuses Main fuse 120 VAC units 3A 00 AA 04 002140 Main fuse 240 VAC units 1 5 A 00 AA 04 002073 Relay board fuse 3A 00 AA 04 002916 0 5 A 250 V voltage set fuse 04 003417 2 A 250 V in line fuse 04 003419 5 A 250 V F301 on inteface board 04 003576 2 A 230 V F302 on interface board 04 004628 1 A 230 V slow blow in Corcom 04 003267 2 A 115 V slow blow in Corcom 04 003268 Power Cords Power cord U S 120 VAC 07 000593 Power cord U S 240 VAC 07 002675 Power cord German 240 VAC 07 002674 Manuals Series 1400a Operating Manual AB 42 003347 Series 1400a Service Manual AB 42 003348 Series 1400a Quick Start Guide AB 42 003579 APPENDIX E CONSUMABLES AND PARTS Pace E 5 Revision B 003 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10
109. 1 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure 1 3 Schematic diagram of mass trans ducer Exchangeable TEOM Filter Cartridge Tapered Element To Flow Controller Tapered Element Drive Amplifier Frequency Counter SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION Pace 1 12 Revision B 001 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION 1 5 2 Mass TRANSDUCER OPERATION The weighing principle used in the TEOM mass transducer is similar to that of a laboratory microbalance in that the mass detected by the sensor is the result of the measurement of a change in a parameter in this case frequency that is directly coupled via a physical law or from first principles The tapered element at the heart of the mass detection system Figure 1 3 is a hollow tube clamped on one end and free to oscillate at the other An exchangeable filter cartridge is placed over the tip of the free end The sample stream is drawn through this filter and then down the tapered element This flow is maintained at a constant volume by a mass flow controller that is corrected for local temperature and barometric pressure The tapered element oscillates precisely at its natural frequency much like the tine of a tuning fork An electronic control circuit senses this oscillation and through positive feedback adds sufficient energy to the system to overcome losses An automatic gain
110. 1 gt or lt RUN gt key on the control unit s keypad NOTE Any data generated by the instrument during this audit procedure are invalid Therefore do not runa flow audit procedure during a valid sampling run 2 Remove the sample inlet from the flow splitter Figure 12 18 SECTION 12 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE AND VERIFICATION PROCEDURES Pace 12 19 Revision B 001 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 3 Locate the flow audit adapter Figure 12 19 Figure 12 19 Flow audit adapter with valve open 4 Ensure that the valve of the flow audit adapter is in its open posi tion Figure 12 20 Figure 12 20 Flow audit adapter installed on flow splitter with valve open SECTION 12 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE AND VERIFICATION PROCEDURES Pace 12 20 Revision B 001 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 5 Install the flow audit adapter onto the flow splitter Figure 12 20 6 When in the Main screen press the up 1 and down lt gt arrow keys until the Main Flow SAMPLE FLOW and Aux Flow BYPASS FLOW lines display on the screen Figure 12 21 These values represent the actual volumetric flows as measured by the monitor s flow controllers Figure 12 21 Main screen with Main Flow and Aux OK 4 Flow lines displayed Main Flow 7 Confirm that these flows are within 2 of their set points 3 0 I min for the Main Flow and 13 67
111. 10 VDC 2 VDC or 4 20 mA into engineering units Because the instrument cannot tell whether the jumper for a particular analog input channel is set to 10 VDC default 2 VDC or 4 20 mA the incoming signal is expressed as a percentage of full scale 100 to 100 For example if an analog input channel is configured as 10 VDC 100 represents a voltage of 10 VDC and 100 represents a voltage of 10 VDC The location of the analog input jumpers is shown in Figures 9 3 9 4 and 9 5 The conversion formula used by the monitor to convert the analog input value to engineering units is Result Const A Const B A I FS Const C A I FS Const A Const B and Const C may be defined differently for each channel and A I FS is an analog input s percentage of full scale In the instrument s default configuration the Const A and Const C values are set to 0 and the value of Const B is set to 1 In Figure 9 6 the average analog inputs displayed are the percentage of full scale If the user has installed an optional wind vane anemometer on the monitor in which a 5 VDC output represents a 0 180 km h wind speed and the input channel is configured in hardware as 10 VDC the values of Const A Const B and Const C should be entered as A 0 B 3 6 C 0 If the user has installed an optional wind vane anemometer on the monitor in which a 5 VDC output represents a 0 360 wind direction and the input channel is conf
112. 14 24 ACCU channels 1 2 or3 are activated whenever the current average of A I 0 ranges between 50 and 100 ACCU channel 1 is used for the first episode that meets this criterion followed by channels 2 and 3 SET ACCU SYSTEM 1 gt Curr Chan 2 A I 0 SET ACCU SYSTEM 1 gt Curr Chan 2 A I 0 Pace 14 27 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure 14 24 Set ACCU System screen additional SET ACCU SYSTEM lines displayed with 1 gt Curr Chan channel 3 set for episodic sampling 2 A I 0 100 00 0 0 0 0 Be sure to use great caution when defining episodes Variables with broad fluctua tions such as 10 minute mass concentrations should not be used because they may vary greatly around the trigger point and cause undesired cycling through the ACCU channels For this reason you should set the ACCU channel to measure 30 minute mass concentration averages instead of 10 minute mass concentrations Section 14 ACCU System Pace 14 28 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure 14 25 Set ACCU System screen additional lines displayed with channel 1 set for time sampling 14 4 1 5 Time SAMPLING The ACCU System can be configured to sample each ACCU channel for predefined periods of time after a specific set of conditions is met on channel 1 The sampling criteria assigned to channel are used to be
113. 2 1 fa 5 Le nr den ots caen e ost 1 fa 5 Pewenwsmm wom ws 5 5 alaansa ow 2m nene 5 op cane aniw in NA ps NR omne ron carina W NA Na mene Status Condition 0 OK 1 M 2 T 4 F 8 X 16 V code NA N A N A noteditable st famosa K0 uiue reste wa wa EZ orn N A ot finance ow aser wr we feries Cerca v os ps ane Fermer me mene 5 5 ons Fes races me mcr 5 9 ensi Program Register Code is the same as in version 1 software for compatibility APPENDIX B PROGRAM REGISTER CODES Pace B 4 Revision B 001 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor PROGRAM REGISTER CODES 050 074 Print Variable 4 PRC Range 1 2 3 4 S X Print Variable 5 PRC Range 1 2 3 4 S X Pepe KARA pefr IET CUNG wa TEES ES a5 ionn us MC utc 30mm oa N ESETT s anemais vunnar usar wav T ua onean pe ometene somoro we wa fva iua mri eee E os per mee omoran ee os 9 wa EE ess anneou vee ac mme s aasa or ime wa we s e parsesx at a oupa Mis wa wa ooo sop roses oe ambeOwprz wane onc acre s zsesx oro ios up mae e wa o 9 eese sw pw EARS ENEA ert ame onpa Wa WA ors AmbsOupa niin ipa NA are abs oupa ama wa na suo sm i258 x Program Register Code is the same as in version 1 software for compatibility
114. 2 Press the lt 2 gt and lt 1 gt keys and then press the lt ENTER gt key The Define Analog Inputs screen contains additional lines that cannot be seen when the screen first displays on the control unit s four line display Figure 9 11 Press the up lt T gt and down lt gt arrow keys to view the additional lines of the Define Analog Inputs screen DEFINE A I 1 A I FS gt 4 83 A I Type WndSpeed Const A 0 000 Const B Const C A I Ave SEcTION 9 DATA INPUT AND OUTPUT Pace 9 10 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor The Define Analog Inputs screen contains the following information v Ifthe user wants to set the monitor to measure wind speed velocity and direction they must define one analog input channel as WndSpd wind speed and another channel as WndDir wind direction V The lt LAST FIRST gt key resets the analog input channels A I FS A I Type Const A Const B Const C A I Ave This field contains the current analog input channel that is being defined Press the left lt gt or right lt gt arrow keys to move backward or forward by one channel To view the first channel press and hold the lt CTRL gt key while pressing the left arrow key To view the last channel press and hold the lt CTRL gt key while pressing the right arrow key This field contains the current percentage of the analog input s full s
115. 2 26 3 8 nylon tubing installed in the PUMP connection A on the back of the control unit Figure 2 27 3 8 nylon tubing installed in the pump fitting A 2 3 2 3 Pump CONNECTIONS Follow these steps to assemble the pump connections 1 Locate the 5 m 15 5 length of 3 8 nylon tubing Section 2 2 Do not cut or otherwise shorten the pump tubing that connects the control unit to the vacuum pump 2 Push one end of the tubing into the PUMP connection on the back of the control unit Figure 2 26 LE TET m macim 3 Push the other end of the tubing into the fitting on the vacuum pump Figure 2 27 NOTE R amp P strongly recommends that you use the vacuum pump provided with the unit If you choose to install a different pump it must be oil free and able to maintain a 20 Hg vacuum at a flow of 16 67 l min t SECTION 2 SYSTEM INSTALLATION Pace 2 17 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 4 If you want to mount the control unit in a rack refer to Section 2 3 3 If you do not want to mount the control unit in a rack you must now assemble the sensor unit connections Section 2 3 4 SECTION 2 SYSTEM INSTALLATION Pace 2 18 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 2 3 3 Controt Uni Rack Mounts The TEOM control unit can be rack mounted when several control units are located at one site
116. 3 RESETTING THE MONITOR Pace 13 3 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor This page left intentionally blank SECTION 13 RESETTING THE MONITOR Pace 13 4 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Section 14 ACCU System The Automatic Cartridge Collection Unit ACCU Figure 14 1 measures particulate mass concentrations in real time and collects particulate matter on various filter media under microprocessor control Figure 14 1 Control unit A and the ACCU System B The ACCU System also samples ambient particulate matter independently for selected chemical analysis by using the auxiliary bypass flow of flow splitter equipped systems and the microprocessor in the Series 1400a Monitor The 13 67 or optional 14 67 or 15 67 l min bypass flow from the flow splitter is carried through the ACCU System to the auxiliary flow controller in the control unit Figure 14 2 Section 14 ACCU System Pace 14 1 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure 14 2 PM 10 system configuration with ACCU System installed iy VES pia et Auxiliary Bypass Flow Line ACCU System Optional ae Support Tripod Auxiliary Bypass Flow Line and Electrical Cable gt TEOM Sensor Unit TEOM Control Unit Inside the ACCU
117. 4 ACCU System Pace 14 38 Revision B 001 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Appendix A Overview of Software Screens This appendix provides an overview of the screens that appear on the Series 1400a monitor Section A 1 and the RPComm Section A 2 TEOMCOMM Section A 3 and TEOMPLUS Section A 4 software programs A 1 Series 1400a Monitor SOFTWARE SCREENS APPENDIX A OVERVIEW OF INSTRUMENT SCREENS Pace A 1 Revision B 001 12 UBAIOS euyeq gj ueejos ueis s 99v PS v Pace A 2 61 ueeios SMO 4 SAWA 19S EL uee jos JeMpIeH JPS 01 uee os SpJOMSSed1es L1 ueeios uopeJqye Bojeuy 11 uee jos UONEUUYUOD 0M 9z uee os ulejs S uonejnore S L4 10 Monitor TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM Operating Manual Hierarchy of Series 1400a monitor software screens Figure A 1 60 uee os eDeiojsies 20 usog sues AeM Z uo 90 ueeloS sBumas juug uio 80 uee os eDeloiS MAA so ueals PON ZEZ SH PS cc UueaJogS eJnso jeuo jes vo ueeJogs sindino Bojeuy es c0 U99J9S OUI OS 10 U99J9S SePOD snes juano ueeJos ure APPENDIX A OVERVIEW OF INSTRUMENT SCREENS Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure A 2 Title scr
118. 5 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 14 2 ACCU System INSTALLATION 14 2 1 ACCU System CompiLation PACKAGE Depending on your setup requirements the ACCU System is supplied with the following components ACCU System enclosure Sample distributor cone Sample distributor gasket Electrical cable 4 8 32 screws 8 filter holders Filters Pallflex TX40 quartz Teflon or nylon Backer filters Anti stick rings Four stage filter pack PUF sampling system PUF sampling tube PUF plug Impactor plage oil ACCU inlet ACCU stand Section 14 ACCU System Pace 14 6 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 14 2 2 ACCU INSTALLATION The ACCU System is designed to operate outdoors and is generally placed in the vicinity of the flow splitter Follow these steps to install and set up the ACCU System 1 If you have purchased the optional ACCU stand refer to Section 14 2 3 If you did not purchase the optional ACCU stand go to step 2 2 Locate the sample distributor gasket and place it around the sample distributor Figures 14 5 and 14 6 The sample distributor is located on top of the ACCU enclosure Make sure that the holes in the sample distributor gasket line up with the mounting holes on the top of the enclosure Figure 14 5 Sample distributor gasket installed around the sample distribu tor Section 14 ACCU S
119. 5 to 104 F R amp P strongly recommends that the sensor unit of the Series 1400a Monitor also be installed in an indoor or weather protected location If the sensor unit is installed in an indoor location the user must run a sampling tube through the roof of the monitoring site Section 2 4 Although the TEOM monitor is inherently rugged it is a precision instrument The user will obtain the best operating conditions and longest instrument life when the unit is not exposed to extremes of weather Filter exchange in particular may be best accomplished by a technician operating in an indoor environment where there is no possibility of rain or snow contaminating the filter Be sure to install the ambient temperature sensor Section 2 4 3 If you do not install the ambient temperature sensor and then you set the average temperature to 99 and the average pressure to 9 Section 6 the mass flow controller will attempt to control the sample flow as if the ambient temperature is absolute zero SECTION 2 SYSTEM INSTALLATION Pace 2 1 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor The sample line should proceed in a straight vertical line from the PM 10 inlet to the V The sample tubing must Inlet of the sensor unit through a 4 cm 1 1 2 inch diameter hole in the roof of the be vertical monitoring site If you want to install the monitor in an outdoor location refer to Appendix K for fur
120. 6 Revision B 001 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure A 54 Control buttons on the Real Time Clears all data listed on the right hand side of the Real Time Graph screen Graph screen This includes the data being displayed Decreases the scale of the x and y axes concurrently With this icon selected press and hold the left mouse button and make a box around an area inside the graph that you want to zoom into Once the box is finished release the mouse button The graph will be resized according to the box dimensions Decreases the scale of the x axis With this icon selected press and hold the left mouse button at the beginning of the area that you want to zoom into Drag the cursor horizontally to the end ofthe zoom area and release the mouse button The graph will be resized according to the new x axis dimensions Decrease the scale of the y axis With this icon selected press and hold the left mouse button at the beginning of the area that you want to zoom into Drag the cursor vertically to the end ofthe zoom area and release the mouse button The graph will be resized according to the new y axis dimensions Enables panning Panning allows the user to move the graph so that a different section ofthe x or y axis will be displayed without affecting the scale of either axis With this 1con selected place the mouse cursor somewhere within the graph area and hold down the le
121. 9 Press the ENTER key 10 Press the F1 or RUN key to restart data collection SECTION 6 SOFTWARE SETUP Pace 6 14 Revision B 003 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 6 3 3 REPORTING To AcTUAL CONDITIONS The unituses the parameters in the Set Temps Flows screen to determine how to report the measured mass concentration levels If the user chooses to set the unit to report the mass concentration levels to actual conditions they must set the average and standard temperatures to 99 and the average and standard pressures to 9 when in the Set Temps Flows screen Figure 6 6 This will cause the monitor to use the actual ambient temperature and ambient pressure in its flow rate calculations NOTE If the user wants to use the instrument for U S EPA equivalent PM 10 measurements they must ensure that the standard temperature is set to 25 C and the standard pressure is set to 1 atm Section 6 3 4 regardless of the values that they entered for the average temperature and average pressure settings IMPORTANT You MUST install the ambient tempera ture sensor on your Series 1400a AB Monitor or install the upgrade kit on your Series 1400a AA Monitor to set your unit to report the mass concentration levels to actual condi tions Follow these steps to set the monitor to use the actual temperature and pressure values in flow rate calculations IMPORTANT Ensure th
122. A O Value 50 00 A I Channel 50 00 Figure A 39 KO Confirma tion screen KO Confirm gt Filt Wght 287 53182 Audit KO Figure A 40 KO Confirma tion screen with additional KO Confirm lines displayed gt Filt Wght 287 53182 Audit K0 Actual KO Diff APPENDIX A OVERVIEW OF INSTRUMENT SCREENS Pace A 15 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure A 41 FTS Calcula tion screen Figure A 42 FTS Calcula tion screen with additional lines displayed FTS Calculation Manometer gt 5 009788 Mano B 0 1724 Mano M 0 3570 FTS Calculation Manometer gt 5 009788 Mano B 0 1724 Mano M 0 3570 FTS Flow Amb Temp Amb Pres APPENDIX A OVERVIEW OF INSTRUMENT SCREENS Revision B 001 Pace A 16 Revision B 001 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor A 2 RPComm SOFTWARE SCREENS This appendix contains all of the software screens displayed by the RPComm software program Figure A 43 Connection List screen S RPComm Connection List Group Default Il x File Help TE Dx eam E Connection Name Instrument Type Status Modem Status APPENDIX A OVERVIEW OF INSTRUMENT SCREENS Pace A 17 Revision B 001 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure A 44 Control buttons on the Connection List screen Displays the instrument connections on the screen as large icons Displays the instrument conn
123. AND VERIFICATION PROCEDURES PAGE 12 22 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Revision B 001 12 Read the main flow approximately 3 0 l min on the reference flow meter If you are using a mass flow meter you must make any necessary corrections to translate this reading to volumetric I min at the current ambient temperature and barometric pressure No adjustment is necessary in the case of a volumetric flow meter The volumetric flow measured by the reference flow meter must be 3 0 0 2 l min to be acceptable If the main flow reading is within acceptable limits go to step 14 If the main flow reading is not within acceptable limits go to step 13 13 Perform the software and hardware calibrations for the mass flow controller Service Manual 14 Remove the 3 8 Swagelok cap from the flow splitter bypass extension 15 Install the bypass flow line onto the flow splitter bypass exten sion 16 Perform a leak check Section 3 4 17 Remove the flow audit adapter from the top of the flow splitter 18 Install the sample inlet onto the flow splitter 19 Install a new TEOM filter into the mass transducer 20 Press the F1 or RUN key SECTION 12 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE AND VERIFICATION PROCEDURES Pace 12 23 Revision B 001 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor This page left intentionally blank SECTION 12 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE AND VERIFI
124. Amb Temp 49 00 OK 4 38 NU 12 41 Cal Constant 9605 000 Amb Pres 1 005 Mass Conc 79 4 30 Min MC 72 3 Press F2 to toggle command mode O1 Hr MC 78 4 v 3 013 APPENDIX M TEOMPLUS SorrwARE Pace M 7 Revision B 000 Operating Manual Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 6 Place your cursor on the Accu bat file and click twice with your mouse The TEOMPLUS ACCU screen Figure M 5 will display Refer to Section M 5 for further information on the TEOMPLUS ACCU screen Go to step 8 Figure M 5 TEOMPLUS ACCU screen window ACCU Muxviewr v5 1 ACCU SYSTEM OVERVIEW Currently Active Channel 1 Channel 1 Channel 5 Ts 36240 Oo Ta e Vi 8 257 Vv 0 000 Channel 2 Channel 6 e Vi 0 000 Vi 0 000 Channel 3 Channel 7 T ms 89400 o Vi 20 368 V 0 000 Channel 4 Channel 8 Te 28720 T o Vi 6 543 V 0 000 APPENDIX M TEOMPLUS SorrwARE Pace M 8 Revision B 000 Operating Manual Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 7 Place your cursor on the Inputs bat file and click twice with your mouse The TEOMPLUS INPUTS screen Figure M 6 will display Refer to Section M 6 for further information on the TEOMPLUS INPUTS screen Go to step 8 Figure M 6 TEOMPLUS INPUTS screen Top Window INPUTS Muxviewr w5 Channel Channel Channel Channel Channel Channel Channel Channel APPENDIX M TEOMPLUS SorrwARE Pace M 9 Revision B 000 Operating Manual Seri
125. Appendix H Modem Communications This appendix describes how to connect the Series 1400a Monitor to a modem for off site communications and how to set up a serial switching device for use with multiple instruments H 1 SETTING uP A STANDARD COMMERCIAL EXTERNAL MODEM Depending on the configuration of your modem you may need the following parts Commercial external modem 9 to 9 pin RS232 cable Null modem adapter 10 005671 If your modem has a 25 pin connector 9 to 25 pin serial adapter 06 005895 0925 Follow these steps to set up an external commercial modem 1 Connect your computer directly to the modem Follow the in structions that came with the modem 2 Begin executing any communication software that will allow direct communications with the modem Communication soft ware is included with most modems If no software program was included Hyper Terminal which is included with the Windows operating system can be used 3 Setthe modem s communication parameters to work with the Series 1400a Monitor The following list contains the commands that should be set and the corresponding command codes Various commercial especially older modems may have differ ent command codes for the functions listed The commands should be replaced with the appropriate codes for your particular modem consult the modem s instruction manual Communication Parameter Command Code Software reset restore default parameters a
126. B and 3 8 flow line tubing C Figure 2 23 3 8 green tubing inserted into the BYPASS FLOW fitting 2 3 2 2 Bypass FLow CONNECTIONS Follow these steps to assemble the bypass flow connections 1 Locate the 3 8 green tubing 2 Cut a length of the 3 8 green tubing approximately 13 cm 5 long Figure 2 22 Ensure that the cut in the tubing is clean and perpendicular 3 Push the 13 cm 5 length of tubing into the fitting on the back of the control unit labeled BYPASS FLOW Figure 2 23 4 Locate another large in line filter Figure 2 15 SECTION 2 SYSTEM INSTALLATION Pace 2 15 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 5 Push the filter onto the open end of the length of 3 8 green tubing so that the flow arrow on the filter points away from the control unit Figure 2 24 Figure 2 24 Large in line filter inserted into the 3 8 green tubing 6 Push the other length of the cut 3 8 green tubing into the open end of the filter Figure 2 25 for later connection to the bypass flow outlet Section 2 3 3 or the optional ACCU System outlet Section 14 if used Figure 2 25 3 8 green tubing inserted into the bypass in line filter 7 You must now assemble the pump connections Section 2 3 2 3 SECTION 2 SYSTEM INSTALLATION Pace 2 16 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure
127. C 8 Const A 3 000 Const B 1 030 Soft Rate 0 000000 Hard Rate 0 000000 Version 3 016 SECTION 6 SOFTWARE SETUP Pace 6 19 Revision B 003 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor The Set Hardware screen contains the following information Cal Const Ser Num Inst type Wait Time This field contains the calibration constant K K0 Section 1 You can find your monitor s K on the label located inside the mass transducer which is located inside the sensor unit Each monitor has a unique K The Cal Const value must match the value shown on the label inside the mass transducer or the mass concentration data will be incorrect This parameter can be edited when the monitor is in the Setup Mode This field contains the monitor s serial number You can find your monitor s serial number on the back panel ofthe sensor and control units The Ser Num value must match the number found on the hardware This parameter can be edited when the monitor in any operating mode This field contains the monitor s instrument type This two letter instrument type is incorporated into the serial number prefix of the instrument The possible variants of the serial number prefix are AA 140A 140AA 14UP AB 140AB and AT 140AT This parameter cannot be edited This field contains the length of time sec in which the temperatures and flow rates must remain within arange around
128. CATION PROCEDURES Pace 12 24 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor v Press the STOP ALL key to shut down all temperature and flow instrumentation Section 13 Resetting the Monitor This section explains how to initiate an emergency shut off and reset the instrument to its original settings and describes what happens to the monitor after a power failure occurs 13 1 Stop ALL COMMAND Certain situations may arise in which the user may want to turn off all temperatures and flows in the instrument To initiate this procedure press the lt STOP ALL gt key on the control unit s keypad to enter the Stop All Mode and cease data collection When the instrument is in the Stop All Mode an X will appear in the operating mode field of the Main screen s status line Section 5 Also the monitor will reset its system variables to the original values that were set by the user When the user presses the lt STOP ALL gt key this does not set the unit to its default parameters The instrument will remain in the Stop All Mode until you press the lt F1 gt or lt RUN gt key to begin data collection or press the lt DATA STOP key to enter the Setup Mode or turn off the control unit SECTION 13 RESETTING THE MONITOR PAGE 13 1 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 13 2 RE iNITIALIZING THE INSTRUMENT Follow these steps to re
129. E RLeen E wOteue S i E e ES l 1 APPENDIX J ORIGINAL DESIGN Mass FLOW CONTROLLERS cecceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeees J 1 J 1 Overview of Calibration Procedures ssesssessess J 1 J 2 Flow Controller Calibration Software J 2 J 3 Flow Controller Calibration Hardware J 5 APPENDIX K COMPLETE OUTDOOR ENCLOSURE essen K 1 K 1 Installing the Control and Sensor Units K 1 K 2 Installing the Sample Pump seen K 3 K 3 Installing the Seal Plate seeeeeeeneeeeeees K 6 K 4 A Adjusting the Air Conditioner seeeeeeeeeees K 13 K 5 Adjusting the Heater esee K 14 K 6 Installing the Optional Sliding Shelf K 15 K 7 Maintenance sssssssssssssseseseseerenene nennen enne K 16 APPENDIX L TEOMCOMM SOFTWARE eseeeeeereeeneennneeennnn nenne L 1 L 1 Installing TEOMCOMM onto a Personal Computer PC L 2 L2 TEQMCOMM Setup erexit tte pe eene teens L 3 L 2 1 Starting TEOMCOMM esee L 3 L 2 2 Setting the Communication Parameters L 5 L 3 TEOMCOMM Main Screen ssssse L 8 L 3 1 Request the Value of a Register ecese L 8 L 3 2 Modify the Value of a Register neee L 9 L 3 3
130. E2 PartScesleuete lobes E 2 APPENDIX F2 FILTER LOG dere de raa ee e a rri Do dua F 1 APPENDIX Q INLET MAINTENANCE eese nn nnne nnne nnns nnns G 1 G 1 Cleaning the PM 10 and Modified PM 10 Inlets G 1 G 1 1 Removing the inlet seesssseeeeeeree G 1 G 1 2 Cleaning the Top Acceleration Assembly G 3 G 1 3 Cleaning the Lower Collector Assembly G 7 G 1 4 Reinstalling the Inlet eese G 11 PAGE XIV Revision B 003 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Table of Contents continued G 2 Maintenance of Sharp Cut Cyclone SCC Inlets G 12 G 3 Maintenance of Old Style PM 2 5 and PM 1 Cyclone Inlets G 17 G 4 Maintenance of ACCU Inlet sssseeeeene G 19 APPENDIX H MODEM COMMUNICATIONS eeeeeeeeen nnne nnne nnne H 1 H 1 Setting up a Standard Commercial External Modem H 1 H 2 Setting up RPComm for use with a Modem H 3 H 3 Setting up the Serial Switching Device H 11 H 3 1 Multiple R amp P Instruments of the Same Model H 11 H 32 Multiple R amp P Instruments of Different Models H 14 H 3 2 1 Connecting a Series 1400a Monitor and Other R amp P Instruments of Different Models H 14 APPENDIX I ASI OBES saei eap
131. ENTER key NOTE When the instrument is shipped from R amp P the high lock password is 100000 5 To return to the unlock mode repeat steps 1 4 and then follow the instructions in Section 11 1 If you misplace or forget the low or high lock password refer to ApLendix C for further instructions SECTION 11 PASsworD PROTECTION Pace 11 3 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 11 3 Set Passworps SCREEN The Set Passwords screen Figure 11 2 allows the user to change the low and high lock passwords The low and high passwords can be changed while in any operating mode Figure 11 2 Set Passwords screen SET PASSWORD Cur Lo Pass gt New Lo Pass Cur Hi Pass 11 3 1 CHANGING THE Low PassworpD Follow these steps to change the low password 1 When in the Main screen press the STEP SCREEN key to display the Menu screen 2 When in the Menu screen press the up or down arrow keys to select Set Passwords 3 Press the ENTER key to display the Set Passwords screen Also to display the Set Passwords screen press 1 0 and then the ENTER key when in any screen 4 Press the up or down arrow keys to place the cursor on the Cur Lo Pass line 5 Enter the current password on the Cur Lo Pass line If you enter the current password incorrectly the instrument will beep and erase the entry 6 Press the up or down arrow keys to place the
132. EOMCOMM lolx amp e d aee sf al TEOMCOMM v1 41 Request the value of a register Modify the value of a register Set instrument mode Download storage Set storage pointer Fast Storage Out Exit program Enter PRC number to change _ Fi Help F2 Gomm Config F3 Set Station F4 Options APPENDIX L TEOMCOMM Sortware Pace L 9 Revision B 000 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor After the user enters the appropriate PRC the computer will request the new value Figure L 6 After the user enters the new value the personal computer PC will display a confirmation message showing the PRC and the new value that will be stored in the monitor Some parameters can be changed only when the monitor is in Setup Mode Section L 3 3 Figure L 6 TEOMCOMM Main screen with request for value of PRC number displayed V3 TEOMCOMM u Mi E ee A TEOMCOMM vi 4i Request the value of a register Modify the value of a register Set instrument mode Download storage Set storage pointer Fast Storage Out Exit program Enter a new value for PRC 45 Fi Help F2 Comm Config F3 Set Station F4 Options APPENDIX L TEOMCOMM Sortware Pace L 10 Revision B 000 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor L 3 3 Set INstRUMENT MopE This command allows the user to change the Operating Mode of the monitor When the user selects this command the personal computer
133. Figure 14 21 Figure 14 21 Set ACCU System screen with channel SET ACCU SYSTEM 1 1 set for sampling triggered 1 Mass Conc 100 0 by a specific mass concen tration level 10000 0 Null 0 Section 14 ACCU System Pace 14 26 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor v Episodic sampling collects each user defined episode on a different ACCU channel Figure 14 22 Set ACCU System screen additional lines displayed with channel 1 set for episodic sampling Figure 14 23 Set ACCU System screen additional lines displayed with channel 2 set for episodic sampling Section 14 ACCU System 14 4 1 4 Episopic SAMPLING The ACCU System can be configured to capture user defined episodes through the use of a special code When operated in this manner each episode is sampled on one user defined ACCU channel Once a channel has been activated and used the monitor will not sample on the channel again until the user resets that channel Section 14 6 To capture a user defined episode you must define two or more consecutive ACCU channels in an identical manner For example you would first enter PRC 98 Curr Chan in one ofthe PRC variable fields oftwo or more consecutive ACCU channels Section 14 4 such as ACCU channel 1 and 2 Then you would define the minimum and maximum permissible values for the episode that you would like to capture In Figures 14 22 14 23 and
134. II code representation of the 2 digit Channel Number for example KO 075 048 The Channel Number is always 2 digits in length 13010 Optional Up to 3 ASCII codes can be added to response from the instrument In this case CR and lt LF gt ASCII codes 013 and 010 are appended to the response Enter 0 if nothing is to be appended ee seme mm fe veer e eR Loo pee eemem E ed e fe fransar PETRA RS Para 2 75048 RS Para 3 SER Ask Register command 4 digit Ask Register command ore e RR EJ 2 digit Channel Number as defined ej o o Number of current status conditions whose value is being requested The P Register Code of th 11 E rogram iregister Coge of the C H PRC may be up to 3 digits long and is variable whose value is being t riaht filled in th requested The PRC may be up to 3 12 not rightfilled in the response digits long Do not right fill if the PRC LL T EE ER Current value of the variable referenced E e 3 APPENDIX C Two Way SERIAL COMMUNICATION Pace C 3 Revision B 000 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor AK Protocol Ask Register Command AREG continued Transmission to Instrument Response from Instrument 20 lt ETX gt Description Description ASCII code 003 N eo 21 CR Up to 3 digits appended to the end of the response transmission according to the entry for RS Para 3 N N 22 lt LF gt N N
135. ILIDNMAENNNNEEEEEENE 7 aw x cepe Es es al TEOMCOMM v1 41 Baud Parity Data E 1 1200 None 17 bits 1 2400 Even x 8 bits 1 4800 Odd x 9600 E 1 19200 Stop Hardware Handshake Flow Control 1 bit None None 12 hits 1 CTS and DSR E 1 XON ROFF 1 CTS Only 1 DSR Only Connection Com Port Settings Phone 1 Number x1 Direct 1 COM1 Addr CHex gt 1 Modem COM2 IRQ Modem LRQ TQEUSB 081834 amp C18 amp D28 1 C 1 Comk Init 7 60 F2 Save Changes APPENDIX L TEOMCOMM Sortware Pace L 21 Revision B 000 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor The TEOMCOMM Communications Setup screen contains the following informa tion Baud Rate Parity Data Stop Hardware Handshake Flow Control APPENDIX L TEOMCOMM SorrwARE This field contains the data transmission rate baud which may be set to 1200 2400 4800 9600 or 19200 baud The default setting for the monitor is 9600 Refer to the Service Manual if you suspect that the monitor s baud rate has been changed If you want to connect the monitor to a PC through a modem the Baud Rate value must be set to the lowest of the following three values 1 the maximum baud rate ofthe modem used with the instrument 2 the maximum baud rate of the modem used with the computer or 3 the baud rate setting of the instrument default 9600 The maxi mum baud rate supported
136. IMPORTANT The average temperature and pressure settings should not read 99 C and 9 atm respectively during a mass flow controller calibration 16 On the flow meter set the average temperature and average pressure parameters to the current local conditions NOTE The average pressure reading should be actual pressure NOT corrected to sea level IMPORTANT The average temperature and pressure settings should not read 99 C and 9 atm respectively during a mass flow controller calibration 17 Press the up and down arrow keys to position the screen so that FAdj Main and FAdj Aux display on the screen 18 Set the adjustment factors for both mass flow controller s by changing the settings for FAdj Main and FAdj Aux to 1 000 APPENDIX J ORIGINAL DESIGN Mass FLow CONTROLLERS Pace J 8 Revision B 000 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 19 Connect a reference flow meter such as a bubble meter dry gas meter or mass flow meter to the port labelled SENSOR FLOW on the back panel of the control unit Do not attach the flow meter to the large bypass in line filter and do not attach any system components to the air input side of the flow meter This reference flow meter should have been recently calibrated to a primary standard and should have an accuracy of 1 at 3 l min NOTE If you are using a mass flow meter you must adjust its reading for temperature and pressure t
137. INSCGA12140 4 Wet a lint free wipe with deionized water and remove all visible deposits Deposits are most likely to be found in the cone inside the top cap and inside the emptying cup 5 Inspect all O rings for shape and integrity and replace if neces sary Lubricate all O rings with light grease There are 6 O rings in the SCC located as follows 3 on the chamber 2 are located inside the chamber 2 on the top cap and 1 in the emptying cup APPENDIX G INLET MAINTENANCE Pace G 15 Revision B 001 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 6 Reassemble and reinstall the SCC onto the flow splitter Lubricate the transfer tube to aid in reassembly NOTE Refer to the Series 1400a Monitor Service Manual for further informa tion on maintaining inlets APPENDIX G INLET MAINTENANCE Pace G 16 Revision B 001 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor G 3 MAINTENANCE OF OLD Style PM 2 5 ano PM 1 CycLone INLETS Because the old style PM 1 and PM 2 5 cyclone inlets Figure G 22 are of similar construction the procedure for maintaining them is identical The cyclone must be cleaned periodically to prevent buildup of particulate matter and contaminants R amp P recommends a cleaning rate of once every one to three months The frequency for routine maintenance may depend upon the average concentration of the particulate matter and or the species being sampled Figure G 22
138. IX B PROGRAM REGISTER CODES Pace B 8 Revision B 000 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Appendix C Two Way Serial Communication The Series 1400a Monitor supports two serial communication protocols the AK Protocol and the German Ambient Network Protocol These protocols permit a locally or remotely located computer to obtain information electronically from the unit These protocols are described in this appendix C 1 AK PRorocoL The AK Protocol allows the user to query the present value of any system variable remotely and allows the user to change those system variable values The user also can download information from the internal data logger The RPComm software program uses this protocol for two way communication directly to a personal computer or through a modem The following AK Protocol commands are presented In detail on the following pages AREG Ask Register Command The user can query the Series 1400a Monitor for the current value of any system variable Appendix B EREG Enter Register Command The user can assign a new value to any system variable Great care must be taken when using this command as the value of variables should only be changed when the monitor is in the appropriate operating mode SFxx Set Function xx Command The user can send commands using the lt RUN gt key and the DATA STOP key to the instrument Each command is designated by a two digit code xx ASTO
139. Main screen the main flow reading should read less than 0 15 l min and the auxiliary flow reading should read less than 0 60 l min If the main flow reading is less than 0 15 l min and the auxiliary flow reading is less than 0 65 l min go to step 18 If the main flow reading is greater than 0 15 l min and the auxiliary flow reading is greater than 0 65 l min check the hose fittings and other critical connections in the flow system for leaks and repeat steps 7 8 and then go to step 10 10 After you check the hose fittings and other critical connections in the flow system for leaks and repeat steps 7 8 check the main flow reading and the auxiliary flow reading on the Main screen Go to step 11 11 When in the Main screen the main flow reading should read less than 0 15 l min and the auxiliary flow reading should read less than 0 60 l min If the main flow reading is less than 0 15 l min and the auxiliary flow reading is less than 0 65 l min go to step SECTION 3 SAMPLE PREPARATION Pace 3 23 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 18 If the main flow reading is greater than 0 15 l min and the auxiliary flow reading is greater than 0 65 l min you must repeat the leak check procedure using an offset value to account for the characteristic non linearity of the mass flow sensor for flow values near 0 l min Go to step 12 12 To determine the non linearity offset value NOV s ow y open
140. Minute 27 Hour 3 Hour 12 Day 4 Day 29 alid ll Month 2 Mass Rate 6 Year 1999 Mass C ass Conc 7 Mass Rate 0 2 Tat Mass 8 Mass Conc 1 6 MR MC Ave 3 Tot Mass 34 53 TM Ave 10 MR MC Ave 300 Frequency 11 TM Ave 300 Noise 12 Frequency 256 81900 Op Mode 13 Noise 0 028 Cur LoPas 14 Op Mode 4 Cur HiPas 15 Cur LoPas 0 New LoPas 16 Cur HiPas 0 New HiPas 17 New LoPas 0 Const 18 New HiPas 0 Const B 19 Const A 3 000 ne Dael 20 Const B 1 030 2 CT 21 Set CaseT 50 00 Set EnclT Base s Cae Ten z Figure A 52 Control buttons on the Registers j Us screen Iw Reads selected register values from the unit Selects all registers Saves register data to a file APPENDIX A OVERVIEW OF INSTRUMENT SCREENS Pace A 25 Revision B 001 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure A 53 Real Time Graph screen i 1400ab Site 11400 Version 3 012 Instrument Serial 22416 Down Load Data Registers Real time Graph Key Pad UL Mass Conc Em cc 30 Min MC 01 Hr MC 1 4 1 0 Prnt Var3 a Prnt Var4 ps Prnt Varb Prnt Var RS Para 1 RS Para 2 zl 01 RS Para 3 RS Para 4 v4 30 Min MC v4 01 Hr MC 08 Hr MC 0 37 04 05 99 11 42 04 05 9911 43 04 05 9911 44 04 05 9911 45 04 05 99 11 47 Protect 24 Hr MC APPENDIX A OVERVIEW OF INSTRUMENT SCREENS Pace A 2
141. Modified PM 10 inlet installed onto a sharp cut cyclone SCC PM 2 5 inlet 2 4 5 3 CONVERTING FROM A PM 10 To A PM 2 5 Monitor Follow these steps to convert the PM 10 Monitor to a PM 2 5 Monitor using the sharp cut cyclone SCC second stage inlet 1 Remove the PM 10 inlet from the top of the flow splitter by pulling it straight upward Figure 2 78 2 Apply a small amount of silicone grease to the 2 O rings inside of the base of the SCC PM 2 5 inlet Figure 2 73 3 Install the SCC PM 2 5 inlet onto the top of the flow splitter by pushing it straight down until it hits a stop 4 Apply a small amount of silicone grease to the two O rings inside of the base of the PM 10 inlet Figure 2 71 or 2 72 5 Install the PM 10 inlet onto the top of the SCC PM 2 5 inlet by pushing it straight down until it hits a stop Figure 2 80 Modified PM 10 inlet SCC PM 2 5 inlet SECTION 2 SYSTEM INSTALLATION Pace 2 51 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 6 The Series 1400a Monitor is now configured as a PM 2 5 monitor There is no difference in monitor programming or operation with the SCC PM 2 5 second stage inlet installed SECTION 2 SYSTEM INSTALLATION Pace 2 52 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 2 4 5 4 CONVERTING FROM A PM 10 ro A U S TSP Monitor Follow these steps to convert the Series 1400a PM 10 monitor to
142. Monitor This page left intentionally blank APPENDIX F CONSUMABLES AND PARTS Pace E 6 Revision B 001 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Appendix F Filter Log This appendix contains a filter log to keep track of readings associated with each exposed filter R amp P encourages users to make photocopies of the form or use a similar form APPENDIX F FILTER Loc Pace F 1 Revision B 001 10 Monitor TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM Operating Manual Initial Conditioning R amp P Series Initial Weighing Weights w1 W2 W3 Wi 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Filter Log Filter Exposure Exposure Time Post Collection Conditioning Post Collection DW Weighing W F W l Concentration DWx1046 Volume Weights W1 W2 w3 W F Conditions RH Temp Date Time Conditions RH Temp Date Time Weights W1 W2 W3 Wi Exposure Stats Val Time Tot Time Volume Conditions RH Temp Date Time Conditions RH Temp Date Time Weights W1 W2 W3 W F Conditions RH Temp Date Time Conditions RH Temp Date Time Weights W1 W2 W3 Wi Exposure Stats Val Time Tot Time Volume Conditions RH Temp Date Time Conditions RH Temp Date Time Weights W1 W2 Ws W F Conditions RH
143. Monitor s instrument software is stored in battery backed random access memory RAM New revisions of the system software can be loaded directly into the instrument with a personal computer PC This appendix explains how to install new system software into the TEOM 1400a Monitor Section D 1 This appendix also explains how to obtain and load RPComm onto your personal computer Section D 2 NOTE Be sure to check Thermo Scientific s website before uploading new software to ensure that you have the latest software version for either the unit s operating software or RPComm Users must log in and obtain a password to download new software Go to http www tagteam com TagTeam Client login asp NOTE The RPComm software for the TEOM 1400a Monitor is a Microsoft Windows based program Users should have a general understanding of their personal com puter PC and of the Windows operating system including entering and editing text and opening closing and saving files System requirements for running RPComm software are Pentium processor 64 megabytes MB of random access memory RAM 40 MB of hard drive space APPENDIX D INSTALLING NEw SvsrEM SOFTWARE Pace D 1 Revision B 003 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure D 1 Main screen with the RS232 Mode field highlighted D 1 INSTALLING NEw System SOFTWARE D 1 1 CONNECTING THE Monitor To A PERSONAL COMPUTER Your personal
144. NDIX J ORIGINAL DESIGN Mass FLow CONTROLLERS Pace J 7 Revision B 000 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 10 When in the Main screen Figure J 1 press the lt STEP SCREEN gt key to display the Menu screen Figure J 2 11 When in the Menu screen press the up lt T gt and down 1 to position the cursor on Set Temps Flows Then press the lt EN TER gt key The Set Temps Flows screen will now display Figure J 3 Also the user can press 1 9 and then the ENTER key on the monitor s display keypad to display the Set Temps Flows screen 12 When in the Set Temps Flows screen press the up and down arrow keys to position the screen so that F Main main flow and F Aux auxiliary flow display on the screen Record the F Main and F Aux readings 13 Press the up and down arrow keys to position the screen so that T A S average standard temperature and P A S average standard pressure display on the screen Record the set points for the average temperature located on the left hand side of this field and the average pressure located on the left hand side of this field 14 Ensure that the monitor is in the Setup Mode Section 6 15 On the monitor set the average temperature and average pres sure parameters to the current local conditions NOTE The average pressure reading should be actual pressure NOT corrected to sea level
145. OFTWARE Pace D 2 Revision B 003 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor D 1 2 Loapinc New System SorrwanE INTO THE Monitor Follow these steps to install new system software into the monitor 1 Ensure that your PC is in MS DOS mode 2 If your monitor is a TEOM 1400a Monitor go to step 3 If your monitor is a TEOM 1400 Monitor that was converted to a Series 1400a Monitor go to step 5 3 Using the PC s keyboard type the following command after the MS DOS command prompt LOADALL i p bbbbb where 1 An optional parameter specifying the revision level of the monitor The default value B represents the AB version of the instrument Enter A for this parameter if the instrument is an AA revision of the monitor p An optional parameter specifying the serial port COMI or COM2 usedon the personal computer PC connected to the control unit This parameter does not need to be entered if COMI is being used on the personal computer If you are using COM2 enter a 2 for this parameter bbbbb An optional parameter for the baud rate at which the RS232 port of the control unit is configured Examples of baud rates that can be entered are 1200 2400 4800 9600 or 19200 The default value is 9600 bps NOTE If an MS DOS environment error occurs while following one of the above commands add the following statement to the CONFIG S YS file of your computer SHELL C DO
146. ON Pace 5 13 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 12 Read the main flow approximately 3 0 l min on the reference flow meter If you are using a mass flow meter you must make any necessary corrections to translate this reading to volumetric I min at the current ambient temperature and barometric pressure No adjustment is necessary in the case of a volumetric flow meter The volumetric flow measured by the reference flow meter must be 3 0 0 2 l min to be acceptable If the main flow reading is within acceptable limits go to step 14 If the main flow reading is not within acceptable limits go to step 13 13 Perform the software and hardware calibrations for the mass flow controller Service Manual 14 Remove the 3 8 Swagelok cap from the flow splitter bypass extension 15 Install the bypass flow line onto the flow splitter bypass exten sion 16 Perform a leak check Section 3 4 17 Remove the flow audit adapter from the top of the flow splitter 18 Install the sample inlet onto the flow splitter 19 Install a new TEOM filter into the mass transducer 20 Press the F1 or RUN key SEcTION 5 Basic OPERATION Pace 5 14 Revision B 003 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Section 6 Software Setup This section describes the parameter settings in the software screens that affect the monitor s basic operati
147. OTE The Windows operating system screens shown in this section are from the Windows 98 operating system These screens may vary slightly from your computer s screens if you are operating RPComm under other Windows operating systems Follow these steps to create a new connection 1 When in the Connection List screen Figure 10 3 select the New Connection icon Li on the toolbar The Connection Type screen will be displayed Figure 10 6 Figure 10 6 Connection Connection Type Type screen m 2000 FRM 2025 Cancel 2100 Settings gt gt 2300 5400 8400 2 When in the Connection Type screen select the 1400 button and then the Settings gt gt button to display the AK Protocol Setup screen Figure 10 7 Section 10 RPComm SOFTWARE Pace 10 8 Revision B 000 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure 10 7 AK Protocol Setup screen AK Protocol Setup COMI OK Station Setup Station Number 4m 052 Channel Number 0754 048 4 Cancel Comm Setup gt gt au m o Delay Time SN Phone Number Connection Command 3 For a direct connection the connection description box should read COMX where X is the serial COM port on your PC that the monitor is connected to Section 10 1 4 The Station Setup portion of the screen lists a Station Number default 4 052 and Channel Number default 075 048 These valu
148. OTECTION Pace 11 1 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor v In low lock protection mode the user can not edit any of the parameters in the system 11 1 INITIATING THE Low Lock Mope Follow these steps to enter and exit the low lock mode 1 Press the lt LOCK gt key on the monitor s keypad The monitor will display an x in place of the usual gt cursor on the four line display 2 Enter the six digit numeric low lock password and press the ENTER key NOTE When the instrument is shipped from R amp P the low lock password is 100000 3 To return to the unlock mode repeat steps 1 2 Ifyou misplace or forget the low or high lock password refer to Appendix L for further instructions SECTION 11 PAsswoRD PROTECTION Pace 11 2 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor v In high lock protection mode the user can not edit any of the parameters in the system or view different display screens 11 2 INITIATING THE HicH Lock Mope Follow these steps to enter and exit the high lock mode 1 Press and hold down the lt SHIFT gt key on the monitor s keypad 2 Press the lt LOCK gt key The monitor will display an x in place of the usual gt cursor on the four line display 3 Stop holding down the lt SHIFT gt key 4 Enter the six digit numeric high lock password and press the
149. On Line Mode 1 Connect one end of the 9 to 9 pin computer cable to one of the RS232 ports on the control unit 2 Ensure that nothing is connected to the other RS232 port of the control unit 3 If your personal computer PC or other serial data recording device is equipped with a 9 pin RS232 connector go to step 4 If your PC or other serial data recording device is equipped with a 25 pin connector go to step 5 4 Plug the other end of the 9 to 9 pin computer cable into the 9 pin RS232 port of your PC or other serial data recording device Go to step 8 5 Locate the 9 to 25 pin computer cable adapter 6 Plug the 9 to 25 pin computer cable adapter into the 25 pin port on your PC or other serial data recording device 7 Plug the other end of the 9 to 9 pin computer cable into the 9 to 25 pin computer cable adapter Go to step 8 NOTE Do not use the 9 to 25 pin modem cable to connect the control unit with the PC or other serial data recording device The 9 to 25 pin modem cable is configured for use only with a modem 8 Press the lt 0 gt and lt 6 gt keys and then press the lt ENTER gt key to display the Com Print Settings screen Figure 9 22 9 When in the Com Print Settings screen determine the format of the data download Section 9 4 2 10 Initiate the data capture software such as TEOMCOMM or RPComm on your PC or other serial data recording device such as a data logger SEcTION 9 DATA INPUT AND O
150. PComm Scroll Program US Sierra ESI StartUp JS SyQuest Win85 Utility US U S Robotics JS WinFax PRO Winzip I Intemet Explorer x Intemet Mail i Intemet News 3S Microsoft Excel 342 Microsoft NetMeeting 2 1 Microsoft Outlook TY Microsoft Word SEcTION 10 RPComm SoFTWARE MS DOS Prompt ig The Microsoft Network FH Visio Technical Cj Windows Address Book QJ Windows Explorer EJ Windows Messaging Revision B 000 mOERUUENCOQS 3 01AM Pace 10 4 Revision B 000 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 3 When RPComm starts running the RPComm Connection List screen will display Figure 10 3 Figure 10 3 Connection List screen S RPComm Connection List Group Default ISl x File Help Sa DAX ese Connection Name Instrument Type Status Modem Status SEcTION 10 RPComm SOFTWARE Pace 10 5 Revision B 000 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 10 2 1 1 Exiting RPComm Follow these steps to stop running RPComm 1 When in the Connection List screen Figure 10 3 select File and then Exit Figure 10 4 Figure 10 4 Connection List screen with the File menu displayed RPComm Connection List Group Default File Help New Group c 5 cu 02 13 2002 06 00 00029 m Dpen Group Instrument Type Status Modem Status E Save Group Inactive Not Used fae oy eee 1400 Inac
151. PM 10 inlet Flow audit adapter kit Vacuum pump 2 15 pin subminiature D connectors 4 Mass flow controller orifices 4 Hose barbs 2 Operating Manuals Quick Start Guide 2 Service Manuals SECTION 2 SYSTEM INSTALLATION Pace 2 3 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure 2 1 Schematic diagram of a typical PM 10 installation 2 3 INSTALLING THE CONTROL AND SENSOR UNITS The TEOM control unit can be located at any convenient location such as a laboratory bench or rack mount cabinet that is within 20 meters of the sensor unit the default cable length is 10 m R amp P recommends that the sample line be as short as possible for best results Consult R amp P when the distance between these units 1s longer than 20 meters The TEOM sensor unit should be located directly below the inlet point of the sample stream on a sturdy surface Section 2 3 4 Roof flange 172 ID caulk as appropriate Electric and air connecting cables Lope TEOM sensor unit BT To control unit H lt lt Table or lab bench SECTION 2 SYSTEM INSTALLATION Pace 2 4 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 2 3 1 VOLTAGE SETTING Follow these steps to set the proper voltage for your installation 1 Locate the voltage setting indicator on the power line filter on the back panel of the control unit Figures 2 2 and 2 3
152. Program Register the entry for RS Para 3 RARA NOTE The value entered may be of varying length and is not restricted TAER o4 bys a RT EET APPENDIX C Two Way SERIAL COMMUNICATION Pace C 5 Revision B 000 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor AK Protocol Set Function Command SFxx RS Para 1 52 ASCII code for the 1 digit Station Number for example 4 052 The Station Number is always 1 digit in length ASCII code representation of the 2 digit Channel Number for example KO 075 048 The Channel Number is always 2 digits in length RS Para 3 13010 Optional Up to 3 ASCII codes can be added to response from the instrument In this case CR and lt LF gt ASCII codes 013 and 010 are appended to the response Enter 0 if nothing is to be appended RS Para 2 75048 Lee eme meme e nm e Lm esae emer i s rene Ey Set Function command where xx represents a 2 digit code between n UBE 4 digit Set Function command with the 2 digit xx code corresponding to the 00 and 32 These codes are defined function that was set IED N a o N o oa AB wo N o 2 digit Channel Number as defined by RS Para 2 Upto 3 digits appended to the end of the response transmission according to the entry for RS Para 3 LISTING OF FUNCTION CODES xx Run Data Stop F1 F5 Stop All Set Time To Set Time Remotely 1
153. Revision B 000 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor v Set the instrument to the AK Protocol when operating the TEOMCOMM software Figure L 16 Set RS 232 Mode screen L 6 INSTRUMENT SETUP FOR DIRECT COMMUNICATION Your personal computer PC must be connected to the monitor s control unit Follow these steps to connect the PC to the monitor 1 Connect one end of the 9 to 9 pin computer cable to one of the RS232 ports on the control unit 2 Ensure that nothing is connected to the other RS232 port of the control unit 3 If your PC is equipped with a 9 pin RS232 connector go to step 4 If your personal computer is equipped with a 25 pin connector go to step 5 4 Plug the other end of the 9 to 9 pin computer cable into the 9 pin RS232 port of your PC Go to step 8 5 Locate the 9 to 25 pin computer cable adapter 6 Plug the 9 to 25 pin computer cable adapter into the 25 pin port on your PC 7 Plug the other end of the 9 to 9 pin computer cable into the 9 to 25 pin computer cable adapter Go to step 8 NOTE Do not use the 9 to 25 pin modem cable to connect the control unit with the PC The 9 to 25 pin modem cable is configured for use only with a modem 8 Press the lt RS232 gt key on the monitor s keypad to display the Set RS 232 Mode screen Figure L 16 SET RS 232 MODE Mode AK Protocol gt AK Protocol German Prot 9 When in the Set RS 232 Mode screen press
154. S COMMAND COM P E 768 4 Press the Enter key on your PC s keyboard Go to step 7 5 Using the PC s keyboard type the following command after the MS DOS command prompt LOADMOD i p bbbbb 6 Press the Enter key on your PC s keyboard Go to step 7 7 The STATUS light will begin to blink Press any key on the PC s keyboard 8 The Title screen and then the Main screen will display on the control unit s four line display Press the DATA STOP key on the monitor s keypad to enter the Setup Mode APPENDIX D INSTALLING NEw SvsrEM SOFTWARE Pace D 3 Revision B 003 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure D 2 Set Hardware screen Figure D 3 Set Temps Flows screen 9 When in the Main screen press the STEP SCREEN key to display the Menu screen 10 When in the Menu screen press the up T and down 1 arrow keys to select Set Hardware Press the ENTER key to display the Set Hardware screen Figure D 2 SET HARDWARE Cal Const 9605 Ser Num 22822 Inst Type AB 11 Verify all operating parameters in the Set Hardware screen If you have a TEOM 1400a Monitor go to step 15 If you have a TEOM 1400 Monitor that was converted to a TEOM 1400a Monitor go to step 12 12 Locate the calibration constant value on the nameplate located on the left hand side of the mass transducer which is inside the sensor unit 13 When in the Set Hardware screen pr
155. STEP SCREEN key or the ENTER key to display the desired screen 4 Press the lt MAIN STATUS gt key or the lt ESC gt key to return to the Main screen When the monitor 1s displaying certain screens additional related screens can be displayed by pressing the STEP SCREEN gt key For example if the monitor is displaying the Set Analog Ouputs screen Section 9 and the user presses the STEP SCREEN gt key the unit will now display the Set Contact Closure screen Section 9 However when the unit is displaying a screen that does not have an additional related screen and the user presses the STEP SCREEN gt key the unit will display the Main screen If the monitor is displaying any screen except the Main screen and the user presses the lt MAIN STATUS gt key the monitor will display the Main screen SECTION 4 SOFTWARE OVERVIEW Pace 4 16 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 4 3 4 EDIT Key The monitor is normally in the Display or Browse Mode which allows the user to move from screen to screen to view the system s operating parameters However in a number of screens the user may change the unit s operating parameters To change the unit s operating paramaters the user must enter the Edit Mode When you are in a screen that has values that can be changed or edited press the up lt T gt and down 1 arrow keys to select the field t
156. Series 1400a Monitor keypad RN PRINC AVA E EDITAR PRESEN UNIDAD PAN A 7 1 PARA BLOQUEO INICIAR MARCHA DAT ULT MEM PRIM MEM ALMAC PARA TODO RETROC INTRO DESRE J Figures 4 8 German language Series 1400a HAUPT Monitor keypad STAATUS e t INIT t EDIT ANZEIGE EINHEIT N CHSTE DATA START STOP LETZTER ERSTER c 2 M ANALOG RS232 SPEICHER NEIN CTRL t zF ENTER SHIFT SECTION 4 SOFTWARE OVERVIEW Revision B 002 Pace 4 11 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Some of the screens on the Series 1400a Monitor can be displayed by pressing different keys on the keypad depending on which screen is currently shown on the unit s four line display Figure 4 1 When in the Main screen Figure 4 3 the following screens can be accessed directly by pressing a key on the unit s keypad lt MAIN STATUS gt key Current Status Codes screen Section 7 lt STEP SCREEN gt key Menu screen Section 4 3 3 lt TIME DATE gt key Set Time screen Section 6 lt A O gt key Set Analog Outputs screen Section 9 lt RS232 gt key Set RS 232 Mode screen Section 9 lt STORE gt key View Storage screen Section 8 Additionally any screen can be displayed by entering its screen number from the keypad
157. Set Instrument Mode sss L 11 L 3 4 Download Storage sssseeeseeeree L 13 L 3 5 Set Storage Pointer ssssssseees L 16 PAGE xv Revision B 003 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor L 3 6 Fast StOrage OUT c decantio quoe tat oia t e ocius L 17 L 3 7 Exit Progra obici meae upto estque adea L 20 L4 TEOMCOMM Communications Setup Screen L 21 L 5 Sending Header and Trailer Codes ssssssss L 24 L 6 Instrument Setup for Direct Communication L 25 APPENDIX M TEOMPLUS SorTWARE eeseeeeeneeenene enne M 1 M 1 Loading TEOMPLUS Onto a Personal Computer PC M 2 M 2 Connecting the Personal Computer PC to the Control Unit M 4 M 3 Running the TEOMPLUS Software sese M 6 M 4 TEOMPLUS VIEW Screen esee M 11 M 5 TEOMPLUS ACCU Screen sse M 12 M 6 TEOMPLUS INPUTS Screen ssseeee M 12 M 7 Basic TEOMPLUS Commands ss M 13 PAGE XVI Revision B 001 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure 1 1 TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate Monitor sensor unit left and control unit right SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION Section 1 Introduction The TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate Monitor ha
158. Settings 10 13 10 2 8 Downloading Data With RPComm 10 16 10 2 3 1 Setting the Storage Pointer Position 10 16 10 2 3 2 Downloading Data eese 10 19 10 2 4 Manipulating Downloaded Data 10 22 10 2 4 1 Copying Data to the Clipboard 10 22 10 2 4 2 Graphing Downloaded Data s 10 23 10 2 4 8 Storing Data to a File eesesseseesse 10 26 10 2 5 Scheduling Data Downloads cece teeter eee 10 27 10 2 6 Viewing Instrument Operation ssssessss 10 30 10 2 6 1 Viewing System Registers sssss 10 30 10 2 6 2 Viewing the Instrument Virtual Keypad 10 34 10 3 Creating a Real Time Graph sssesee 10 35 PAGE XII Revision B 003 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Table of Contents continued SECTION 11 PASSWORD PROTECTION urat RU Dog Leo Exe ut Ede aa teases 11 1 11 1 Initiating the Low Lock Mode seeeeeeeee 11 2 11 2 Initiating the High Lock Mode sueesesesssseesseeeeeess 11 3 11 3 Set Passwords Screen sese 11 4 11 3 1 Changing the Low Password sesseseee 11 4 11 3 2 Changing t
159. Storage screen with additional lines displayed Stor Stor Stor Stor Stor SET STORAGE Vari Var2 Var3 Var4 Var5 Var6 Var7 Var8 Interval Stor Vars Station Mass Conc 30 Min MC 01 Hr MC Frequency A I 5 Amb Temp A I 3 Null 60 00 4 48048048 The Set Storage screen contains the following information Stor Var 1 8 Interval SECTION 6 SOFTWARE SETUP These fields contain the names of the variables that are currently being stored in the internal data logger The monitor will store maximum of eight variables in a record This parameter can be edited when the monitor is in any operating mode This field contains the time sec interval between successive writings of data to the circular buffer For example if the user sets this field to 3600 the monitor will record data to the internal data logger every hour The averaged analog input values aver age wind speed PRC 147 average wind velocity PRC 148 and average wind direction PRC 149 Pace 6 24 Revision B 003 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Stor Vars X Changing the value for Stor Vars erases the storage buffer parameter Station are zeroed immediately after that data is stored in the monitor s internal data logger The averaging time of analog inputs and meteorological data is equal to the data storage interval The default setting for this value is 1 800 seconds
160. System a bank of solenoid valves redirects the bypass sample stream through one of eight sampling devices mounted inside the unit not included with the system These sampling devices can include 25 37 or 47 mm filter holders with the user s choice of filter media polyurethane foam PUF samplers or other filter pack tube combinations suitable for the 13 67 14 67 or 15 67 l min flow rate Section 14 ACCU System Pace 14 2 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Section 14 ACCU System The ACCU System is connected to the Series 1400a Monitor electronically by a 10 meter cable that connects to the ACCU connector on the back panel of the monitor s control unit Section 2 The cable carries the signals that activate the valves in the ACCU System The user can specify the conditions under which each of the ACCU System s eight flow channels is opened using the monitor s software Section 14 4 The flow through the ACCU System can be governed by such factors as the real time mass concentration time of day day of the week or analog signals generated by other devices such as wind speed or wind direction anemometers Pace 14 3 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure 14 3 left ACCU System with enclosure door open Figure 14 4 right Schematic drawing of the ACCU System 14 1 PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION The ACCU Syste
161. TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Operating Manual AB Serial Numbers 42 003347 Revision B 065ep2008 2007 Thermo Fisher Scientific Inc All rights reserved Specifications terms and pricing are subject to change Not all products are available in all countries Please consult your local sales representative for details Thermo Fisher Scientific Air Quality Instruments 27 Forge Parkway Franklin MA 02038 1 508 520 0430 www thermo com aqi WEEE Compliance This product is required to comply with the European Union s Waste Electrical amp Electronic Equipment WEEE Directive 2002 96 EC It is marked with the following symbol Thermo Fisher Scientific has contracted with one or more recycling disposal companies in each EU Member State and this product should be disposed of or recycled through them Further information on Thermo Fisher Scientific s compliance with these Directives the recyclers in your country and information on Thermo Fisher Scientific products which may assist the detection of substances subject to the RoHS Directive are available at www thermo com WEEERoHS Revision B 003 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor U S EPA Designation Thermo Scientific TEOM 1400 and 1400a PM 10 Monitors EPA Designation No EQPM 1090 079 The United States Environmental Protection Agency U S EPA has designated the Thermo Scientific s TEOM 1400 and 1400
162. This accounts for moisture equilibration differences reflected in the choice of filter media and equilibration thermodynamics used in manual and automated methodologies This is done using the formula Y A Bx where Y is the adjusted mass concentration x is the unadjusted mass concentration A Const A is the intercept factor and B Const B is the slope factor The values of A and B must be set to their default values of 3 000 and 1 030 respectively for the Series 1400a Monitor to be used as a U S EPA equivalent method for PM 10 measurements These adjustment factors were determined at sites where nonvolatile particulate matter dominated and therefore the adjustment factors reflect the filter character more than they reflect the particulate matter For PM 2 5 measurements it 1s justifiable to use the original constants 3 000 and 1 030 because the technical rationale may still apply The other option is to use no adjustment for PM 2 5 by setting the constants to values of 0 000 Const A and 1 000 Const B In either case the adjustment factors used may be revisited later as more information becomes available on the best approach Because the adjustment is attained by a simple linear transformation it is possible to recalculate the mass concentration values later based upon new information SECTION 2 SYSTEM INSTALLATION Pace 2 54 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 2 5 HOUSING THE
163. This field contains the average analog input 1 engineering units value The averaging time is determined by the interval parameter set on the Set Storage screen Section 6 The average input value for analog input channel 1 is assigned program register code PRC 115 Appendix B This field contains the average analog input 2 engineering units value The averaging time is determined by the interval parameter set on the Set Storage screen Section 6 The average input value for analog input channel 2 is assigned program register code PRC 116 Appendix B This field contains the average analog input 3 engineering units value The averaging time is determined by the interval parameter set on the Set Storage screen Section 6 The average input value Pace 9 7 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor A l4 A T 5 A T6 Wind Spd Wind Vel SEcTION 9 DATA INPUT AND OUTPUT for analog input channel 3 is assigned program register code PRC 117 Appendix B This field contains the average analog input 4 engineering units value The averaging time is determined by the interval parameter set on the Set Storage screen Section 6 The average input value for analog input channel 4 is assigned program register code PRC 118 Appendix B This field contains the average analog input 5 engineering units value The averaging time is determin
164. UTPUT Pace 9 36 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 11 Ensure that the data capture software is set for the same commu nication parameters as the instrument The default settings of the monitor are Baud rate 9600 Data bits 8 Parity None Stop bits 1 12 Set the data capture software to the data capture or data down load mode 13 Press the lt RS232 gt key on the monitor s keypad to display the Set RS 232 Mode screen Figure 9 19 14 When in the Set RS 232 Mode screen press the lt EDIT gt key 15 Press the up 1 and down 1 arrow keys to select Print On Line 16 Press the ENTER key The instrument will begin downloading data to the PC or other serial data recording device such as a data logger immediately after you press the ENTER key 17 When the data download is complete set the RS232 protocol to None 18 Disconnect the RS232 cable from the monitor and the PC or other serial data recording device SEcTION 9 DATA INPUT AND OUTPUT Pace 9 37 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 9 4 4 3 STORE TO PRINT MopDE The user can set up the monitor to download data records using the Store to Print Mode before they have been recorded while they are being recorded or after they have been recorded The Store To Print mode is designed to transmit information to a serial p
165. VIEW OF INSTRUMENT SCREENS Pace A 19 Revision B 001 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure A 46 Control buttons on the Download Downloads all stored data in the data buffer starting at the first data Data screen record After the data are downloaded the storage pointer will move to the end of the data storage buffer When the data have been downloaded the data will be displayed in the Download Data screen Downloads data from the current storage pointer position to the end of the data buffer After the data are downloaded the storage pointer will move to the end of the data storage buffer Aborts the download This action will set the storage pointer to the record location where the download was aborted Copies the selected data to the Windows clipboard The data can then be imported and used in other programs Sends the selected data to the Download Graph screen Stores the data to a file The file is saved in a comma delimited ASCII format Opens a data file that has been previously saved to disk for display or graphing Clears the data currently being displayed Downloaded 134 records 12 7 98 10 06 50 AM When the download has been successfully completed a message will appear in the Dialog box indicating how many records were downloaded APPENDIX A OVERVIEW OF INSTRUMENT SCREENS Pace A 20 Revision B 001 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM
166. a PM 10 Monitors as an equivalent method for the determination of 24 hour average PM 10 concentrations in ambient air For use as a designated equivalent method the TEOM 1400 and 1400a PM 10 Monitors must be operated with a Thermo Scientific PM 10 Inlet 00506 0000 a modified Thermo Scientific PM 10 Inlet 57 004742 or a Sierra Andersen Model 246b PM 10 inlet a flow rate of 16 7 liters per minute teflon coated glass fiber filter cartridges the total mass averaging time set at 300 seconds and the mass rate mass concentration averaging time set at 300 seconds The use of the Thermo Scientific PM 10 inlet was approved by U S EPA on December 9 1990 On September 1 1993 the U S EPA approved the operation of the TEOM 1400 and 1400a monitors on a case by case basis at lower temperature settings under winter time conditions Requests to the U S EPA will be considered on a case by case basis under the provisions contained in Section 2 8 Modifications of Methods by Users of Appendix C to 40 CFR Part 58 When granted such approvals will limit use of the low temperature operation to periods during the wintertime months when outdoor tempera tures exceed 25 C no more than 5 percent of the time and to monitoring locations where the prevailing ambient PM 10 aerosol has or is expected to have a significant contribution from volatile or semi volatile components The recommended set points for operation of the TEOM 1400 and 1400a PM 10 monitors at
167. accurate mass concentration levels when using a size selective inlet the user must make a density adjustment to the mass flow controllers using the tempera ture and pressure values Follow these steps to use the actual temperature and pressure values to control the volumetric flow IMPORTANT Ensure that the ambient temperature sensor is installed on the monitor Section 2 1 Press the DATA STOP key 2 When in the Main screen Figure 6 1 press the STEP SCREEN key to display the Menu screen Figure 6 4 3 When in the Menu screen press the up 1 and down lt gt arrow keys to select Set Temps Flows and then press the ENTER key to display the Set Temps Flows screen Figure 6 6 You also can press the 1 and 9 keys and then press the ENTER key to display the Set Temps Flows screen SECTION 6 SOFTWARE SETUP Pace 6 11 Revision B 003 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 4 Press the lt EDIT gt key 5 When in the Set Temps Flows screen press the arrow keys to select the left hand column in the T A S line 6 Use the monitor s keypad to enter 99 as the average tempera ture 7 Press the arrow keys to select the left hand column in the P A S line 8 Use the monitor s keypad to enter 9 as the average pressure at the site 9 Press the ENTER key 10 Press the F1 or RUN key to restart data collection
168. ach new connection These new connections can connect various instrument types When you have completed defining your new connections you can save them in a connection group If you want to save your new connections in a connection group go to step 10 If you do not want to save your new connections in a connection group go to step 11 10 Ensure that all of your new connections are displayed in the SEcTION 10 RPComm SOFTWARE Connection List screen Ensure that the monitor s RS232 mode is set to AK Protocol Section 9 When in the Connection List screen select the File pull down menu and highlight Save Group Figure 10 8 The next time that you start RPComm you can restore the connection group by selecting the File pull down menu and then highlighting Open Group A list of saved connection groups will be displayed in the Save Connection Group screen Figure 10 9 Highlight the desired group in the Save Connection Group screen and select the OK button Pace 10 10 Revision B 000 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure 10 8 RPComm r S RPComm Connection List Group Default Iof xi Connection List screen with ap File pull down menu File Help New Group SES 5 Open Group t Instrument Type Status Modem Status Save Group Active New Connection 15400 2 Default Figure 10 9 Save Connec tion Group scr
169. al Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Appendix M TEOMPLUS Software The TEOMPLUS software supplied with the Series 1400a Monitor allows the user to view the operation of the instrument and change many instrument variables from a personal computer PC When running TEOMPLUS the user can view a quick overview of all major settings of the monitor without having to use the four line display on the instrument s front panel A PC is not required for the normal operation of the Series 1400a Monitor or to set any of the program variables All functions performed from the PC also can be performed from the control unit s keypad with the exception of loading new system software which can only take place using a PC To use TEOMPLUS you must load it onto a PC Section M 1 connect the PC to the control unit Section M 2 and then initiate the TEOMPLUS software program Section M 3 APPENDIX M TEOMPLUS SorrwARE Pace M 1 Revision B 000 Operating Manual Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor M 1 Loanne TEOMPLUS Onto A PERsoNAL Computer PC Follow these steps to load TEOMPLUS onto your PC 1 Create a folder named TEOMPLUS on your C drive 2 Locate the 3 1 2 inch floppy software disc that has the following files Accu bat Accu cfv imgflag set Inputs bat Inputs cfv Iomux cfl Iomux sp cfl License mxr Loadall bat Loadmod bat Main mux Muxinitl doc Muxinitl exe Muxload doc Muxload exe
170. alibrated to a primary standard and should have an accuracy of 1 at 3 I min 14 Compare the monitor s F Main set point step 10 above with the flow rate indicated by the flow meter The F Main reading is in volumetric liters per minute If you are using a mass flow meter you must adjust its reading for temperature and pressure to obtain volumetric flow under the test conditions If you are using a volumetric flow meter you do not need to adjust your flow meter for temperature and pressure If the F Main set point step 10 matches the flow rate indicated by the flow meter go to step 16 If the F Main set point step 10 does not match the flow rate indicated by the flow meter go to step 15 Edit the FAdj Main field on the monitor so that the volumetric flow rate indicated by the flow meter matches the F Main set point step 10 The value for FAdj Main can be increased and decreased by pressing the up and down keys when in the Edit Mode Section 4 If you must enter a step adjustment greater than 11095 to calibrate the mass flow controller you must per form a hardware calibration Section J 3 If your system has an auxiliary flow controller repeat steps 8 to 14 replacing the references to F Main and FAdj Main with F Aux and FAdj Aux Connect the reference flow meter to the BYPASS FLOW port located on the back panel of the control unit 17 Change the average tempera
171. an Ambient Network Protocol Section 9 4 3 NOTE If you are using the TEOMCOMM software select AK Protocol in the Set RS 232 Mode screen step 13 and enter the following default values on the four lines of the Com 2 Way Settings screen RS Para 1 52 RS Para 2 75048 RS Para 3 13010 RS Para 4 0 17 Test the connection by checking to ensure that data can be sent and received using the commands appropriate to the selected RS232 protocol 18 When the data transmission is complete set the RS232 protocol to None 19 Disconnect the RS232 cable from the monitor and the PC SEcTION 9 DATA INPUT AND OUTPUT Pace 9 41 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor This page left intentionally blank SEcTION 9 DATA INPUT AND OUTPUT Pace 9 42 Revision B 000 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Section 10 RPComm Software RPComm is a communications software package developed for Windows 9x NT 2000 Me to provide interactive remote communications with R amp P instrumentation RPComm also comes in a version for handheld computers Windows CE Refer to the Palm Pilot PC Operating Manual for instructions on using the PalmOS based handheld computer to download data from the Series 1400a Monitor Refer to Appendix A for a complete list of RPComm software screens RPComm enables the user to Download data stored in the instrument s data storage
172. ar Min Max Var 57 0 00 500 00 Var 58 0 00 500 00 Var 9 0 00 5000 00 Var Max Volt 3 O lV 1 2V 2 5V 3 10V Var Jumper 0 2V 1 10V Var Var COMM 2 WAY SETTINGS Var Interval Interval a Columns Stor Vars change Var deletes storage Var Station Var Var Constant A 3 000 Var Constant B 1 030 Var ANALOG CALIBRATION Station Cal Mode O Off 1 0n Analog Out Value X Low Pass 100000 Analog In Chan Value High Pass 100000 APPENDIX A OVERVIEW OF INSTRUMENT SCREENS Pace A 34 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure A 61 TEOMPLUS ACCU screen APPENDIX A OVERVIEW OF INSTRUMENT SCREENS Window ACCU Channel 1 Ta 36240 Vi 8 257 Channel 2 T e Vi 0 000 Channel 3 T 89400 Vi 20 368 Channel 4 T 28720 Vi 6 543 o Vi 0 000 Channel 6 T e Vi 0 000 Channel 7 T e Vi 0 000 Channel 8 T e Vi 0 000 Revision B 001 Muxviewr v5 1 ACCU SYSTEM OVERVIEW Currently Active Channel 1 Channel 5 T Pace A 35 Revision B 001 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure A 62 TEOMPLUS INPUTS screen Top Window INPUTS Muxviewr w5 ANALOG INPUT OVERVIEW Channel O 54 47 Channel Channel Channel Channel Channel Channel Channel Channel APPENDIX A OVERVIEW OF INSTRUMENT SCREENS Pace A 36 Revision B 001 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Appendix B Program Reg
173. articulate PM 10 Monitor 3 1 3 FiLTER PRE CONDITIONING TEOM filters must be preconditioned to avoid excessive moisture buildup prior to their use in the system v Use the two holders on the right side of the mass ET transducer inside to store Follow these steps to precondition the TEOM filters the next two TEOM filters to be used 1 Place two filters on the filter holders of the mass transducer Figure 3 21 to condition the filters Figure 3 21 Open mass transducer with extra filters in the filter holders A highlighted X Do not handle TEOM filters with your fingers 2 When it is time to install a new filter use a conditioned filter from one of the filter holders 3 Replace the conditioned filter that was on the filter holder with a new filter SECTION 3 SAMPLE PREPARATION Pace 3 14 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor v Keep the door to the TEOM sensor unit open for as short a time as possible to minimize the temperature change in the system X Do not handle TEOM filters with your fingers 3 1 4 Fu rER REMOVAL Follow these steps to remove a filter 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Turn on the sample pump by plugging it into an appropriate power source Figure 3 17 Press the POWER switch to turn on the control unit Figure 3 14 Press the DATA STOP key on the control unit s keypad Figure 3 18 Open the door of t
174. as entered a 0 for the third PRC variable Null displays in the PRC variable field where the name of the variable is ordinarily shown This field contains the minimum permissible value of the fourth PRC variable in ACCU channel 1 This field contains the maximum permissible value of the fourth PRC variable in ACCU channel 1 Pace 14 22 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 14 4 1 Derininc AN ACCU CHANNEL Follow these steps to define an ACCU channel 1 Press the DATA STOP key to enter the Setup Mode 2 Press the 1 and 5 keys and then press the ENTER key to display the Set ACCU System screen Figure 14 15 3 Press the EDIT key v Each channel may 4 Enter the appropriate information for each ACCU channel de contain up to four collection criteria that are anded pending on the type of sampling that you want the ACCU System together to perform Sections 14 4 1 1 14 4 1 6 5 Press the lt ENTER gt key 6 Press the lt F1 gt or lt RUN gt key to reset the instrument and resume data collection SEcrioN 14 ACCU System Pace 14 23 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor v Once an event triggers the system the ACCU hardware samples for predefined lengths of time on channels 1 through 8 Figure 14 19 Set ACCU System screen with channel 1 set for time of day sampling
175. ass Conc Var2 30 Min MC Var3 01 Hr MC SET STORAGE Varl Mass Conc Var2 30 Min MC Var3 01 Hr MC Var4 Frequency Var5 A I 5 Var6 Amb Temp Var7 A I 3 Var8 Null Interval 60 00 Vars 4 Station 48048048 APPENDIX A OVERVIEW OF INSTRUMENT SCREENS Revision B 001 Pace A 10 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure A 25 Set Temps Flows screen SET TEMPS FLOWS T Case gt 50 00 50 T Air 50 00 50 T Cap 50 00 49 Figure A 26 Set Temps Flows screen with additional SET TEMPS FLOWS lines displayed T Case gt 50 00 50 T Air 50 00 50 T Cap 50 00 49 F Main F Aux T A S P A S Amb Temp Amb Pres FAdj Main FAdj Aux APPENDIX A OVERVIEW OF INSTRUMENT SCREENS Revision B 001 Pace A 11 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure A 27 Set Hardware screen Cal Const gt Ser Num Inst Type Figure A 28 Set Hardware screen with additional lines displayed Cal Const gt Ser Num Inst Type Wait Time MR MC Ave TM Ave XX Hr MC Const A Const B Soft Rate Hard Rate Version Figure A 29 View ACCU System screen Time gt Volume Curr Chan APPENDIX A OVERVIEW OF INSTRUMENT SCREENS SET HARDWARE 9605 22822 AB SET HARDWARE 9605 22822 AB 0 300 300 8 3 000 1 030 0 000000 0 000000 3 016 VIEW ACCU SYSTEM Revision B 001 Pace A 12 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Par
176. at the ambient temperature sensor is installed on the monitor Section 2 1 Press the lt DATA STOP gt key 2 When in the Main screen Figure 6 1 press the lt STEP SCREEN gt key to display the Menu screen Figure 6 4 3 When in the Menu screen press the up 1 and down lt gt arrow keys to select Set Temps Flows and then press the ENTER key to display the Set Temps Flows screen Figure 6 6 You also can press the 1 and 9 keys and then press the ENTER key to display the Set Temps Flows screen 4 Press the EDIT key 5 When in the Set Temps Flows screen press the arrow keys to select the left hand column in the T A S line 6 Use the monitor s keypad to enter 99 as the average tempera ture SECTION 6 SOFTWARE SETUP Pace 6 15 Revision B 003 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 7 Press the right arrow key to select the right hand column in the T A S line 8 Use the monitor s keypad to enter 99 as the standard tempera ture 9 Press the arrow keys to select the left hand column in the P A S line 10 Use the monitor s keypad to enter 9 as the average pressure at the site 11 Press the right arrow key to select the right hand column in the P A S line 12 Use the monitor s keypad to enter 9 as the standard pressure 13 Press the lt ENTER gt key 14 Press the lt F1
177. ate PM 10 Monitor e Low lock L Mode The user is prevented from editing any of the system parameters but may view all screens and change the operating mode of the instrument to perform main tenance or calibration functions such as filter exchanges e High lock H Mode Theusercannotmake any changes from the keypad except for turning off the high lock mode with the proper pass word 09 39 This field contains the current time hh mm Refer to Section 6 for instructions on changing the time and date stored by the instrument SECTION 4 SOFTWARE OVERVIEW Pace 4 6 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 4 2 2 INFORMATION LINES The Main screen contains more information lines than can be viewed at one time Press the down lt gt arrow key on the control unit s keypad Figure 4 1 to view the additional information lines Figure 4 5 Figure 4 5 Main screen with additional information OK 4 lines displayed Mass Conc gt 30 Min MC 01 Hr MC 08 Hr MC 85 8 24 Hr MC 69 3 Tot Mass 974 38 Case Temp 50 00 Air Temp 50 01 Cap Temp 49 98 Main Flow 3 00 Aux Flow 13 66 0 524 Frequency 245 55603 When you press the down arrow key to view additional information lines the status line remains visible at the top of the screen Because the Main screen displays data computed by the instrument none of the data values on this screen can be edited or changed by the user
178. ate glass fiber This filter is weighed every two seconds The difference between the filter s current weight and the filter s initial weight as automatically measured by the instrument after the installation of the filter gives the total mass of the collected particulate matter These instantaneous readings of total mass are then smoothed exponentially using a selectable time constant to reduce noise Next the mass rate 1s calculated by taking the change in the smoothed total mass between the current reading and the immediately preceding one and expressing this as a mass rate in g sec This mass rate is also smoothed exponentially to reduce noise Finally the mass concentration in ug m is computed by dividing the mass rate by the flow rate corrected to EPA standard temperature and pressure and expressed in m sec and then multiplying the result by 10 to convert from g m to ug m Internal temperatures in the instrument are controlled to minimize the effects of changing ambient conditions The sample stream is preheated to 50 C before entering the mass transducer so that the sample filter always collects under conditions of very low and therefore relatively constant humidity All measurement and temperature functions of the instrument are controlled by a dedicated microcontroller This computer has both digital and analog capability for multipurpose interfacing with external data collection systems The instrument s rack mountable contr
179. ationary fitting Go to step 8 Repeat steps 3 to 5 for each filter cartridge that you want to re place When you have finished installing filter cartridges go to step 8 Close the ACCU enclosure door Update the criteria for each channel that you removed or ex changed filter cartridges and reset the channels Section 14 6 10 Press F1 or RUN keys to begin data collection Section 14 ACCU System Pace 14 18 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure 14 15 Set ACCU System screen Figure 14 16 Main screen 14 4 Set ACCU System SCREEN Each ACCU channel can be defined individually to receive the bypass flow once its specific criteria are met The user sets the conditions under which a channel is exposed to the bypass flow when in the Set ACCU System screen Figure 14 15 SET ACCU SYSTEM 3 1 gt Mass Conc 100 0 1000 0 2 Curr Ti Da 600 Each channel can contain up to four conditions that must be met in order for the bypass flow to pass through it The conditions entered are logically anded together meaning that all of the user specified criteria must be met for the channel to become active The monitor determines that a condition is met if the current value of the selected PRC is greater than or equal to the minimum value and less than the maximum value You can display the Set ACCU System screen on the four line display of the control unit in t
180. ay as the active screen Select the appropriate software routine and press the lt En ter gt key The Muxview Load Program mux File Window dialog box Figure M 11 will now dis play as the active screen Select Yes and press the Enter key The Muxview Load Communica tions Window dialog box Figure M 12 will now display as the active screen Select Yes and press the lt Enter gt key Press the lt End gt key to exit from the LOAD command APPENDIX M TEOMPLUS SorrwARE Pace M 13 Revision B 000 Operating Manual Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure M 9 TEOMPLUS VIEW screen with Muxview Load Selection dialog box displayed Bis E3 Ms VIEW MUXVIEWR neje m lA Top Window Load Selection Window Muxviewr v5 1 TEOM Series 14808a Monitor Page 1 five Time Mass Rate _ 1 1 1 ug h Mass Conc ug m 3 Total Mass ug Muxview Load Selection lt End gt to Close Window Files Types mux Files cfv Files cfr Files cfc Files Filt L Case T fi r Temp Temp Cap Temp __ Pres Enclosure Temp Pres Main Flow C Main Flow Auxiliary Flow o o Aux Flow Serial Number Amb Temp _ Cal Constant Amb Pres nn lt F2 gt Muxview Commands Re HEN lt lt Alt Fi gt Specific Hel lt Fi gt View Window Figure M 10 TEOMPLUS VIEW screen with Load Configuration from Fi
181. ay have from the original manufacturer or third party supplier to the extent such assignment is allowed by such original manufacturer or third party supplier In no event shall Seller have any obligation to make repairs replacements or corrections required in whole or in part as the result of i normal wear and tear ii accident disaster or event of force majeure iii misuse fault or negligence of or by Buyer iv use ofthe Products in a manner for which they were not designed v causes external to the Products such as but not limited to power failure or electrical power surges vi improper storage and handling ofthe Products or vii useofthe Products in combination with equipment or software not supplied by Seller If Seller determines that Products for which Buyer has requested warranty services are not covered by the warranty hereunder Buyer shall pay orreimburse Seller forall costs of investigating and responding to such request at Seller s then prevailing time and materials rates If Seller provides repair services or replacement parts that are not covered by the warranty provided in this warranty Buyer shall pay Seller therefor at Seller s then prevailing time and materials rates ANY INSTALLATION MAINTENANCE REPAIR SERVICE RELOCATION OR ALTERATION TO OR OF OR OTHER TAMPERING WITH THE PRODUCTS PERFORMED BY ANY PERSON OR ENTITY OTHER THAN SELLER WITHOUT SELLER S PRIOR WRITTEN APPROVAL OR ANY USE OF REPLACEMENT PARTS NOT SUPPLIED
182. be operating the instrument remotely using the RPComm software program refer to Section 10 If you will be operating the instrument remotely using the AK Protocol or the German Ambient Network Protocol refer to Section 9 4 5 If you will be downloading data records using the Fast Store Out RS232 Mode refer to Section 9 4 4 1 If you will be downloading data records using the Print On Line RS232 Mode refer to Section 9 4 4 2 If you will be downloading data records using the Store to Print RS232 Mode refer to Section 9 4 4 3 After you have set up the unit for downloading data go to step 14 14 When the data download is complete set the RS232 protocol to None Section 9 15 Disconnect the RS232 cable from the monitor and the PC or other serial data recording device 16 If any status code conditions occurred during the data download procedure press the lt MAIN STATUS gt key to display the Current Status Codes screen Section 7 17 When in the Current Status Codes screen check the status codes that are displayed 18 Press F1 or RUN key to reset the unit s status codes and start data collection SEcTION 5 Basic OPERATION Pace 5 7 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure 5 10 Set Temps Flows screen with additional lines displayed 5 3 VERIFICATION AUDIT PROCEDURES Perform the ambient air temperature verification Section 5 3 1 pressure veri
183. beginning of the area that you want to zoom into Drag the cursor vertically to the end of the zoom area and release the mouse button The graph will be resized according to the new y axis dimensions Enables panning Panning allows the user to move the graph so that a different section of the x or y axis will be displayed without affecting the scale of either axis With this icon selected place the mouse cursor somewhere within the graph area and hold down the left mouse button Move the mouse to display the desired section of the graph Selecting this icon will undo the last zoom or panning step Rescales the x and y axes so that all the graphs for the selected data are displayed Toggles between the two possible x axis scales date and time and time only This does not affect the way the data are displayed on the graph These two boxes define the number of axis divisions on the graph The left hand box refers to the x axis and the right hand box refers to the y axis The number of divi sions on the axis can be set to 5 10 15 or 20 Increasing the number of divisions results in a finer axis grid Decreasing the number of divisions results in a courser axis grid This does not affect the way the data are displayed on the graph Section 10 RPComm SOFTWARE Pace 10 37 Revision B 000 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor This page left intentionally blank SEcTION 10 RPComm SOFTWARE Pace
184. ber in each record in addition to any data fields selected by the user Figure 6 10 Set Storage screen SET STORAGE Stor Varl gt Mass Conc Stor Var2 30 Min MC Stor Var3 01 Hr MC Figure 6 11 shows the capacity of the monitor s internal storage Because header information is stored in each record the capacity of the data logger does not decrease proportionately with an increase in the number of data fields per record Figure 6 11 Approximate internal data storage Internal Data Storage Capacity capacity for the Series 1400a Monitor Data Fields per Record Capacity in Records Capacity in Time Minumum storage capacity Most configurations store more data Computed using a storage interval of 30 minutes SECTION 6 SOFTWARE SETUP Pace 6 23 Revision B 003 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor You can display the Set Storage screen on the four line display of the control unit in two different ways 1 When in the View Storage screen Section 8 press the lt STEP SCREEN gt key on the control unit s keypad 2 Press the lt 0 gt and lt 9 gt keys and then press the lt ENTER gt key The Set Storage screen contains additional lines that cannot be seen when the screen first displays on the control unit s four line display Figure 6 12 Press the up lt T gt and down 1 arrow keys to view the additional lines of the Set Storage screen Figure 6 12 Set
185. ble 10 m 2 air flow lines AB Electric amp air cable 20 m 2 air flow lines AB Electric amp air cable 2 m 1 air flow line 00 AA Electric amp air cable 10 m 1 air flow line 00 AA Electric amp air cable 20 m 1 air flow line 00 AA Electric amp air cable 2 m 2 air flow lines 00 AA Electric amp air cable 10 m 2 air flow lines 00 AA Electric amp air cable 20 m 2 air flow lines 00 AA Upgrades Series 1400 to 1400A B upgrade Series 1400UP to 1400AB upgrade Series 1400AA to 1400AB upgrade Pumps Piston pump 120 V 60 Hz 1 4 hp Piston pump 240 V 50 Hz 1 4 hp Piston pump rebuild kit Push to Connect Fittings and Collets Straight 1 4 fitting Straight 3 8 fitting Straight 1 2 fitting Elbow 1 4 fitting Elbow 1 4 to 3 8 fitting 3 8 tube x 1 4 FNPT straight Reducer 3 8 tube to 1 4 tube 1 4 collet 3 8 collet 1 2 collet Batteries Battery clock for U32 00 Battery clock for U32 UP Battery for U1 and U2 UP APPENDIX E CONSUMABLES AND PARTS Revision B 003 03 003407 03 003408 51 003613 0002 51 003613 0010 51 003613 0020 51 003336 0002 51 003336 0010 51 003336 0020 51 000476 0002 51 000476 0010 51 000476 0020 51 000399 0002 51 000399 0010 51 000399 0020 59 004685 0002 59 004589 0002 59 004590 0002 10 001403 10 001404 59 008630 32 001017 32 001531 36 001039 32 001023 32 001041 32 002756 32 003271 32 001852 0004 32 001852 0006 32 001852 0
186. buffer Schedule automatic data downloads View and graph downloaded data View a real time graph of selected variables Remotely operate the unit using a virtual keypad Make multiple connections System requirements for running RPComm software are Pentium processor 64 megabytes MB of random access memory RAM 40 MB of hard drive space RPComm has two communication modes direct and modem Direct communica tion is accomplished when the unit has a direct cable connection with a personal computer PC Modem communication is accomplished when the unit has a connec tion with a PC through the use of a modem and phone line Appendix H Before modem communication is attempted direct communication must be successfully completed This will ensure that the PC and unit have been set up properly for communications Section 10 RPComm SOFTWARE Pace 10 1 Revision B 000 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure 10 1 Main screen with the RS232 Mode field highlighted 10 1 INSTRUMENT SETUP FoR DIRECT COMMUNICATION Your personal computer PC must be connected to the monitor s control unit Follow these steps to connect the PC to the monitor 1 Connect one end of the 9 to 9 pin computer cable to one of the RS232 ports on the control unit 2 Ensure that nothing is connected to the other RS232 port of the control unit 3 If your PC is equipped with a 9 pin RS232 connector go t
187. by the TEOMCOMM software is 19200 This field contains the parity of data transmission which can be defined to be either None Even or Odd The default setting for the monitor is None Refer to the Service Manual to change the monitor s parity setting This field contains the word length data bits which may be either 7 or 8 bits The default setting for the monitor is 8 Refer to the Service Manual to change the monitor s data bits setting This field contains the number of stop bits for each character transmitted which may be either 1 or 2 The default setting forthe monitor is 1 Referto the Service Manual to change the monitor s stop bits setting This field contains the monitor s hardware handshaking which manages the flow control of data at the hardware level The default setting for the monitor 1s None Refer to the Service Manual to change the monitor s hardware hand shake setting This field contains the type of communication flow control which may be either None or Xon Xoff The default setting for the monitor is None Refer to the Service Manual to change the monitor s flow control setting Pace L 22 Revision B 000 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Connection Communication Port ComX Settings Phone Number Modem Init APPENDIX L TEOMCOMM SorrwARE This field contains the monitor s communication mode Dir
188. cale This field contains the type of analog input to which the user sets the current analog input channel This parameter is usually set to Equation indicating a regular conversion using the conversion formula This value also can be defined as WndSpeed wind speed engineering units or WndDir wind direction 0 to 360 If the user wants the monitor to compute wind speed wind velocity and wind direction they must install an optional wind vane anemometer on the monitor Section 2 and then set one analog input channel to WndSpd and another to WndDir This field contains conversion factor A that is used in the conversion formula to convert the analog input value to engineering units This field contains conversion factor B that is used in the conversion formula to convert the analog input value to engineering units This field contains conversion factor C that is used in the conversion formula to convert the analog input value to engineering units This field displays the average input engineering units for the current analog input channel Section 9 1 1 Press the lt LAST FIRST gt key to reset the averaging of all seven analog input channels SEcTION 9 DATA INPUT AND OUTPUT Pace 9 11 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor For each analog input channel 0 6 the monitor can convert the incoming voltage signal of
189. ce 9 39 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 9 4 5 Data DowNLoADING Two Way COMMUNICATION The user can retrieve the current value of all system variables over the RS232 connection change the value of system parameters and download values stored in the monitor s internal data buffer using a personal computer PC or other serial data recording device The monitor must be in the AK Protocol or German Ambient Network Protocol RS232 Mode to perform two way data tranmission Section 9 4 3 The AK Protocol is used in combination with the RPComm software program Section 10 and the TEOMCOMM software program Appendix L The instructions in this section explain a two way data tranmission which is transmitting data to and from the unit using a PC or other serial data recording device Follow these steps to transmit data to and from the monitor 1 Connect one end of the 9 to 9 pin computer cable to one of the RS232 ports on the control unit 2 Ensure that nothing is connected to the other RS232 port of the control unit 3 If your serial printer is equipped with a 9 pin RS232 connector go to step 4 If your serial printer is equipped with a 25 pin connec tor go to step 5 4 Plug the other end of the 9 to 9 pin computer cable into the 9 pin RS232 port of your serial printer Go to step 8 5 Locate the 9 to 25 pin computer cable adapter 6 Plug the 9 to 25 pin computer cabl
190. cedures The verification intervals provided above are guidelines Requirements for verifica tions are site specific and may vary from one location to another SECTION 12 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE AND VERIFICATION PROCEDURES Pace 12 10 Revision B 001 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure 12 11 Calibration constant K inside the mass transducer 12 2 1 Mass TRANSDUCER CALIBRATION VERIFICATION The calibration of the mass transducer in the Series 1400a monitor is determined by the mass transducer s physical mechanical properties Under normal circumstances the calibration does not change materially over the life ofthe instrument Contact R amp P if the results of the verification procedure indicate that the a calibration constant has changed by more than 2 5 from the original R amp P calibration constant You can locate the original R amp P calibration constant inside the mass transducer Figure 12 11 Y Calibration 4 9 constant Before the Series 1400a Monitor is shipped to the customer itis calibrated with a new pre weighed TEOM filter installed in its mass transducer as a calibration weight Because the mass ofthe filter cartridge with particulate matter differs from the mass of a new filter cartridge by only a small fraction calibrating the system with a calibration mass equivalent to the filter mass allows all measurements to be made at essentially the same operating point as the
191. computer must be connected to the monitor s control unit Follow these steps to connect the personal computer to the monitor 1 Connect one end of the 9 to 9 pin computer cable to one of the RS232 ports on the control unit 2 Ensure that nothing is connected to the other RS232 port of the control unit 3 If your personal computer PC is equipped with a 9 pin RS232 connector go to step 4 If your personal computer is equipped with a 25 pin connector go to step 5 4 Plug the other end of the 9 to 9 pin computer cable into the 9 pin RS232 port of your PC Go to step 8 5 Locate the 9 to 25 pin computer cable adapter 6 Plug the 9 to 25 pin computer cable adapter into the 25 pin port on your PC 7 Plug the other end of the 9 to 9 pin computer cable into the 9 to 25 pin computer cable adapter Go to step 8 NOTE Do not use the 9 to 25 pin modem cable to connect the control unit with the PC The 9 to 25 pin modem cable is configured for use only with a modem 8 Ensure that the Main screen is displayed on the control unit s four line display 9 Press the lt F2 gt key on the control unit s keypad until an N None Mode displays in the RS232 Mode field of the Main screen s status line Figure D 1 The instrument must remain in the None Mode while executing the computer routines described in this section RS232 Mode field OK 4 Mass Conc gt 30 Min MC 01 Hr MC APPENDIX D INSTALLING NEw SvsrEM S
192. ction 3 APPENDIX J ORIGINAL DESIGN Mass FLow CONTROLLERS Pace J 10 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Appendix K Complete Outdoor Enclosure The Complete Outdoor Enclosure 99 002332 0120 for 120 VAC and 99 002332 240 for 240 VAC provides a heated and air conditioned environment for the control unit sensor unit and pump of the Series 1400a Monitor It also contains enough space in its 19 inch mounting rack for the installation of data logging equipment This appendix describes the installation and maintenance of the outdoor enclosure K 1 INSTALLING THE CONTROL AND SENSOR UNITS Refer to Section 2 for the setup instructions for the control unit sensor unit and pump Follow these steps to install the monitor in the enclosure 1 Set up the air and electrical connections between the sensor unit and the control unit Section 2 2 Place the control unit on the two angle mounting brackets located in the upper left hand corner of the enclosure Figure K 1 3 Secure the control unit to the rack angle uprights 4 Place the sensor unit on the floor on the right hand side of the enclosure Figure K 1 5 Refer to Appendix K 3 for instructions on setting up the flow splitter and sample tube inside the enclosure APPENDIX K COMPLETE OUTDOOR ENCLOSURE Pace K 1 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure K 1 Instrument
193. culate PM 10 Monitor Electrical and Safety Conformity The product has been tested by ETL Testing Laboratories and has been documented to be in compliance with the following U S and Canadian safety standards UL Standard 3101 1 CAN CSA C22 2 NO 1010 1 Thermo Fisher Scientific certifies that this product operates in compliance with the EC Directive 89 336 EEC in reference to electrical emissions and immunity Specifically the equipment meets the requirements of EN55011 1991 Group 1 Class B Emissions and EN50082 1 1992 Immunity In addition the hardware has been tested for personal or fire safety hazards and meets the requirements of EN61010 1 1995 Safety in fulfillment of EC Directive 73 23 EEC PAGE VII Revision B 003 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Section Revision List As Thermo Scientific instrumentation changes so do our operating and service manuals However these changes may affect only one aspect of an instrument while leaving the instrument as a whole unchanged To explain these individual changes to our customers the company may update only those sections of its operating and service manuals that are affected by the instrument updates or improvements As each manual section changes so does its revision number which is located at the top right corner of each page of each section To help our customers keep track of the changes to the Series 1400a Monitor and it
194. cursor on the New Lo Pass line 7 Enter the new six digit numeric password on the New Lo Pass line This six digit code will now become the new low lock pass word Ifyou misplace or forget the low or high lock password refer to Appendix L for further instructions SECTION 11 PAsSsworD PROTECTION Pace 11 4 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 11 3 2 CHANGING THE HiGH PAsswoRD Follow these steps to change the high password 1 When in the Main screen press the STEP SCREEN key to display the Menu screen 2 When in the Menu screen press the up or down arrow keys to select Set Passwords 3 Press the ENTER key to display the Set Passwords screen Also to display the Set Passwords screen press 1 0 and then the ENTER key when in any screen 4 Press the up or down arrow keys to place the cursor on the Cur Hi Pass line 5 Enter the current password on the Cur Hi Pass line If you enter the current password incorrectly the instrument will beep and erase the entry 6 Press the up or down arrow keys to place the cursor on the New Hi Pass line 7 Enter the new six digit numeric password on the New Hi Pass line This six digit code will now become the new high lock pass word Ifyou misplace or forget the low or high lock password refer to Appendix L for further instructions SECTION 11 PAsSsworD PROTECTION Pace 11 5 Revisi
195. d be removed and examined at least once a year Clean the interior of the cone periodically to keep it free from contamination Follow these steps to clean the sample distributor and cone 1 Turn the monitor off 2 Remove the bypass flow line from the sample distributor cone 3 Remove the four screws that secure the cone to the top of the ACCU enclosure Figure 14 32 Figure 14 32 Sample distributor cone installed on top of the ACCU System enclosure Section 14 ACCU System Pace 14 36 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 4 Hold the cone by its base and pull it upward to remove it from the enclosure 5 Inspect the O ring 22 000485 Figure 14 33 on the sample dis tributor for damage or wear Replace it as necessary Figure 14 33 Sample distributor gasket installed around the sample distribu tor 6 Inspect the sample distributor gasket 30 001617 Figure 14 33 for damage or wear Replace it as necessary 7 Clean the inside of the cone with a lint free cloth 8 Clean the surface of the sample distributor with a lint free cloth 9 Install the cone onto the top of the enclosure 10 Install the bypass flow line onto the fitting on the top of the cone 11 Turn the monitor on Section 14 ACCU System Pace 14 37 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor This page left intentionally blank Section 1
196. d down 1 arrow keys on your personal computer s PC s keyboard to select the appropriate com mand and then press the lt Enter gt key After you press the Enter key the computer will prompt you for any additional information that may be required for the selected command L 3 1 REQUEST THE VALUE or A REGISTER This command returns the value of a requested system variable When the user selects this command the computer will request the variable s program register code PRC Appendix B Figure L 4 After the user enters the appropriate PRC the personal computer PC will display the current value of the variable Figure L 4 TEOMCOMM Main screen with request for PRC number displayed nlcf m LS Tow x f Ed fo A TEOMCOMM v1 41 Request the value of a register Modify the value of a register Set instrument mode Download storage Set storage pointer Fast Storage Out Exit program Enter PRC number Fi Help F2 Comm Config F3 Set Station F4 Options APPENDIX L TEOMCOMM Sortware Pace L 8 Revision B 000 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor L 3 2 Mobiry THE VALUE or A REGISTER This command modifies the value of a system variable When the user selects this command the computer will request the program register code PRC Appendix B of the variable to be changed Figure L 5 Figure L 5 TEOMCOMM Main screen with request for PRC number displayed T
197. d filter Section 3 1 3 from one of the filter holders Figure 3 20 with the filter exchange tool Figure 3 1 so that the filter disk lies between the fork and the upper tab of the tool and the hub of the filter lies between the tines of the fork Figures 3 10 and 3 11 Do not touch the filter with your fingers while picking it up with the filter exchange tool SECTION 3 SAMPLE PREPARATION Pace 3 11 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure 3 20 Open mass transducer with extra filters in the filter holders A highlighted v Keep the door to the TEOM sensor unit open for as short a time as possible to minimize the temperature change in the system 11 Hold the filter exchange tool in line with the tapered element Figures 3 12 and 3 13 and lightly place the hub of the filter onto the tip of the tapered element 12 Gently press down on the filter to ensure that it is seated properly Figure 3 13 13 Remove the filter exchange tool by slowly retracting it sideways until it clears the filter Figure 3 13 Do not disturb the filter 14 Place the bottom of the filter exchange tool on top of the filter Figures 3 13 and apply downward pressure approximately 0 5 kg or 1 Ib to seat the filter firmly in place 15 Raise the mass transducer to the closed position using the black knob 16 Fasten the holding rod onto the latch plate 17 Push the silver handle
198. de None gt None Print On Line AK Protocol German Prot Store to Print SEcTION 9 DATA INPUT AND OUTPUT Pace 9 24 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor The Set RS232 Mode screen contains the following information Mode None Print On Line AK Protocol German Prot SEcTION 9 DATA INPUT AND OUTPUT This field contains the current RS232 mode This field contains the None RS232 Mode When the monitor is in the None Mode the user can view and change instrument operating parameters using the RPComm software application Section 10 or the TEOMPLUS software application and upload new system software to the control unit Appendix D When the instrument is shipped from R amp P the RS232 ports are configured for the None Mode This field contains the Print On Line RS232 Mode When the monitor is in the Print On Line Mode the unit transmits a user specified line of information at a user specified interval The user sets the infor mation that will be transmitted and the interval at which the information is transmitted in the Com Print Settings screen Section 9 4 2 This field contains the AK Protocol RS232 Mode Appendix C When the monitor is in the AK Protocol Mode the user can retrieve the current value of all system variables over the RS232 con nection change the value of system parameters and download values stored in the monitor s internal data buffe
199. does not support any local communication flow control If a Series 1400a and a Model 2000 FRM are located at the same site two modems and phone lines are necessary for communication with the two instruments H 3 2 1 CONNECTING A SERIES 14004 Monitor AND OTHER R amp P INSTRUMENTS or DIFFERENT MoDELs Follow these steps to connect a Series 1400a Monitor and another R amp P instrument via a serial switching device 1 Set up the Series 1400a Monitor and the other instrument for direct communications Section 10 2 Create a new connection to each instrument according to Section 10 2 2 and verify that the units are communicating properly NOTE If the connection is successful the unit s serial number will be displayed at the top of the screen If the connection is not successful or if there is no unit attached then the serial number will be blank or will display 99999 3 Once the RPComm software and instrument configurations have been verified disconnect the direct connection 4 Connect your computer directly to the modem that will be con nected to the serial switching device follow the modem s instruction manual APPENDIX H MopEM COMMUNICATIONS Pace H 14 Revision B 000 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Begin executing any communication software that will allow direct communications with the modem Communication soft ware is
200. e 16 Close and latch the door to the sensor unit Keep the door open for as short a time as possible to minimize the temperature change in the system 17 Supply power to the instrument at the appropriate voltage Sec tion 2 3 1 18 Press the POWER switch on the front panel of the control unit Figure 3 14 The Title screen will appear on the control unit s four line display Figure 3 15 After a moment the Main screen Figure 3 16 will display SECTION 3 SAMPLE PREPARATION Pace 3 7 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure 3 14 Control unit with the POWER button A highlighted STATUS Figure 3 15 Title screen Series 1400a Monitor Copyright 2001 Rupprecht Patashnick Figure 3 16 Main screen OK 4 11 NU Mass Conc gt 30 Min MC 01 Hr MC 19 Plug the pump Figure 3 17 into an appropriate power source to draw a sample stream through the system SECTION 3 SAMPLE PREPARATION Pace 3 8 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure 3 17 Sample air pump 20 Press the DATA STOP key on the control unit s keypad Figure 3 18 MAIN Figure 3 18 TEOM control unit keypad sns EDT DisP units STEP DATA STOP key RUN key F7 F8 0 CTRL M J M ESC BKSPACE t ENTER SHIFT 21 Reset the unit by p
201. e PM 10 Monitor 3 Clean the bottom side of the collector assembly Figure G 11 Figure G 11 Bottom of the collector assembly 4 Using a cotton swab clean the weep hole in the collector plate where the moisture runs out to the moisture trap Figure G 12 Figure G 12 Cleaning the weep hole in the collector plate APPENDIX G INLET MAINTENANCE Pace G 8 Revision B 001 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 5 Locate the rain jar Figure G 1 and clean it Inspect the rain jar cover s brass nipple fitting to ensure that it is secure and free from blockages Figure G 13 Figure G 13 Rain jar cover with brass fitting highlighted Brass fitting o Mm Heb 6 Inspect the two inlet tube sealing O rings for damage or wear Replace if necessary Figure G 14 Figure G 14 Bottom of inlet with O rings highlighted APPENDIX G INLET MAINTENANCE Pace G 9 Revision B 001 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 7 Apply a light coating of silicone grease to these O rings to ensure that a seal is made when they are reinstalled on the flow splitter 8 Clean the lower collector assembly s threads to ensure a tight seal when the two halves are reassembled 9 Reinstall the rain jar Place a light coating of silicone grease on the gasket inside the cap of the rain jar This will ensure a leak free fit APPENDIX G INLET MAINTENANCE Pac
202. e This value can not be edited and will be correct only when the ambient temperature sen sor is properly installed Section 2 This field contains the current ambient pressure atm at the site This value can not be edited This field contains the main flow adjustment factor This value is used during the software calibration of the mass flow controller Service Manual The Pace 6 8 Revision B 003 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor default setting for this parameter is 1 000 and this value can be adjusted when the monitor is in the Setup Mode FAdj Aux This field contains the auxiliary flow adjustment factor This value used during the software calibra tion of the mass flow controller Service Manual The default setting for this parameter is 1 000 and this value can be adjusted when the monitor is in the Setup Mode The Series 1400a Monitor uses mass flow controllers to ensure a constant and precise flow through the instrument The mass flow controllers use the actual active volumetric flow control setting or average passive volumetric flow control setting temperature and pressure values to regulate the volumetric flow through the system The active volumetric flow control setting Section 6 3 1 directs the unit to use the actual ambient temperature and pressure to regulate the volumetric flow through the system The passive volumentric flow control setting Section 6 3 2
203. e reed relay contacts that open or close when certain status conditions occur In their default settings the monitor s contact closure circuits respond to status conditions and the filter loading percentage Figure 9 15 NE Reed Relay Closed Reed Relay Open DATA VALID DATA INVALID Contact Closure Circuit 1 Status codes M T or F are Status codes M T or F are not active active FILTER LOAD FILTER NEEDS EXCHANGE Contact PERCENTAGE OK Closure Circuit 2 Percent of filter remaining is Percent of filter remaining is less than 9096 greater than 90 The pin assignments to the contact closure relays Figure 9 16 can be found on the 15 pin analog connectors on the front and back panels of the control unit The contact closurerelay can be used for voltages up to 200 VAC or200 VDC and currents as high as 10 mA RENE Voltage In Voltage Out SEcTION 9 DATA INPUT AND OUTPUT Pace 9 19 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 9 3 1 Set Contact CLOSURE SCREEN The user can define the operation of the contact closure circuits in the Set Contact Closure screen Figure 9 17 This programmability allows the user to tailor the channels to a variety of alarm conditions that may exist at different sites Figure 9 17 Set Contact Closure screen SET CONTACT CLOSURE Cont 1 Prec gt Status NAND 7 00 Cont 2 Pre Pres Drop You can display the Set Contact Closure scree
204. e 3 23 Do not twist or tilt the filter exchange tool from side to side while removing the filter from the TE This will damage the TE SECTION 3 SAMPLE PREPARATION Pace 3 16 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure 3 25 Main screen with filter loading percent age highlighted Figure 3 26 Main screen showing that filter replace ment is required 3 2 FILTER LOADING The filter loading percentage value indicates the fraction of the TEOM filter s total capacity that has been used You can check the filter loading percentage on the monitor s Main screen Figure 3 25 Because this value is determined by the pressure drop of the main sample flow line the instrument always shows a non zero value even if no filter is mounted in the mass transducer New filters generally exhibit filter loading percentages of 15 to 30 at a main flow rate of 3 l min and less at lower flow rates Filter loading percentage OK 4 11 NU Mass Conc gt 30 Min MC 01 Hr MC TEOM filters must be replaced before the filter loading percentage reaches 100 to ensure the validity of the data generated by the instrument Figure 3 26 At some point above 100 the main flow drops below its setpoint Status condition Filter loading percentage X 4 91 NU 09 39 Mass Conc gt 33 6 30 Min MC 26 8 01 Hr MC 12 5 Ifthe filter loading percentage is higher than 30 at a main flow rate of 3
205. e G 10 Revision B 001 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor G 1 4 REINSTALLING THE INLET Follow these steps to reassemble and reinstall the PM 10 inlet 1 Reassemble the top and bottom inlet assemblies until the threads tighten Hand tighten only 2 Place a light coating of silicone grease on the gasket inside the cap of the rain jar This will ensure a leak free fit Reinstall the rain jar 3 Place the inlet on the flow splitter Take care not to damage the internal O rings APPENDIX G INLET MAINTENANCE Pace G 11 Revision B 001 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor G 2 MAINTENANCE OF SHARP Cur CycLone SCC INLETS The sharp cut cyclone SCC is a second stage inlet and is available in PM 1 Figure G 15 and PM 2 5 Figure G 16 configurations In Series 1400a Monitor applica tions it is used in conjunction with a PM 10 or modified PM 10 inlet Figure G 17 Figure G 15 SCC PM 1 inlet I l 1 Figure G 16 SCC PM 2 5 inlet Emptying cup mes tube E rPRECHT amp parasite ELMO p MFG NO Chamber APPENDIX G INLET MAINTENANCE Pace G 12 Revision B 001 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure G 17 Modified PM 10 inlet installed onto a sharp cut cyclone SCC PM 2 5 inlet P m Modified PM 10 inlet SCC PM 2 5 inlet The exact maintenance
206. e adapter into the 25 pin port on your serial printer 7 Plug the other end of the 9 to 9 pin computer cable into the 9 to 25 pin computer cable adapter Go to step 8 NOTE Do not use the 9 to 25 pin modem cable to connect the control unit with the serial printer The 9 to 25 pin modem cable is configured for use only with a modem 8 Initiate the data capture software such as TEOMCOMM or RPComm on your personal computer PC SEcTION 9 DATA INPUT AND OUTPUT Pace 9 40 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 9 Ensure that the data capture software is set for the same commu nication parameters as the instrument The default settings of the monitor are Baud rate 9600 Data bits 8 Parity None Stop bits 1 10 Set the data capture software to the data capture or data down load mode 11 Press the lt RS232 gt key on the monitor s keypad to display the Set RS 232 Mode screen Figure 9 19 12 When in the Set RS 232 Mode screen press the lt EDIT gt key 13 Press the up 1 and down 1 arrow keys to select AK Protocol or German Prot German Ambient Network Protocol Section 9 4 1 14 Press the ENTER key 15 Press the 0 and 7 keys and then press the ENTER key to display the Com 2 Way Settings screen Figure 9 24 16 When in the Com 2 Way Settings screen enter the appropriate parameters for the AK Protocol or Germ
207. e exposed TEOM filter 14 Raise the mass transducer to the closed position using the black knob 15 Fasten the holding rod onto the latch plate 16 Push the silver handle up until the shipping latch snaps into place 17 Reinsert the air thermistor into the cap of the mass transducer assembly 18 Close and latch the door to the sensor unit Keep the door open for as short a time as possible to minimize the temperature change in the system 19 Turn on the control unit SECTION 12 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE AND VERIFICATION PROCEDURES Pace 12 8 Revision B 001 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 12 2 VERIFICATION PROCEDURES Verification Procedures Interval Batteries Pump Mass flow controller Software Hardware Analog I O Leak check Mass transducer Ambient air temperature Ambient pressure Flow audit Ambient temperature sensor Ambient pressure sensor SECTION 12 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE AND VERIFICATION PROCEDURES Test the batteries once every 6 months and ex change them as necessary Service Manual Test the pump once every 6months Service Manual Calibrate the mass flow controller s software once every 6 months Service Manual Calibrate the mass flow controller s hardware once a year Service Manual Perfom an analog input output calibration once ev ery 1 to 2 years Service Manual Perform a leak check once a year or as necessary
208. e in line filters 12 1 1 EXCHANGING THE LARGE IN LINE FILTERS The large in line filters 57 002758 are located on the main SENSOR FLOW and auxiliary BYPASS FLOW lines on the back of the control unit These filters prevent contamination from reaching the flow controllers You should replace the large in line filters immediately following a TEOM filter cartridge exchange This allows you to exchange the large in line filters during the 30 minute flow and temperature stabilization period Section 4 Tools Needed None Materials 2 large in line filters 57 002758 Follow these steps to exchange the large in line filters 1 Remove the existing large in line filters from their quick connect fittings 2 Install new large in line filters onto the quick connect fittings Figure 12 1 Ensure that the arrows on the filters point away from the control unit against the flow This will allow the user to see the contamination as it is collected in the filter SECTION 12 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE AND VERIFICATION PROCEDURES Pace 12 2 Revision B 001 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 12 1 2 CLEANING THE AIR INLET SYSTEM You must clean the heated air inlet in the Series 1400a Monitor once a year to remove the buildup of particulate matter on its inner walls You can order a tapered bristle brush 30 002227 that is appropriate for cleaning the air inlet system from R amp P Tools Needed Piece of
209. e pointer they should enter a specific number If the number that the user enters is greater than to the desired location the number of data records that are present between the current storage pointer before executing the location and the end ofthe data buffer the PC will download all data records from the Download Storage com current position of the storage pointer to the end of the storage buffer mand V Set the storage pointer After the user enters an A ora specific number the computer will request a filename which the TEOMCOMM software program will use to save the data Figure L 9 Figure L 9 TEOMCOMM Main screen with request for file name to store data displayed V3 TEOMCOMM auc iee E3 efe Al TEOMCOMM v1 41 Request the value of a register Modify the value of a register Set instrument mode Download storage Set storage pointer Fast Storage Out Exit program Enter filename to store data _ Fi Help F2 Comm Config F3 Set Station F4 Options APPENDIX L TEOMCOMM Sortware Pace L 14 Revision B 000 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor The user must enteran MS DOS compliant file name to save the data filename Figure L 10 An MS DOS compliant file name is an 8 character file name a period or dot V The location of the 4 7 and then a 3 character file extension such as txt For example site256 txt storage pointer may be would be an acceptable file
210. e sampling system components onto the flow splitter 1 Cut a 4 cm 1 1 2 diameter hole in the roof of your monitoring site If you will be installing your Series 1400a Monitor in an outdoor enclosure refer to Appendix K for further instructions 2 Place the ambient temperature sensor Figure 2 54 on the roof of your monitoring site near the 4 cm diameter hole Figure 2 54 Ambient temperature sensor cable with ambient temperature sensor and connector highlighted 3 Run the temperature sensor s cable through the 4 cm diameter hole and attach the cable s connector to the AMBIENT TEMP connection on the back of the control unit Figure 2 55 IMPORTANT Besure to connectthe ambient temperature sensor s cable to the connector on the back of the control unit SECTION 2 SYSTEM INSTALLATION Pace 2 36 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure 2 55 Back panel of TEOM control unit with the ambient temperature sensor connector A highlighted W 2 UNT LEM aml eo AES 4 Run the green bypass flow tubing that is connected to the BY PASS FLOW connector on the back of the control unit up through the 4 cm diameter hole in the roof 5 Remove the fastening nut from the bypass extension Figure 2 56 of the flow splitter Figure 2 56 Removing the fastening nut from the bypass extension SECTION 2 SYSTEM INSTALLATION Pace 2 37 Revision B 002 Operatin
211. e the current ambient temperature reading in the Amb Temp field Figure 12 17 SET TEMPS FLOWS T Case 50 00 50 00 T Air 50 00 50 01 T Cap 50 00 49 98 F Main F Aux T A S P A S Amb Temp Amb Pres FAdj Main FAdj Aux 3 Determine the current temperature C at the ambient tempera ture sensor using an external thermometer C 5 9 x F 32 SECTION 12 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE AND VERIFICATION PROCEDURES Pace 12 16 Revision B 001 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 4 Verify that the value of the Amb Temp field is within 2 C of the measured temperature If this is not the case perform the ambient temperature calibration procedure Service Manual SECTION 12 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE AND VERIFICATION PROCEDURES Pace 12 17 Revision B 001 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 12 2 3 VERIFYING THE AMBIENT PRESSURE Perform the ambient air temperature verification Section 12 2 2 pressure verifica tion Section 12 2 3 and leak check Section 3 before executing the flow verification procedure Section 12 2 4 Follow these steps to verify the ambient pressure 1 Press the 1 and 9 keys and then press the ENTER key to display the Set Temps Flows screen Figure 12 16 2 When in the Set Temps Flows screen locate the current ambient 3 4 pressure reading in the Amb Pres field Figure 12 17 Deter
212. e the flow splitter up or down until it is 15 5 cm 6 from the top of the flow splitter Figure K 8 If you have installed a flow adapter Section 2 onto the end of the sample tube inside the flow splitter then the top of the flow adapter must be 15 5 cm 6 from the top of the flow splitter Figure K 9 APPENDIX K COMPLETE OUTDOOR ENCLOSURE Pace K 10 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure K 8 Measuring the distance from the top of the flow adapter or sample tube to the top of the flow splitter Figure K 9 Flow splitter z with and without a flow Flow splitter without flow adapter Flow splitter with flow adapter adapter installed Flow adapter 15 5 cm 6 from top of flow splitter Sample tube 15 5 cm 6 from top of flow splitter mM tot It Il m Sample tube Flow adapter e installed on sample tube Sample tube re Bypass flow outlet 1 2 sample tube fastener nut Ta EY Sampletube To sensor unit APPENDIX K COMPLETE OUTDOOR ENCLOSURE Pace K 11 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 14 Tighten the 1 2 sample tube nut at the base of the flow splitter 15 Locate the quick connect fitting on the bottom of the sample tube of the flow splitter Figure K 10 Figure K 10 left Sample tube from flow splitter with the quick connect fitting and sam
213. e the main and bypass flow lines from their connections on the back panel of the control unit 4 Turn on the control unit and make sure that the pump is on 5 When in the Main screen Figure J 1 press the STEP SCREEN key to display the Menu screen Figure J 2 Figure J 1 Main screen OK 4 11 NU Mass Conc gt 30 Min MC 01 Hr MC Figure J 2 Menu screen LISTING OF SCREENS gt Set Temps Flows Set Hardware View ACCU System APPENDIX J ORIGINAL DESIGN Mass FLow CONTROLLERS Pace J 2 Revision B 000 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 6 When in the Menu screen press the up T and down 1 arrow keys to position the cursor on Set Temps Flows Then press the ENTER key The Set Temps Flows screen will now display Figure J 3 Also the user can press 1 9 and then the ENTER key on the monitor s display keypad to display the Set Temps Flows screen Figure J 3 Set Temps Flows screen SET TEMPS FLOWS T Case 50 00 50 00 T Air 50 00 50 01 T Cap 50 00 49 98 7 Whenin the Set Temps Flows screen press the up and down arrow keys to position the screen so that F Main main flow and F Aux auxiliary flow display on the screen Record the F Main and F Aux readings 8 Press the up and down arrow keys to position the screen so that T A S average standard temperature and P A S average standard pressure d
214. e the sample tube Section 2 4 4 SECTION 2 SYSTEM INSTALLATION Pace 2 42 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 2 4 4 SamPLe TuBE ASSEMBLY Figure 2 66 displays the sample tube assembly section Figure 2 66 Schematic diagram of a typical PM 10 installation with the sample tube assembly section highlighted eee Flow splitter Bypass flow tube Roof flange 1 ID caulk as appropriate Sample tube from flow splitter Quick connect fitting Sample tube extension Sample tube assembly section Rubber tube coupling Toa flow line t TEOM sensor unit PT ti SECTION 2 SYSTEM INSTALLATION Pace 2 43 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Follow these steps to connect the sample tube to the sensor unit 1 Locate a sample tube extension Section 2 2 NOTE Two l meter sample tube extensions are provided with the unit but additional lengths can be purchased from R amp P if needed 2 Locate the quick connect fitting on the bottom of the sample tube of the flow splitter Figure 2 67 Figure 2 67 left Sample tube from flow splitter with the quick connect fitting and sample tube extension highlighted Sample tube from flow splitter Figure 2 68 right Sample ah tube from flow splitter with sample tube extension l Quick connect inserted into the
215. ect or Modem The Direct Mode is used to connect the instrument directly to an on site computer The Modem Mode is used to connect the instrument to a remote computer using a modem This field contains the PC s communication COM port that the control unitis connected to Direct Mode or that the modem is connected to Modem Mode The range for this paramater is 1 2 3 or 4 This field contains the settings for the PC s communication COM port that the control unit is connected to Direct Mode or that the modem is connected to Modem Mode This field contains the phone number that the modem will dial to establish a connection with the off site computer This field contains the modem s initialization settings Pace L 23 Revision B 000 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor L 5 SENDING HEADER AND TRAILER CODES The TEOMCOMM Send String screen Figure L 15 allows the user to send a string of characters through the personal computer s PC s RS232 port The user may define and send both a header and trailer string when in this screen Press the lt F4 gt key on the PC s keyboard to display the TEOMCOMM Send String screen Figure L 15 TEOMCOMM Send String screen fysTEOMCOMM 1 u mE E em Al TEOMCOMM v1 41 Header 666 6661 6661 6661 6661 Fi Main F2 Save Changes F3 Send Header F4 Send Trailer APPENDIX L TEOMCOMM Sortware Pace L 24
216. ections on the screen as small icons Displays the instrument connections on the screen as a list Displays the instrument connections on the screen as a list with details such as instrument type and status Creates a new instrument connection Edits the settings of the instrument connection currently selected Deletes the instrument connection currently selected Establishes a connection to the selected instrument Disconnects the instrument connection Displays the Properties screen showing the connection properties for the selected instrument Displays the Schedule Download screen which allows the user to schedule automatic data downloads from the selected instrument 12 07 1338 10 00 2025 Site 1 Contains a list of the data downloads currently scheduled APPENDIX A OVERVIEW OF INSTRUMENT SCREENS Pace A 18 Revision B 001 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure A 45 Download Data screen a 1400ab Site 11400 Version 3 012 Instrument Serial 22416 Y v I NOoe x Downloaded 12 records 4 5 99 11 16 33 AM Down Load Data Registers Realtime Graph Key Pad 05 Apr 99 10 04 05 05 Apr 99 10 05 05 05 Apr 99 10 06 05 05 Apr 99 10 07 05 05 Apr 99 10 08 05 05 Apr 99 10 09 05 05 Apr 99 10 10 05 05 Apr 99 10 11 05 05 Apr 99 10 12 05 O5 4pr99 10 13 05 05 Apr 99 10 14 05 05 Apr 99 10 15 05 co CO OO CO CO cO CO CO co co co co APPENDIX A OVER
217. ector A auxiliary connector for ACCU System B 9 pin serial connector C and the 15 pin analog l O connector D highlighted WW SLM A LEM a li jJ SEcTION 9 DATA INPUT AND OUTPUT Pace 9 1 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure 9 2 Front view of the control unit with the 9 pin RS232 serial connector A and the 15 pin analog connector B highlighted v The value for the jumpers variable should be set to 10 VDC for most conditions Analog input channel 0 1s transmitted to the monitor through the ANALOG I O connector located on the front and back of the control unit Pin 7 1s designated as the signal line and pin 8 is designated as the ground line The jumper setting of analog input 4 on the L shaped analog input output board Figure 9 3 that is located inside the control unit determines whether this input is configured for 2 VDC 10 VDCor4 20mA The default setting for analog input channel 0 and for analog input channels 1 6 is 10 VDC SEcTION 9 DATA INPUT AND OUTPUT Pace 9 2 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure 9 3 Analog input output jumper settings Jumper Settings for Input Channels 1 1 2 2 3 3 For For 4 20 mA 10V Input Input Max E L EZI EZI EZI EZ Z EZI EZI EZI To 60 AMI Outputs 0 5
218. ector based aver aged value of the wind direction degrees The averaging time is determined by the interval param eter set on the Set Storage screen Section 6 This value only has meaning if an optional wind vane anemometer is attached to the monitor Section 2 The average input value for wind direction is as signed program register code PRC 149 Appendix B The program register codes PRC that are assigned for analog input channels 0 6 PRCs 114 120 wind speed PRC 147 wind velocity PRC 148 and wind direction PRC 149 can be stored in the monitor s internal data logger queried over the RS232 connector and used to direct the actions of the ACCU System Section 14 SEcTION 9 DATA INPUT AND OUTPUT Pace 9 9 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure 9 10 Define Analog Inputs A I screen Figure 9 11 Define Analog Inputs A I screen with additional lines displayed 9 1 2 DeFine ANALOG Inputs A I SCREEN The user can define the data conversion from analog voltages to engineering units when in the Define Analog Inputs A I screen Figure 9 10 DEFINE A I 1 A I FS gt 4 83 A I Type WndSpeed Const A 0 000 Youcan display the Define Analog Inputs screen on the four line display of the control unit in two different ways 1 When in the View Analog Inputs screen Section 9 1 1 press the lt STEP SCREEN gt key on the control unit s keypad
219. ed by the interval parameter set on the Set Storage screen Section 6 The average input value for analog input channel 5 is assigned program register code PRC 119 Appendix B This field contains the average analog input 6 engineering units value The averaging time is determined by the interval parameter set on the Set Storage screen Section 6 The average input value for analog input channel 6 is assigned program register code PRC 120 Appendix B This field contains the latest averaged value of the wind speed engineering units A 5 VDC output represents a 0 180 km h wind speed The averaging time is determined by the interval parameter set on the Set Storage screen Section 6 This value only has meaning if an optional wind vane anemometer is attached to the monitor Section 2 The average input value for wind speed is assigned program register code PRC 147 Appendix B This field contains the latest vector based average of the wind velocity engineering units The aver aging time is determined by the interval parameter set on the Set Storage screen Section 6 This value only has meaning if an optional wind vane an emometer is attached to the monitor Section 2 The average input value for wind velocity is as signed program register code PRC 148 Appendix B Pace 9 8 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Wind Dir This field contains the latests v
220. een Figure A 3 Main screen Figure A 4 Main screen with additional lines displayed Series 1400a Monitor Copyright 2001 Rupprecht Patashnick OK 4 Mass Conc gt 30 Min MC 01 Hr MC OK 4 Mass Conc gt 30 Min MC 01 Hr MC 08 Hr MC 24 Hr MC Tot Mass Case Temp Air Temp Cap Temp Main Flow Aux Flow 0 524 245 55603 Frequency APPENDIX A OVERVIEW OF INSTRUMENT SCREENS Revision B 001 Pace A 3 Revision B 001 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure A 5 Current Status Codes screen CURRENT STATUS CODES gt M Mass Transducer T Temperature F Flow Rates Figure A 6 Current Status Codes screen with addi CURRENT STATUS CODES tional lines displayed gt M Mass Transducer T Temperature Flow Rates F X Exchange Filter V Voltage Low Figure A 7 Menu screen LISTING OF SCREENS Set Temps Flows Set Hardware View ACCU System Figure A 8 Menu screen with additional lines LISTING OF SCREENS displayed gt Set Temps Flows Set Hardware View ACCU System View Analog Inputs Set Time Set Analog Outputs Set Contact Closure Set RS 232 Mode View Storage Set Passwords Analog Calibration KO Calibration FTS Calculation APPENDIX A OVERVIEW OF INSTRUMENT SCREENS Pace A 4 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure A 9 Set Time screen Figure A 10 Set Time screen with additional lines displayed
221. een i Save connection group 2 x 1 4004 Monitors OK Cancel Section 10 RPComm SOFTWARE Pace 10 11 Revision B 000 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 11 To connect to an instrument highlight the desired connection in the Connection List screen and then select the Connection icon This will display the RPComm Download Data screen Fig ure 10 10 NOTE If the connection is successful the instrument s serial number will be displayed at the top of the screen If the connection is not successful or if there 1s no instrument attached then the serial number area will be blank or will display 99999 Figure 10 10 RPComm Download Data screen 3 New Connection 1400 Version 3 012 Instrument Serial 00604 Vo S EaSXK Down Load Data Registers Real time Graph Key Pad Storage Data Down load Graph Storage Pointers SEcTION 10 RPComm SoFTWARE Pace 10 12 Revision B 000 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure 10 11 AK Protocol Setup screen 10 2 2 1 CHECKING CONNECTION SETTINGS Because different instruments require different RS232 port settings these values must sometimes be changed You may also want to confirm the settings before beginning to download data from the Series 1400a Monitor Follow these steps to check or change the RS232 port settings in RPComm 1 When in the Connecti
222. eft lt lt gt arrow key to decrease the channel by one To increase the channel by four press the lt SHIFT gt key and hold it down while pressing the right lt gt arrow key To decrease the channel by four press the lt SHIFT gt key and hold it down while pressing the left lt gt arrow key To display ACCU channel 8 press the lt CTRL gt key and hold it down while pressing the right lt gt arrow key To display ACCU channel 1 press the lt CTRL gt key and hold it down while pressing the left lt gt arrow key This field contains the time sec during which the ACCU channel has been exposed to the sample stream Pace 14 33 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Volume This field contains the total volume of air nv at standard temperature and pressure that has been drawn through the ACCU channel Curr Chan This field contains the number of the currently active ACCU channel Channel 0 is the designa tion for the internal bypass line which is active only when the sampling conditions for channels 1 to 8 are not met V A negative value for If the pressure drop across the installed filter cartridge causes the flow rate to fall volume indicates that the below 13 67 l min by 0 40 l min the system will stop using the channel If this ACCU sample flow dropped below acceptablediniis happens the unit will display a negative number in the Vo
223. eir corresponding colors 6 To display only one of the selected sets of data choose the de sired data set from the color key To display all selected sets of data again choose each data set from the color key while holding down the Shift key on your PC s keyboard 7 Refer to Figure 10 20 for a complete description of the control buttons on the Download Graph screen Section 10 RPComm SOFTWARE Pace 10 23 Revision B 000 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure 10 19 Download Graph screen i 1400ab Site 11400 Version 3 012 Instrument Serial 22416 x j wo lt gt gis 5 5 Downloaded 12 records 4 5 99 11 16 33 AM X Down Load Data Registers Real time Graph Key Pad Storage Pointers 22 Mass Conc j 1 Noise 1 84 ES 0 4 0 07 I I I I 04 05 99 09 57 04 05 9910 02 04 05 9910 08 04 05 9910 13 04 05 83 10 13 Section 10 RPComm SOFTWARE Pace 10 24 Revision B 000 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure 10 20 Control buttons on the Download Clears all data listed on the right hand side of the Download Graph Graph screen screen This includes the data being displayed Decreases the scale of the x and y axes concurrently With this icon selected press and hold the left mouse button and make a box around an area inside the graph that you want to zoom into Once the box is finished re
224. em hardware in the leak check Follow these steps to perform a leak check 1 Plug the pump Figure 3 17 into an appropriate power source to draw a sample stream through the system 2 Remove the TEOM filter from the mass transducer according to the instructions in Section 3 1 4 3 Press the POWER switch to turn on the control unit Figure 3 14 4 When in the Main screen Figure 3 30 press the up lt T gt and down 1 arrow keys to display the main flow and auxiliary flow values on the four line display Figure 3 31 OK 44 Main Flow Aux Flow 5 Locate the flow audit adapter Figure 3 32 which is contained in the flow audit adapter kit SECTION 3 SAMPLE PREPARATION PAGE 3 21 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure 3 32 Flow audit adapter with valve open 6 Ensure that the valve of the flow audit adapter is in its open posi tion Figure 3 32 7 Remove the sample inlet from the flow splitter Section 2 and replace it with the flow audit adapter Figure 3 33 Figure 3 33 Flow audit adapter installed on flow splitter with valve open SECTION 3 SAMPLE PREPARATION PAGE 3 22 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 8 Close the valve of the flow audit adapter Figure 3 34 Figure 3 34 Flow audit adapter installed on flow splitter with valve closed 9 When in the
225. en Figure 10 23 select the Registers tab to display the Registers screen Figure 10 24 Figure 10 23 Download Data screen i 1400ab Site 11400 Version 3 012 Instrument Serial 22416 Yo ES Xx amp quen T i Do is Registers Real time Graph Key Pad Storage Data Down load Graph Storage Pointers SEcTION 10 RPComm SoFTWARE Pace 10 31 Revision B 000 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure 10 24 Registers screen i 1400ab Site 11400 Yersion 3 012 Instrument Serial 22416 t O W x PRC Name Value a 1 Second 0 Minute 2 Minute 27 Hour 3 Hour 12 Day 4 Day 29 ae 5 Month 2 B Year 1999 idi Mass Rate 0 2 Tot Mass 8 Mass Conc 1 6 MR ME Ave 9 Tot Mass 34 53 TM Ave 10 MR MC Ave 300 Frequency 11 TM Ave 300 Noise 12 Frequency 256 81900 Op Mode 13 Noise 0 028 Cur LoPas 14 Op Mode 4 Cur HiPas 15 Cur LoPas 0 New LoPas 16 Cur HiPas 0 New HiPas 17 NewLoPas 0 Const A 18 New HiPas 0 Cons b 1 Const A 3 000 de e 20 Const B 1 030 Set CapT 21 Set CaseT 50 00 Set EnclT 22 Set AirT 50 00 illii Case Temp Section 10 RPComm SOFTWARE Pace 10 32 Revision B 000 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 2 On the right hand side of the Registers screen is a list of all the system registers Using the scroll bar examine the list of regis ters with the scrollbar and place a checkmark next the
226. en transmits the number of storage records shown i wee S in response bytes10 through 12 above Each record is followed by lt CR gt lt LF gt sep o af o APPENDIX C Two Way SERIAL COMMUNICATION Pace C 7 Revision B 000 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor AK Protocol Set Storage Marker Command SSTO COM 2 WAY SETTINGS 52 ASCII code for the 1 digit Station Number for example 4 052 The Station Number is always 1 digit in length RS Para 1 ASCII code representation of the 2 digit Channel Number for example KO 075 048 The Channel Number is Rowdies always 2 digits in length 75048 Optional Up to 3 ASCII codes can be added to response from the instrument In this case CR and lt LF gt ASCII Berea codes 013 and 010 are appended to the response Enter 0 if nothing is to be appended 13010 RS Para 4 Not used Transmission to Instrument eve eme omm qe seer e 9 PE CNN DESIRES C CNN Damme mer i ueterum Heme Set Storage Marker command Ka 4 digit Set Storage Marker command 2 digit Channel Number as defined B xe rr een Number of current status conditions ee cene me asc cone mo Up to 3 digits appended to the end of New location of the Storage Marker the response transmission according to B move to beginning of storage 15 cone the entry for RS Para 3 buffer E move to end of storage pai sm buff
227. ency to stabilize again 12 When the frequency stabilizes press the lt FIRST LAST gt key to record the frequency f The instrument will now automatically SECTION 12 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE AND VERIFICATION PROCEDURES Pace 12 14 Revision B 001 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor compute and display the audit value of the calibration constant K in the Audit KO field NOTE If you make any mistakes while performing any of these steps exit from the KO Confirmation screen and re enter it The unit will reset all values to zero when the user re enters the screen SECTION 12 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE AND VERIFICATION PROCEDURES Pace 12 15 Revision B 001 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure 12 16 Set Temps Flows screen Figure 12 17 Set Temps Flows screen with additional lines displayed 12 2 2 VERIFYING THE AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE Perform the ambient air temperature verification Section 12 2 2 pressure verifica tion Section 12 2 3 and leak check Section 3 before executing the flow verification procedure Section 12 2 4 Follow these steps to verify the ambient air temperature 1 Press the 1 and 9 keys and then press the ENTER key to display the Set Temps Flows screen Figure 12 16 SET TEMPS FLOWS T Case 50 00 50 00 T Air 50 00 50 01 T Cap 50 00 49 98 2 When in the Set Temps Flows screen locat
228. ent is in the Fast Store Out Mode due to the high rate at which the RS232 port is accessed This does not have any effect on the collection calculation or storage of data in the instrument Follow these steps to download data using the Fast Store Out Mode 1 Connect one end of the 9 to 9 pin computer cable to one of the RS232 ports on the control unit 2 Ensure that nothing is connected to the other RS232 port of the control unit 3 If your personal computer PC or other serial data recording device is equipped with a 9 pin RS232 connector go to step 4 If your PC or other serial data recording device is equipped with a 25 pin connector go to step 5 4 Plug the other end of the 9 to 9 pin computer cable into the 9 pin RS232 port of your PC or other serial data recording device Go to step 8 5 Locate the 9 to 25 pin computer cable adapter 6 Plug the 9 to 25 pin computer cable adapter into the 25 pin port on your PC or other serial data recording device 7 Plug the other end of the 9 to 9 pin computer cable into the 9 to 25 pin computer cable adapter Go to step 8 NOTE Do not use the 9 to 25 pin modem cable to connect the control unit with the PC or other serial data recording device The 9 to 25 pin modem cable is configured for use only with a modem SEcTION 9 DATA INPUT AND OUTPUT PAGE 9 33 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 8 If you want to set the stora
229. er Enter positive numbers such 13 lt CR gt as 250 to move forward by 250 as 1000 to move backwards by 1000 records Do not right fill lt ETX gt ASCII code 003 16 N Co APPENDIX C Two Way SERIAL COMMUNICATION Pace C 8 Revision B 000 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor AK Protocol Response if Command Addressed to Instrument is Unrecognizable COM 2 WAY SETTINGS RS Para 1 ASCII code for the 1 digit Station Number for example 4 052 The Station Number is always 1 digit in length ASCIl code representation of the 2 digit Channel Number for example KO 075 048 The Channel Number is always 2 digits in length RS Para 3 13010 Optional Up to 3 ASCII codes can be added to response from the instrument In this case CR and lt LF gt ASCII codes 013 and 010 are appended to the response Enter 0 if nothing is to be appended RS Para 4 0 Not used RS Para 2 75048 NLCNLCINENNE NN CENT tr NN NNNM M 3 1 O Question marks inserted in place of unrecognizable command Syntax error lt 4 ER RENE Up to 3 digits appended to the end of the entry for RS Para 3 e CUSRENEU NEL peo cgo S 25 Jmm o o y Eo ooo fet Ex quoe dpi APPENDIX C Two Way SERIAL COMMUNICATION Pace C 9 Revision B 000 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor C 2 GERMAN AMBIENT NETWORK PROTOCOL R amp P s implementation of the Ge
230. eration of the instrument Appendix C Two Way Serial Communication This appendix describes the two way RS232 Protocols used for the exchange of information between the Series 1400a Monitor and a computer or data logger Appendix D Installing New Software This appendix explains how to install new system software into the Series 1400a Monitor This appendix also explains how to obtain and load RPComm onto your personal computer Pace 1 5 Revision B 001 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION Appendix E Consumables and Parts This appendix lists the consumables and spare parts used in the Series 1400a Monitor Appendix F Filter Log This appendix contains a filter log to track all readings associated with each exposed filter Appendix G Inlet Maintenance This appendix contains maintenance procedures for the PM 10 inlet modified PM 10 inlet sharp cut cyclone SCC PM 1 and PM 2 5 inlets old style PM 1 and PM 2 5 cyclone inlets and the in line PM 2 5 ACCU inlet Appendix H Modem Communications This appendix describes how to connect the Series 1400a Monitor to a modem for offsite communications and how to set up a serial switching device for use with multiple instruments Appendix ASCH Codes This appendix contains a list of the principal ASCII codes that may be used for setting up the instrument s RS232 communications protocol Appendix J Original Design Mass
231. erifying the Ambient Pressure cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 9 5 3 3 Flow Audit Procedure ccccccccccccceccecececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 10 SECTION D SOFTWARE SETUP 41i T sese oedet o anon at outs pas 6 1 6 1 Modes of Operation ices uento petet eee treu tek 6 1 6 2 Seb Tii SCIBO6 T oeste ruere abi delete omega iuda Rad 6 4 6 3 Set Temps Flows Screen sse 6 6 6 3 1 Active Volumetric Flow Control essssssssse 6 11 6 3 2 Passive Volumetric Flow Control sssssss 6 13 6 3 3 Reporting to Actual Conditions sussss 6 15 6 3 4 Reporting to Standard Conditions 6 17 6 4 Set Hardware Screen sesssseeeeene 6 19 6 5 Set Storage SCIOelT a deep irs RAS ER RISE RAP AURA CRM a NER ER 6 23 6 6 Extended Function Key Commands ssssss 6 27 PAGE XI Revision B 003 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Table of Contents continued SECTION 7 STATUS CODES 2 1e co boe Necdetenctidl ice e eiae ges Dances decns 7 1 SECTION 8 VIEWING STORED DATA itte nr rea tua choi dn ect p a E Ee 8 1 8 1 View Storage Screen seesseseeeeeene 8 2 SECTIONS DATA INPUT AND OUTPUT i pede ocn nca Ag d eaR UHR ria NR 9 1 9 1 Analog WPS ice idu qe tete te quee tastiera petitus 9 1 9 1 1 View Analog Input
232. es 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 8 When in the TEOMPLUS VIEW screen TEOMPLUS ACCU screen or the TEOMPLUS INPUTS screen press the lt F2 gt key on your PC s keyboard This will display the Muxview Commands dialog box on the bottom of the screen Figure M 7 Figure M 7 TEOMPLUS VIEW screen with Muxview Commands dialog box Top Window Command Window TEOM Series 1400a Monitor Page 1 Ave Time 300 0 300 0 Mass Rate Mass Conc Total Mass ug h ug m 3 6 ug 14 3 79 4 974 5 30 Min Mass Conc O1 Hr Mass Conc O8 Hr Mass Conc 24 Hr Mass Conc Volts ja y E i ee Filt Load Case Temp Air Temp Cap Temp Enclosure Temp Main Flow l min Auxiliary Flow l min 2374 Amb Temp 9605 000 Amb Pres 18 60 0 04 0 22 0 06 0 14 9005 10259 49 00 1 006 Serial Number Cal Constant Mode Status Muxviewr w5 1 11 33 28 28 Dec 99 1 OK No Curr Conditions 0 037 187 05684 hz Wait Time Ave Temp Std Temp Ave Pres Std Pres Adj Main Flow Adj Aux Flow OK 4 38 Mass Conc gt NU 11 33 79 4 E F2 Muxview Commands area Fi Help lt Alt Fl gt Specific Help lt F10 gt View Window 9 Press the lt Q gt lt U gt lt I gt and lt T gt keys QUIT and then press the lt Enter gt key on your PC s keyboard The TEOMPLUS software program will now stop running APPENDIX M TEOMPLUS SorrwARE Pace M 10 Revision B 000 Operating Manual Series 1400a A
233. es 3 10 and 3 11 Do not touch the filter with your fingers while picking it up with the filter exchange tool Figure 3 9 TEOM filters SECTION 3 SAMPLE PREPARATION Pace 3 5 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure 3 10 left Close up of the filter exchange tool Figure 3 11 right Close up of the filter exchange tool holding a TEOM filter 9 Hold the filter exchange tool in line with the tapered element Figures 3 12 and 3 13 and lightly place the hub of the filter onto the tip of the tapered element Figure 3 12 Holding the filter exchange tool in line with the tapered element SECTION 3 SAMPLE PREPARATION Pace 3 6 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure 3 13 Filter installa tion 10 Gently press down on the filter to ensure that it is seated properly Figure 3 13 11 Remove the filter exchange tool by slowly retracting it sideways until it clears the filter Figure 3 13 Do not disturb the filter 12 Place the bottom of the filter exchange tool on top of the filter Figures 3 13 and apply downward pressure approximately 0 5 kg or 1 Ib to seat the filter firmly in place 13 Raise the mass transducer to the closed position using the black knob 14 Fasten the holding rod onto the latch plate 15 Push the silver handle up until the shipping latch snaps into plac
234. es must match those entered into the unit on its COM 2 Way Settings screen R amp P recommends that these be left at their default values 5 The description boxes for Delay Time Phone Number and Con nection Command are not used for a direct connection 6 Select the OK button when the proper settings have been con firmed The Connection Type screen will become the active screen on your PC s display 7 When in the Connection Type screen Figure 10 6 select the OK button to finish the connection setup New Connection will now be displayed in the Connection List screen This name can be edited by highlighting the words New Connection and then selecting the words again When the blinking cursor ap pears the user can use the PC s keyboard to enter the desired name for the new connection To save this new file name press the Enter key on your PC s keyboard SEcTION 10 RPComm SOFTWARE Pace 10 9 Operating Manual TEOM Series Revision B 000 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 8 The connection should now be ready for use However because different instruments require different RS232 port settings these values must sometimes be changed Refer to Section 10 2 2 1 for information on confirming or changing these settings If you want to define additional new connections go to step 9 If you do not want to define additional new connections go to step 11 9 Repeating steps 1 8 to define e
235. ess the EDIT key 14 Using the control unit s keypad enter the calibration constant value in the Cal Const line of the Set Hardware screen Press the ENTER key Go to step 15 15 When in the Set Hardware screen press the STEP SCREEN gt key This will display the Set Temps Flows screen Figure D 3 SET TEMPS FLOWS T Case 50 00 50 00 T Air 50 00 50 01 T Cap 50 00 49 98 16 When in the Set Temps Flows screen verify all operating param eters and press the EDIT key APPENDIX D INSTALLING NEw SvsrEM SOFTWARE Pace D 4 Revision B 003 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 17 Enter the appropriate temperature and pressure values for your sampling setup Section 6 using the control unit s keypad Press the lt ENTER gt key 18 Press the lt MAIN STATUS gt key to display the Main screen 19 Verify and change if necessary any other optional system pa rameters for your sampling setup such as the time Section 6 analog output settings Section 9 contact closure settings Section 9 analog input conversions Section 9 and RS232 settings Section 9 20 Press the lt F1 gt or lt RUN gt key to enter Operating Mode 1 and begin data collection APPENDIX D INSTALLING NEw SvsrEM SOFTWARE Pace D 5 Revision B 003 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor D 2 INSTALLINGRPComm D 2 1 UNINSTALLING Previous VERSIONS or RPC
236. ews that secure the electric and air connector assembly in place 6 You must now assemble the flow splitter Section 2 4 1 SECTION 2 SYSTEM INSTALLATION Pace 2 25 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure 2 37 Flow splitter 2 4 INSTALLING THE SAMPLING SYSTEM There are two possible sampling system configurations rooftop assembly and outdoor enclosure assembly Refer to Appendix K to install your Series 1400a Monitor in an outdoor enclosure To install the sampling system ona roof top you must set up the flow splitter assembly Section 2 4 1 tripod assembly Section 2 4 2 sampling system assembly Section 2 4 3 and sample tube assembly Section 2 4 4 and then choose an appropriate inlet Section 2 4 5 2 4 1 FLow SPLITTER ASSEMBLY An isokinetic flow splitter Figures 2 37 and 2 38 is used in combination with a second automatic flow controller to divide the sample flow into two components after the air stream passes through the size selective inlet The two sample flow components are the main flow 3 l min that flows to the TEOM mass transducer and the auxiliary or bypass flow 13 67 l min that is maintained by the second flow controller The flow splitter should be located directly below the sample inlet Figure 2 1 Optional flow adapters allow system operation at a 1 or 2 l min main flow rate In areas with elevated particulate matter concentration Units e
237. fer to the very last data record stored press the lt SHIFT gt key and hold it down while pressing the FIRST LAST gt key To view data after they have been downloaded from the monitor refer to Section 9 SECTION 8 VIEWING STORED DATA Pace 8 5 Revision B 003 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor This page left intentionally blank SECTION 8 VIEWING STORED DATA Pace 8 6 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Section 9 Data Input and Output This section describes how to use the 3 user definable analog outputs 2 user definable contact closure circuits and 7 analog inputs This section also explains how to download data through the RS232 port to a serial printer personal computer PC and other data capture devices such as a data logger 9 1 ANALOG INPUTS The standard configuration of the Series 1400a Monitor contains six inputs on the external analog connector EXT ANALOG located on the back of the control unit Figure 9 1 and one analog input on the two identical 15 pin analog I O ANALOG I O connectors located on the front and back of the control unit Figures 9 1 and 9 2 These inputs can be configured as 2 VDC 10 VDC full scale 100 to 100 or 4 20 mA The specification for all analog inputs is an input impedance of 24 K ohms Figure 9 1 Back view of the control unit with the 15 pin external analog input conn
238. fica tion Section 5 3 2 and leak check Section 3 before executing the flow verification procedure Section 5 3 3 5 3 1 VERIFYING THE AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE Follow these steps to verify the ambient air temperature 1 Press the lt 1 gt and 9 keys and then press the ENTER key to display the Set Temps Flows screen Figure 5 10 2 When in the Set Temps Flows screen locate the current ambient temperature reading Section 6 3 Determine the current temperature C at the ambient tempera ture sensor using an external thermometer C 5 9 x F 32 4 Verify that the value of the Amb Temp field is within 2 C of the measured temperature If this is not the case perform the ambient temperature calibration procedure Service Manual SET TEMPS FLOWS T Case gt 50 00 50 T Air 50 00 50 T Cap 50 00 49 F Main F Aux T A S P A S Amb Temp Amb Pres FAdj Main FAdj Aux SEcTION 5 Basic OPERATION Pace 5 8 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 5 3 2 VERIFYING THE AMBIENT PRESSURE Follow these steps to verify the ambient pressure 1 Press the 1 and 9 keys and then press the ENTER key to display the Set Temps Flows screen Figure 5 10 2 When in the Set Temps Flows screen locate the current ambient 3 4 SEcTION 5 Basic OPERATION pressure reading Section 6 Determine the current ambient pressure in mm Hg
239. from the list NOTE The Station Setup portion of the screen should have been set when you established your direct connection Section 10 Do not modify these settings 18 Select the Comm Setup gt button The Properties screen Figure H 5 will display 19 When in the Properties screen select the Configure button The Modem Properties screen will now display with the modem type displayed in the blue bar at the top of the screen Figure H 6 Generally the values that your system chooses for variables on this screen are appropriate for a proper connection However if your unit and modem experience communication difficulties these settings may need to be altered Setting the Maximum speed variable to the baud rate of the Series 1400a Monitor generally solves any communications problems Contact your modem s manufacturer for more information if necessary 20 Select the OK button to exit the Modem Properties screen The Properties screen Figure H 5 will now appear as the active screen on your computer 21 Select the OK button to exit the Properties screen The AK Protocol Setup screen Figure H 4 will now appear as the active screen on your computer 22 When in the AK Protocol Setup screen enter the phone number to be called in the Phone Number box at the bottom of the screen Enter the phone number as you would write it i e XXX XXX XXXX APPENDIX H MopEM COMMUNICATIONS Pace H
240. ft mouse button Move the mouse to display the desired section of the graph Selecting this icon will undo the last zoom or panning step Rescales the x and y axes so that all the graphs for the selected data are displayed Toggles between the two possible x axis scales date and time and time only This does not affect the way the data are displayed on the graph These two boxes define the number of axis divisions on the graph The left hand box refers to the x axis and the right hand box refers to the y axis The number of divi sions on the axis can be set to 5 10 15 or 20 Increasing the number of divisions results in a finer axis grid Decreasing the number of divisions results in a courser axis grid This does not affect the way the data are displayed on the graph APPENDIX A OVERVIEW OF INSTRUMENT SCREENS Pace A 27 Revision B 001 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure A 55 Virtual keypad 3 1400ab Site 117400 Yersion 3 012 Instrument Serial 22416 k a MAIN STEP STATUS SCREEN DATA 5 APPENDIX A OVERVIEW OF INSTRUMENT SCREENS Pace A 28 Revision B 001 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor A 3 TEOMCOMM Sortware SCREENS This appendix contains all of the software screens displayed by the TEOMCOMM software program Figure A 56 Main screen Ma TEOMCOMM Auto aa ejs al TEOMCOMM v1 41 Request the value of
241. g Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 6 Remove the rubber ring from the bypass extension fastening nut Figure 2 57 Figure 2 57 Bypass extension fastening nut and rubber ring 7 Install the bypass extension fastening nut onto the end of the green bypass tubing Figure 2 58 Ensure that the knurled or bumpy side of the bypass extension fastening nut is directed down the green bypass tubing toward the control unit Figure 2 58 Installing the bypass extension and rubber ring onto the green bypass tubing 8 Install the rubber ring onto the end of the green bypass tubing Figure 2 58 Ensure that the rubber ring is approximately 1 4 inch from the end of the green bypass tubing 9 Insert the green bypass tubing into the bypass extension Figure 2 59 SECTION 2 SYSTEM INSTALLATION Pace 2 38 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure 2 59 Installing the green bypass tubing onto the bypass extension 10 Tighten the bypass extension fastening nut onto the bypass extension Figure 2 60 NOTE If you are using an ACCU System with the monitor refer to Section 14 Figure 2 60 Tightening the fastening nut onto the bypass extension 11 Locate the ambient temperature sensor mount Figure 2 61 SECTION 2 SYSTEM INSTALLATION PAGE 2 39 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monito
242. g routine is applied to these TM values to compute a new smoothed total mass value every 2 seconds SmoothTM TMAlpha x TM 1 TMAlpha x SmoothTM 7 Pace 1 16 Revision B 001 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION At the same time that the instrument computes these SmoothTM values it also calculates the incremental change in sample mass between successive smoothed readings according to the following formula Delta Mass SmoothTM SmoothTM 8 These incremental mass changes are smoothed according to the following formula where MR stands for mass rate SmoothMR MR_MCAIpha x Delta Mass 1 MR MCAlpha x SmoothMR 9 These smoothed mass rate readings are converted to mass concentration data using the following formula SmoothMR SmoothMC x 10 10 Flow Rate where Flow Rate 3 0l min volumetric flow rate set point converted to EPA standard temperature and pressure Once the SmoothTM values have been computed for 150 seconds TM Ave 2 the instrument enters Operating Mode 3 At this point the smoothed total mass data SmoothTM are shown on the monitor s four line display and are transmitted to the monitor s analog and RS232 connectors Prior to this time the total mass indicated by the instrument is equal to 0 After the SmoothMC values have been calculated for 300 seconds TM Ave 2 MR MC Ave 2 the moni
243. g shelf 4 1410 32 screws 4 10 star lock washer Follow these steps to mount the sliding shelf 1 Unpack the shelf and place it on a flat surface Note that the shelf is mounted upside down so that the front and rear lip of each shelf points upward 2 Completely extend one of the shelf slides 3 Locate the black lever at the end of the shelf slide near the shelf Pull the lever and pull the shelf slide off the shelf 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 for the other shelf slide 5 Examine the mounting rails in the outdoor enclosure Remove the existing mounting shelf if necessary 6 Place the left shelf slide in the correct position on the mounting rails 7 Secure the back of the slide using a 10 32 screw and lock washer The slide mounting hole used in the back is centered on the slide and lies in the middle of a U shaped slot The position of the slide can be adjusted to get access to the mounting hole 8 Secure the front of the shelf slide to the mounting rail using a 10 32 screw and lock washer The slide mounting hole used in the front is slotted The position of the slide can be adjusted to gain access to the mounting hole 9 Repeat steps 6 7 and 8 to install the other shelf slide 10 Align the shelf on the shelf slides and push it into the enclosure The shelf will snap into place Ensure that the shelf is mounted upside down so that the front and rear lip of each shelf points upward APPENDIX K COMPLETE OUTDOOR
244. ge pointer to the first data record to be downloaded go to step 9 If you do not want to move the storage pointer go to step 12 9 Press the lt STORE gt key on your monitor s keypad to display the View Storage screen Figure 9 26 Figure 9 26 View Storage screen VIEW STORAGE 2056 16 20 03 15 Jan 01 gt Mass Conc 74 9 30 Min MC 72 3 10 Press the right lt gt and left lt gt arrow keys to move the storage pointer to the data record where you want the data down load to begin Section 8 11 Press the lt CTRL gt key and hold it down then press the lt LAST FIRST gt key This will move the storage pointer to the data record just before your beginning data record 12 Initiate the data capture software such as TEOMCOMM or RPComm on your PC or other serial data recording device such as a data logger 13 Ensure that the data capture software is set for the same commu nication parameters as the instrument The default settings of the monitor are Baud rate 9600 Data bits 8 Parity None Stop bits 1 14 Set the data capture software to the data capture or data down load mode 15 Press the lt RS232 gt key on the monitor s keypad to display the Set RS 232 Mode screen Figure 9 19 16 When in the Set RS 232 Mode screen press the lt EDIT gt key 17 Press the up lt T gt and down 1 arrow keys to select Fast Store Out SEcTION 9 DATA INPUT AND OUTPUT
245. ghted field Enter a new value in the highlighted field and then press the lt Enter gt key on your PC s keyboard APPENDIX M TEOMPLUS SorrwARE Pace M 11 Revision B 000 Operating Manual Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor M 5 TEOMPLUS ACCU Screen The TEOMPLUS ACCU screen Figure M 5 displays the cumulative time and volume for each channel of the ACCU system Also this screen displays the program register codes PRCs Appendix B of the four conditional variables selected for each ACCU channel You can not change or edit any values on this screen Refer to Section 14 for further information about the ACCU system M 6 TEOMPLUS INPUTS Screen The TEOMPLUS INPUTS screen Figure M 6 displays an overview of the analog inputs 0 to 8 received by the instrument The input values are displayed as a percentage of each analog input channel s full scale You can not change or edit any values on this screen Refer to Section 9 further information about the monitor s analog input capabilities APPENDIX M TEOMPLUS SorrwARE Pace M 12 Revision B 000 Operating Manual Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor M 7 Basic TEOMPLUS Commanps The TEOMPLUS software program has two basic operational modes Edit Mode and Command Mode The Edit Mode allows the user to change the values of any highlighted fields Press the up lt T gt down lt gt left lt gt and right lt gt arrow keys to select a highlig
246. gin a sampling sequence that starts with channel 1 and ends with channel 8 The user assigns the length of time that each channel is active To set up the ACCU System for triggered sampling by time the user must enter PRC 100 Time as the first variable of each flow channel definition Set the minimum permissible value field to 0 Then set the maximum permissible value field to the length of time seconds that you want the flow channel to be active You must enter the conditions to be tested in ACCU channel 1 to trigger the beginning of sampling No additional conditions besides PRC 100 Time should be entered into the remaining flow channels ACCU channels 2 8 For example to set the ACCU System to begin sampling on channel 1 when the 30 minute mass concentration average exceeds 100 ug m with a sampling period of 60 minutes 3600 sec on all flow channels you would display ACCU channel 1 and set the first PRC variable field to PRC 100 Time with a minimum permissible value of 0 and a maximum permissible value of 3600 Then you would set the second PRC variable field of ACCU channel 1 to PRC 57 30 Min MC with a minimum permissible value of 100 00 and a maximum permissible value of 9999 00 Figure 14 25 SET ACCU SYSTEM 1 1 gt Time 0 3600 2 30 Min MC 100 00 9999 00 Section 14 ACCU System Pace 14 29 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate
247. gt or lt RUN gt key to restart data collection SECTION 6 SOFTWARE SETUP Pace 6 16 Revision B 003 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 6 3 4 REPORTING TO STANDARD CONDITIONS The unit uses the parameters in the Set Temps Flows screen to determine how to report the measured mass concentration levels If the user chooses to set the unit to report the mass concentration levels to standard conditions they must set the standard tempera tures and pressures to the appropriate standard regulatory values when in the Set Temps Flows screen Figure 6 6 This will cause the monitor to use the standard temperature and pressure values in its flow rate calculations NOTE If the user wants to use the instrument for U S EPA equivalent PM 10 measurements they must ensure that the standard temperature is set to 25 C and the standard pressure is set to 1 atm Section 6 3 3 regardless of the values that they entered for the average temperature and average pressure settings IMPORTANT If your standard regulatory settings are different from the U S EPA equivalent PM 10 measure ments be sure to set the standard temperature and pressure settings as required Follow these steps to use the standard temperature and pressure values in flow rate calculations 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 SECTION 6 SOFTWARE SETUP Press the lt DATA STOP gt key When in the Main screen Figure 6 1 press the
248. hat the four spacers are in their proper positions 6 Secure the pump assembly to the bottom of the enclosure with the 10 32 hex head screws 10 lock washers and 10 fender washers Figure K 2 7 Place the power cord and vacuum tubing into the appropriate holes in the black rubber cork and close the cork around them Figure K 3 Push the black cork into the access hole located between the pump compartment and the enclosure NOTE The access hole must be tightly sealed to allow the air conditioner to work properly APPENDIX K COMPLETE OUTDOOR ENCLOSURE Pace K 4 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure K 3 Black cork installation Vacuum Pump Power Cord N Black Cork Vacuum Hose APPENDIX K COMPLETE OUTDOOR ENCLOSURE Pace K 5 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor K 3 INSTALLING THE SEAL PLATE Follow these steps to install the seal plate 1 Install the sensor unit inside the enclosure Section K 1 2 Insert the seal plate assembly Figure K 4 into the mounting hole located on the top of the enclosure Figure K 4 Seal plate 3 Place the sealing washers on the 1 4 20 truss head screws Figure K 5 APPENDIX K COMPLETE OUTDOOR ENCLOSURE Pace K 6 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure K 5 Seal plate installation standard inst
249. he Warranty Period Seller agrees during the Warranty Period to repair or replace at Seller s option defective Products so as to cause the same to operate in substantial conformance with said published specifications provided that a Buyer shall promptly notify Sellerin writing upon the discovery ofany defect which notice shall include the product model and serial number if applicable and details of the warranty claim b after Seller s review Seller will provide Buyer with service data and or a Return Material Authorization RMA which may include biohazard decontamination procedures and other product specific handling instructions and c then if applicable Buyer may return the defective Products to Seller with all costs prepaid by Buyer Replacement parts may be new or refurbished at the election of Seller All replaced parts shall become the property of Seller Shipment to Buyer of repaired or replacement Products shall be made in accordance with the Delivery provisions of the Seller s Terms and Conditions of Sale Consumables including but not limited to lamps fuses batteries bulbs and other such expendable items are expressly excluded from the warranty under this warranty Notwithstanding the foregoing Products supplied by Seller that are obtained by Seller from an original manufacturer or third party supplier are not warranted by Seller but Seller agrees to assign to Buyer any warranty rights in such Product that Seller m
250. he distance from the top of the flow adapter or sample tube to the top of the flow splitter eh 9 Tighten the 1 2 sample tube nut Ensure that the top of the flow adapter remains 15 5 cm 6 from the top of the flow splitter Figure 2 43 You have now completed this procedure 10 Ensure that the top of the sample tube inside of the flow splitter is 15 5 cm 6 from the top of the flow splitter Figure 2 43 If the top of the sample tube is 15 5 cm 6 from the top of the flow splitter you have completed this procedure If the top of the sample tube is not 15 5 cm 6 from the top of the flow splitter go to step 11 11 Loosen the 1 2 sample tube nut at the base of the flow splitter Figure 2 39 12 Slide the sample tube that is located inside the flow splitter up or down until it is 15 5 cm 6 from the top of the flow splitter Figure 2 43 13 Tighten the 1 2 sample tube nut at the base of the flow splitter You have now completed this procedure 14 You must now assemble the tripod Section 2 4 2 SECTION 2 SYSTEM INSTALLATION Pace 2 30 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 2 4 2 TRIPoD ASSEMBLY Follow these steps to install the tripod assembly onto the roof 1 Locate a tripod foot Figure 2 44 Figure 2 44 Tripod foot with rubber leg holder Rubber leg highlighted 2 Pull off the rubber leg holder if one is attached Figure 2 45
251. he y axis The number of divisions on the axis can be set to 5 10 15 or 20 Increasing the number of divisions results in a finer axis grid Decreasing the number of divisions results in a courser axis grid This does not affect the way the data are displayed on the graph Section 10 RPComm SOFTWARE Pace 10 25 Revision B 000 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 10 2 4 3 STORING DATA TO A FILE Follow these steps to save data to a file 1 When in the Download Data screen Figure 10 16 ensure that the the Storage Data tab is selected 2 Select the Save icon The Save Dialog box will appear and prompt you for a filename The default file name format is nnnnnxyy txt where nnnnnn the unit s serial number x data type s storage data yy file number 01 02 etc 3 Once you have chosen a filename select the Save button 4 The file will be saved in a comma delimited ASCII format which can be imported into any spreadsheet program The data include all column heading information SEcTION 10 RPComm SOFTWARE Pace 10 26 Revision B 000 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 10 2 5 ScuHeputinc Data DowNLoAps RPComm s automatic download capability allows the user to schedule automatic data downloads from a unit up to four times a day NOTE The Windows operating system screens shown in this section are from the Windows 98 operating
252. he German Ambient Network Protocol This variable must be set to use either the AK Protocol or the German Ambient Network Pro tocol to transmit data to and from the Series 1400a monitor This field contains an ASCII code The definition of this parameter depends on whether the user selects the AK Protocol or the German Ambient Network Protocol This variable must be set to use the Ger man Ambient Network Protocol to transmit data to and from the Series 1400a monitor This field contains an ASCII code The definition of this parameter depends on whether the user selects the AK Protocol or the German Ambient Network Protocol PAGE 9 32 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 9 4 4 Down toapinc Data One Way COMMUNICATION The user can download data directly from the unit to a serial printer personal computer PC or other serial data recording device The instructions in this section explain a one way data tranmission which is transmitting data only from the unit to another data capture device 9 4 4 1 Fast Store Out Mope The user can set up the monitor to download data records using the Fast Store Out Mode before they have been recorded while they are being recorded or after they have been recorded Data transmitted through the Fast Store Out mode are delimited by commas for simplified use in spreadsheet programs Keypad response to user inputs is diminished when the instrum
253. he High Password sssssesses 11 5 Section 12 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE AND VERIFICATION PROCEDURES 12 1 12 1 Routine Maintenance Procedures eseeeesees 12 1 12 1 4 Exchanging the Large In Line Filters 12 2 12 1 2 Cleaning the Air Inlet System ssssessesss 12 3 12 2 Verification Procedures eeeseseeeeeeee 12 9 12 2 1 Mass Transducer Calibration Verification 12 11 12 2 1 1 KO Confirmation Screen sssssssesss 12 12 12 2 2 Verifying the Ambient Air Temperature 12 16 12 2 3 Verifying the Ambient Pressure sess 12 18 12 2 4 Flow Audit Procedure eeeeseeesssss 12 19 SECTION 13 RESETTING THE MONITOR sccceseseceeecsssceeesseeeeeescsaeeesessateeessaees 13 1 19 1 Stop All Command ir oe rt OR ede 13 1 13 2 Re initializing the Instrument sseeeeeeeeese 13 2 13 3 System Operation after a Power Failure 13 3 SECTION 14 ACCU SYSTEM Loose eterna vt ver ga e vade pras rue EE ad eor va 14 1 14 1 Principle of OpOtFatlOrs ied epo eene ertet at eie taire eb ons 14 4 14 2 ACCU System Installation seseeeeeeeeeee 14 6 14 2 1 ACCU System Compilation Package 14 6 14 2 9
254. he base of the flow splitter Figure 2 39 SECTION 2 SYSTEM INSTALLATION Pace 2 27 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure 2 39 Close up view of bottom of flow splitter Flow splitter Bypass extension 1 2 sample tube nut Sample tube 4 Slide the sample tube that is located inside the flow splitter up until it protrudes above the top of the flow splitter Figure 2 40 Figure 2 40 Sample tube positioned above the top of the flow splitter 5 Locate the appropriate size flow adapter 1 or 2 l min Figure 2 41 SECTION 2 SYSTEM INSTALLATION Pace 2 28 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure 2 41 1 l min A and 2 l min B flow adapters 6 Install the flow adapter onto the protruding end of the sample tube Figure 2 42 Figure 2 42 1 l min flow adapter installed on the sample tube 7 Push the flow adapter firmly onto the sample tube until it hits a stop Ensure that you push it past the O ring that is located inside of the flow adapter 8 Slide the sample tube down into the flow splitter so that the top of the installed flow adapter is 15 5 cm 6 from the top of the flow splitter Figure 2 43 SECTION 2 SYSTEM INSTALLATION PAGE 2 29 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure 2 43 Measuring t
255. he instrument The mass flow controllers use the actual active volumetric flow control setting or average passive volumetric flow control setting temperature and pressure values to regulate the volumetric flow through the system The active volumetric flow control setting directs the unit to use the actual ambient temperature and pressure to regulate the volumetric flow through the system The passive volumentric flow control setting directs the unit to use the average temperature and pressure values to regulate the volumetric flow through the system If the user wants the unit to use the actual temperature and pressure to control the volumetric flow they should set the average temperature to 99 and the average pressure to 9 when in the Set Temps Flows screen Figure 6 6 NOTE If the user wants to use the instrument for U S EPA equivalent PM 10 measurements they must ensure that the standard temperature is set to 25 C and the standard pressure is set to 1 atm Section 6 3 4 regardless of the values that they entered for the average temperature and average pressure settings If the user chooses to use the actual temperature and pressure to control the volumetric flow they must install the ambient temperature sensor Section 2 The instrument s mass flow controllers measure flow on a mass basis All of the size selective inlets Section 2 including the PM 10 inlet operate on a constant volumetric flow basis To measure
256. he sensor unit Figures 3 2 and 3 3 Locate the silver handle on the front of the mass transducer Figure 3 4 Note that there is a shipping latch in the middle of this handle Grasp the silver handle and move the shipping latch upward with your thumb Figure 3 5 Pull down on the silver handle Figure 3 6 Pull the holding rod off of the latch plate Figure 3 7 With the mass transducer unlatched hold the black knob Figure 3 4 and swing the bottom of the mass transducer downward exposing the filter Figure 3 8 When the mass transducer is in the open position the tapered element TE will automatically stop oscillating 10 Carefully insert the lower fork of the filter exchange tool Figures 3 22 and 3 23 under the filter so that the filter disk is between the fork and the upper tab of the filter exchange tool Figures 3 23 and 3 24 The tines of the fork should straddle the hub of the filter base NOTE TEOM filters must be preconditioned to avoid excessive moisture buildup prior to their use in the system Section 3 1 3 SECTION 3 SAMPLE PREPARATION Pace 3 15 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure 3 22 Removing a TEOM filter Figure 3 23 Filter removal Figure 3 24 Close up of the filter exchange tool with the upper tab A and the fork B highlighted 11 Gently pull straight up lifting the filter from the tapered element TE Figur
257. he use of a modem and phone line Appendix H Before modem communication is attempted direct communication must be successfully completed This will ensure that the PC and unit have been set up properly for communications APPENDIX L TEOMCOMM SorrwARE Pace L 1 Revision B 000 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor L 1 INSTALLING TEOMCOMM onto A Personar ComPuTER PC Follow these steps to install TEOMCOMM onto a PC 1 Ensure that your PC is in MS DOS mode 2 When the MS DOS prompt displays enter the following command after the prompt MD CATEOMCOMM 3 Press the Enter key on your PC s keyboard 4 Insert the TEOMCOMM 3 1 2 floppy disk into a 3 1 2 disk drive in the computer 5 Enter the following command after the MS DOS prompt COPY X TEOMCOMM CATEOMCOMM NOTE The X represents the letter of your PC s 3 1 2 disk drive 6 Press the Enter key on your PC s keyboard The PC will now copy the files named TEOMCOMM EXE and TEOMCOMM CFG onto its hard drive APPENDIX L TEOMCOMM SorrwARE Pace L 2 Revision B 000 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor L 2 TEOMCOMM Setup Before you connect your monitor to your personal computer PC you must start the TEOMCOMM software program Section L 2 1 and set TEOMCOMM s commu nication parameters Section L 2 2 L 2 1 Starting TEOMCOMM Follow these steps to begin running the TEOMCOMM
258. he variable being CURRENT STATUS CONDITION Bytes 23 24 transmitted zero filled from the left These bytes are not defined in the The 2 digit hexadecimal representation of the current status German Protocol but are included for condition is computed by summing the numeric values for all informational purposes current status conditions Bytes 23 and 24 are both equal to O if if no current status condition exists CNET NEM f These bytes are not defined in the OK No current status conditions 34 space space German Protocol and are reserved for future definition Temperatures Exchange Filter Voltage Low ASCII code 003 CRCs are replaced by a single CR if NINE NN RN Up to 3 digits appended to the end of the response transmission according to the entry for RS Para 4 per The CRC information in bytes 38 and 39 is the hexadecimal NOTE ABOUT MULTIPLE PRC CODES representation of the exclusive or of all response bytes The high byte of the CRC is transmitted as byte 38 and the low byte if more than one Program Register Code is specified in RS Para 3 byte 5 is sent as byte 39 of the response transmission is either 2 or 3 and bytes 7 to 36 are repeated for each Program Register Code DEFINITION OF CRC BYTES APPENDIX C Two Way SERIAL COMMUNICATION Pace C 12 Revision B 003 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Appendix D Installing New Software The TEOM 1400a
259. hen in the Main screen Figure 5 1 press the lt TIME DATE gt key on the monitor s keypad Figure 5 2 to display the Set Time screen Figure 5 3 Figure 5 1 Main screen OK 4 Mass Conc gt 30 Min MC 01 Hr MC SEcTION 5 Basic OPERATION Pace 5 1 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure 5 2 Control unit keypad Figure 5 3 Set Time screen SET TIME 16 20 03 15 Jan 01 Second gt 0 Minute 20 5 When in the Set Time screen enter the current time and date in the appropriate fields Section 6 and press the ENTER key Press the lt ESC gt key to display the Main screen 6 When in the Main screen press the STEP SCREEN key on the monitor s keypad to display the Menu screen Figure 5 4 SEcTION 5 Basic OPERATION Pace 5 2 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure 5 4 Menu screen LISTING OF SCREENS gt Set Temps Flows Set Hardware View ACCU System 7 When in the Menu screen ensure that the cursor is on Set Temps Flows and press the ENTER key The Set Temps Flows screen Figure 5 5 will now display Figure 5 5 Set Temps Flows screen SET TEMPS FLOWS T Case gt 50 00 50 00 T Air 50 00 50 01 T Cap 50 00 49 98 8 When in the Set Temps Flows screen determine how you want the monitor to report the mass concentration values actual seasonal or sta
260. his field contains the 24 hour mass concentration average ug m This is a sliding average that is updated every 60 minutes on the hour This value cannot be changed by the user This field contains the amount of mass that has accumulated on the TEOM filter since the last instrument reset which is done by turning on the instrument or pressing the lt F1 gt or lt RUN gt key This value cannot be changed by the user This field contains the temperature of the TEOM mass transducer case set point 50 C 0 1 C This value cannot be changed by the user This field contains the temperature of the sample stream at the base of the heated air inlet set point 50 C 0 5 C This value cannot be changed by the user This field contains the temperature of the upper part of the TEOM mass transducer set point 50 C 0 1 C This value cannot be changed by the user Pace 4 8 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor SECTION 4 SOFTWARE OVERVIEW Main Flow Aux Flow Noise Frequency This field contains the actual volumetric flow rate measured by the main flow controller set point 3 1 min This value cannot be changed by the user This field contains the actual volumetric flow rate measured by the auxiliary flow controller set point 13 67 l min This value cannot be changed by the user This field contains the mass transducer s perfor mance This value s
261. hould be less than 0 10 after the system has been in Operating Mode 4 for at least 30 minutes This value cannot be changed by the user This field contains the oscillating frequency of the tapered element TE in the mass transducer This value varies from one Series 1400a Monitor to another but generally ranges between 150 and 400 Hz This value cannot be changed by the user Pace 4 9 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 4 3 NAVIGATING AMONG SCREENS The Series 1400a Monitor incorporates menu driven software that provides the user with direct instrument control from the keypad of the control unit This section explains how to interact with the instrument view information and change the values of system parameters 4 3 1 Keypaps The user can access the monitor s software screens by pressing keys on the keypad R amp P supplies the Series 1400a Monitor with a choice of keypad languages The languages available at the present time are English Figure 4 6 Spanish Figure 4 7 and German Figure 4 8 Figures 4 6 English language Series 1400a l MAIN STEP EDIT DISP UNITS SCREEN Monitor keypad dos JM DATA BKSPACE 4 T ENTER SHIFT S SECTION 4 SOFTWARE OVERVIEW Pace 4 10 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figures 4 7 Spanish language
262. hted field Enter a new value in the highlighted field and then press the lt Enter gt key on your PC s keyboard The Command Mode allows the user to enter instructions that affect the operation of the TEOMPLUS program such as exiting from the software turning communication between the control unit and the computer on and off and determining the parameters for storing data on the disk of the personal computer Press the lt F2 gt key on your PC s keyboard to display the Muxview Commands dialog box on the bottom of the screen Figure M 7 This also will switch the TEOMPLUS software program between the Command Mode and Edit Mode Press the lt End gt key on your PC s keyboard to exit from any window When the TEOMPLUS program is in the Command Mode the user can execute the following commands lt F2 gt key To switch the TEOMPLUS program to the Edit Mode press the lt F2 gt key on your PC s keyboard QUIT To stop the TEOMPLUS program from running enter QUIT after the cursor and then press the lt Enter gt key on your PC s keyboard LOAD To load one of the other software routines VIEW ACCU or INPUTS enter LOAD after the cursor and then press the lt Enter gt key on your PC s key board The Muxview Load Selection dialog box Figure M 9 will now display as the active screen Select cfv Files and press the Enter key The Load Configuration from File dialog box Figure M 10 will now displ
263. ient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 6 6 EXTENDED Function Key COMMANDS Revision B 003 Users can automatically set up the 1400a monitor for different operating configura tions by pressing the following key combinations on the control unit s keypad when in the Setup Mode Main Aux flow Key Combination Shift lt F1 gt Shift lt F2 gt Shift lt F3 gt Shift lt F4 gt Shift lt F5 gt Shift lt F6 gt Shift lt F8 gt 1 15 67 l min 2 14 67 l min 3 13 67 l min 1 15 67 l min 2 14 67 l min 3 13 67 l min Temps 50 50 50 C 50 50 50 C 50 50 50 C 30 30 0 C 30 30 0 C 30 30 0 C Turns flows and temperatures off sets K to 99999 The temperatures listed in the Temps columns are the air case and cap tempera tures respectively SECTION 6 SOFTWARE SETUP Pace 6 27 Revision B 003 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor This page left intentionally blank SECTION 6 SOFTWARE SETUP Pace 6 28 Revision B 001 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Section 7 Status Codes This section explains the status codes that display on the Main screen and the Status Codes screen The current status condition Figure 7 1 is located on the upper left hand corner of the Main screen It is an alphanumeric code that indicates the operational status of the instrument indicating any status condition that exists Figure 7 1 Mai
264. ies 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure 6 5 Set Time screen with additional lines displayed 16 20 03 Second Minute SET TIME 15 Jan 01 0 20 The time and date can only be changed when the instrumentis in the Setup Mode Press the DATA STOP gt key on the monitor s keypad to enter the Setup Mode The second line of the Set Time screen displays the current time and date generated by the monitor s built in clock calendar To reset the system time change any of the time variables shown on this screen NOTE Every time you make a new entry the instrument resets the second counter to 00 The Set Time screen contains the following information Second Minute Hour Day Month Year SECTION 6 SOFTWARE SETUP This field contains the second ss parameter of the clock This field contains the minute mm parameter of the clock This field contains the hour hh parameter of the clock This field contains the day of the month dd param eter of the date This field contains the numerical month mm pa rameter of the date January is month 0 and December is month 11 When editing the month it is simpler to use the up T and down 1 arrow keys instead of entering the number of the month on the control unit s keypad This field contains the year yyyy parameter of the date Pace 6 5 Revision B 003 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambien
265. igure 5 8 SET RS 232 MODE Mode None None Print On Line 14 When in the Set RS 232 Mode screen select the appropriate protocol for controlling the unit remotely or downloading the stored data records Section 9 Press the ENTER key to save your changes SEcTION 5 Basic OPERATION Pace 5 4 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 15 If you will be operating the instrument remotely using the RPComm software program refer to Section 10 If you will be operating the instrument remotely using the AK Protocol or the German Ambient Network Protocol refer to Section 9 4 5 If you will be downloading data records using the Fast Store Out RS232 Mode refer to Section 9 4 4 1 If you will be downloading data records using the Print On Line RS232 Mode refer to Section 9 4 4 2 If you will be downloading data records using the Store to Print RS232 Mode refer to Section 9 4 4 3 After you have set up the unit for downloading data go to step 16 16 If you will be setting up the unit to receive analog inputs refer to Section 9 If you will be setting up the unit to transmit analog outputs refer to Section 9 2 If you will be setting up the unit s contact closure circuits refer to Section 9 3 If you will not be setting up the unit to receive analog inputs transmit analog outputs or to use the unit s contact closure circuits go to step 17 17 If you will be using
266. igured as 0 1 0 2 0 5 or 0 10 VDC The monitor also contains two user definable contact closure circuits Analog inputs from a wind vane anemometer are used to calculate averaged wind speed vector averaged wind velocity and wind direction Built in support for the optional ACCU System The ACCU System is a sampler that offers flexibility in the sampling of particulate matter and or gases through filters gas collection tubes or polyurethane PUF sampling modules Optional outdoor enclosure provides a heated and air conditioned envi ronment for the control unit sensor unit and pump of the Series 1400a monitor It also contains additional space to install data logging equip ment Pace 1 3 Revision B 001 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION 1 2 Overview or MANUAL This manual describes the installation and operation of the Series 1400a Monitor Follow the setup instructions contained in Sections 2 and 3 before applying power to the unit in the manner described in Section 5 This manual is divided into 14 sections and 13 appendices that discuss different topics Sections 1 and 2 explain the system s hardware while later sections describe the system s software and the setup and operation of the monitor The following list provides an overview of the topics handled in each section of the manual Section 1 Introduction This section provides an overview of the Se
267. igured in hardware as 10 VDC the values of Const A Const B and Const C should be entered as A 0 B 7 2 C 0 SEcTION 9 DATA INPUT AND OUTPUT Pace 9 12 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 9 2 ANALOG OurPurs The user can access the instrument s three analog output channels from the two identical 15 pin connectors on the front and back panels of the control unit Figures 9 and 9 2 The pin assignments of the three analog outputs are Channel 1 Positive Pin 10 Ground Pin 3 Channel 2 Positive Pin 1 Ground Pin 5 Channel 3 Positive Pin 9 Ground Pin 6 These analog outputs have an output impedance less than 1 ohm and a maximum output current of 10 mA They can be scaled to 1 2 5 or 10 VDC by means of a combination of hardware and software settings SEcTION 9 DATA INPUT AND OUTPUT Pace 9 13 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure 9 12 Set Analog Outputs screen Figure 9 13 Set Analog Outputs screen with additional lines displayed 9 2 1 Set ANALOG Outputs SCREEN The Set Analog Outputs screen Figure 9 12 allows the user to define the analog outputs transmitted by the monitor SET ANALOG OUTPUTS Max Volt gt 10 VDC A01 Var 30 Min MC A01 Min 0 00 You can display the Set Analog Outputs screen on the four line display of the control unit in three different ways 1 Press the lt A O gt key o
268. ilters must be replaced before the filter loading percentage on the status line of the Main screen reaches 100 When the filter loading percentage is greater than 90 the CHECK STATUS light located below the POWER button on the front of the TEOM control unit Figure 3 27 lights up and the status condition code Section 7 on the status line of the Main screen changes from OK to X Figure 3 26 CHECK A STATUS A If you operate your unit at a main flow rate of less than 3 l min your instrument s filter loading percentage may not reach 9096 on the Main screen even though the filter is loaded beyond 9095 In this case the user should replace the TEOM filter every 14 2 days to avoid exceeding the filter s maximum capacity SECTION 3 SAMPLE PREPARATION Pace 3 18 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 3 3 TURNING ON THE SERIES 1400A Monitor Follow these steps to turn on the monitor 1 Supply power to the instrument at the appropriate voltage Sec tion 2 3 1 2 Press the POWER switch on the front panel of the control unit Figure 3 28 The Title screen will appear on the control unit s display Figure 3 29 After a moment the Main screen Figure 3 30 will display Figure 3 28 Control unit with the POWER button A highlighted Figure 3 29 Title screen Series 1400a Monitor Copyright 2001 Rupprecht Patashnick Figure 3 30 Main
269. in screen press the lt MAIN STATUS gt key on the control unit s keypad to display the Status Codes screen Figure 7 3 The Status Codes screen provides an explanation of the current status conditions Figure 7 3 Status Codes screen with status condi tions and additional lines gt M displayed T F X V SECTION 7 STATUS CODES CURRENT STATUS CODES Mass Transducer Temperature Flow Rates Exchange Filter Voltage Low Pace 7 2 Revision B 001 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor If the instrument status condition is OK the Status Codes screen will display No Curr Conditions Figure 7 4 Figure 7 4 Status Codes screen with OK status CURRENT STATUS CODES code displayed gt No Curr Conditions SECTION 7 STATUS CODES Pace 7 3 Revision B 001 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor This page left intentionally blank SECTION 7 STATUS CODES Pace 7 4 Revision B 003 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Section 8 Viewing Stored Data The Series 1400a Monitor contains a battery backed circular buffer internal data logger for the storage of historical instrument results data records This section describes how to view data records currently stored in the monitor s internal data logger circular storage buffer The capacity of the data logger as measured by the number of records
270. in this field This field contains the value of a user defined stor age variable that was stored in the internal data logger If this field displays Null this means that the user did not define a variable to be stored in this field This field contains the value of a user defined stor age variable that was stored in the internal data logger If this field displays Null this means that the user did not define a variable to be stored in this field This field contains the value of a user defined stor age variable that was stored in the internal data logger If this field displays Null this means that the user did not define a variable to be stored in this field This field contains the value of a user defined stor age variable that was stored in the internal data logger If this field displays Null this means that the user did not define a variable to be stored in this field This field contains the value of a user defined stor age variable that was stored in the internal data logger If this field displays Null this means that the user did not define a variable to be stored in this field When the user displays the View Storage screen the monitor displays the latest data record that was saved to the internal data logger The storage pointer also will be located at the latest data record that was saved to the internal data logger Press the right lt gt gt and left arrow keys
271. ing the changes on the monitor s keypad press the lt BKSPACE gt key to erase indi vidual characters or the lt ESC gt key to leave the edit command You also can use direct keypad entry to enter program register codes PRCs Appendix B For example to set the value for AOI Var to the 24 hour mass concentration average in the Set Ana log Outputs screen press the lt EDIT gt key 07 67 07 and then the lt ENTER gt key to save the change SECTION 4 SOFTWARE OVERVIEW Pace 4 17 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Arrow keys Display the screen that has the operating parameters that you want to change or edit and press the lt EDIT gt key Press the up T and down 1 arrow keys to increase or decrease the value of the variable being edited To increase the value of the variable by 10 steps at a time press the lt SHIFT gt key and hold it down while pressing the up 1 arrow key To decrease value of the variable by 10 steps at a time press the lt SHIFT gt key and hold it down while pressing the down lt gt arrow key To increase the value of the variable by 100 steps at a time press the lt CTRL gt key and hold it down while pressing the up T arrow key To decrease the value ofthe variable by 100 steps at a time press the lt CTRL gt key and hold it down while pressing the down 1 arrow key Press the ENTER key to save the cha
272. interval between cleanings of the SCC depends on the particulate matter mass concentration and composition in the ambient air Field and laboratory experience indicate a required cleaning interval of three to four weeks or more R amp P suggests that the user clean the SCC inlet more frequently until opera tional experience allows better determination of proper cleaning intervals based on your local conditions Because the sharp cut cyclone SCC PM 1 inlet is similar in construction to the SCC PM 2 5 inlet the maintenance procedures are the same for both inlets APPENDIX G INLET MAINTENANCE Pace G 13 Revision B 001 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Follow these steps to maintain the SCC inlet 1 Pull the SCC up and off the flow splitter 2 Pull off the transfer tube Figures G 16 and G 18 If it is too tight to remove it by hand pry it off with a rigid plastic lever Figure G 18 SCC transfer tube 3 Remove the top cap Figures G 16 and G 19 and emptying cup Figures G 16 and G 20 from the chamber Figures G 16 and G 21 Figure G 19 SCC top cap APPENDIX G INLET MAINTENANCE Pace G 14 Revision B 001 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure G 20 SCC emptying cup Figure G 21 SCC chamber with emptying cup transfer tube and top cap removed LJ 4 RUPPRECHT amp PATASHNICK i Albany N Y U 54 p MF
273. ion check the settings For the Series 1400a Monitor the settings should be baud rate 9600 data bits 8 parity None stop bits 1 flow control RTS 5 Change the values to match your instrument if necessary NOTE To return the settings to their default values select the Restore Defaults button Figure 10 13 6 When the settings are accurate select the OK button in the Properties screen with COM connection information 7 When in the Properties screen with telephone setup information select the OK button 8 When in the AK Protocol Setup screen select the OK button The Connection List screen will now display SEcTION 10 RPComm SOFTWARE Pace 10 15 Revision B 000 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 10 2 3 Down oapinc Data With RPComm R amp P instruments keep track of which records have been downloaded by using storage pointers These storage pointers indicate the most recently retrieved data record and serve as the starting point for future downloads Every time RPComm downloads data records from the Series 1400a Monitor the unit s storage pointer is moved to the last data record that was downloaded The user can download all the data that are stored in the unit s internal data logger beginning at the storage pointer The storage pointer is a place marker in the unit s data logger It indicates to the RPComm program where the data d
274. ision B 000 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 10 2 4 Manipucatinc DownLoapep Data After the data have been downloaded they can be manipulated for different uses All data manipulation procedures listed in this section can be performed in RPComm without being connected to the monitor NOTE The Windows operating system screens shown in this section are from the Windows 98 operating system These screens may vary slightly from your computer s screens if you are operating RPComm under other Windows operating systems 10 2 4 1 Copyinc DATA To THE CLIPBOARD After the data have been downloaded and displayed in RPComm a selection of data can be copied to the Windows clipboard for use in other applications Follow these steps to copy data to the Windows clipboard 1 When in the Download Data screen Figure 10 16 ensure that the the Storage Data tab is selected 2 Place your cursor on the data cell where you wish to begin the selection Press and hold down the left mouse button and drag the cursor until all the desired data are selected 3 An alternate way to select data is to place the cursor on the col umn heading where you wish to begin the selection Press and hold down the left mouse button and drag the cursor across the columns until all the desired data are selected This will choose all the data in the selected columns 4 When the proper selection has been made press the Copy ico
275. isplay on the screen Record the set points for the average temperature located on the left hand side of this field and the average pressure located on the left hand side of this field 9 Ensure that the monitor is in the Setup Mode Section 6 10 On the monitor set the average temperature and average pres sure parameters to the current local conditions NOTE The average pressure reading should be actual pressure NOT corrected to sea level IMPORTANT The average temperature and pressure settings should not read 99 C and 9 atm respectively during a mass flow controller calibration 11 On the flow meter set the average temperature and average pressure parameters to the current local conditions NOTE The average pressure reading should be actual pressure NOT corrected to sea level IMPORTANT The average temperature and pressure settings should not read 99 C and 9 atm respectively during a mass flow controller calibration APPENDIX J ORIGINAL DESIGN Mass FLow CONTROLLERS Pace J 3 Revision B 000 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 12 Press the up and down arrow keys to position the screen so that FAdj Main and FAdj Aux display on the screen 13 Connect a reference flow meter such as a bubble meter dry gas meter or mass flow meter to the port labelled SENSOR FLOW on the back panel of the control unit This reference flow meter should have been recently c
276. ister Codes This appendix contains a list of the program regiser codes PRCs used by the instrument These codes are numbers that represent variables used by the monitor APPENDIX B PROGRAM REGISTER CODES Pace B 1 Revision B 001 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor MAIN PROGRAM REGISTER CODES 007 ug hour N A N A not editable w 009 013 Noise ae N A N A N A not editable s Na NA moved Curent Air Temperate Curent Cap Temperate N A N A N A not editable H A not editable N A not editable H not editable N 026 Current Air Temperature N 027 N 028 035 Filter Loading percent of filter lifetime used o 039 Current Main Flow N A i N A not editable 040 Current Auxiliary Flow l i UA not editable Dvn ws Na N A N A not editable B Current Cap Temperature o o o o 5 C A C A i N A not editable C A C A 3 N A not editable H not editable u wal mre as D 059 ug n i N A not editable m NA Ni NA rot edian 114 119 Analog Input 0 5 N A N A N A not editable NA Ni NA wtediubk NA Ni NA wtediubk NA Ni NA wtediubk Program Register Code is the same as in version 1 software for compatibility N A not editable H A not editable H not editable APPENDIX B PROGRAM REGISTER CODES Pace B 2 Revision B 001 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambie
277. itor v Keep the door to the TEOM sensor unit open for as short a time as possible to minimize the temperature change in the system X Do not handle TEOM filters with your fingers 3 1 2 Routine FILTER INSTALLATION Follow these steps to install a filter 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Ensure that the filter exchange tool Figure 3 1 is clean and free of any contamination that might be transferred to the TEOM filter Press the POWER switch to turn on the control unit Figure 3 14 Press the DATA STOP key on the control unit s keypad Figure 3 18 Open the door of the sensor unit Figures 3 2 and 3 3 Locate the silver handle on the front of the mass transducer Figure 3 4 Note that there is a shipping latch in the middle of this handle Grasp the silver handle and move the shipping latch upward with your thumb Figure 3 5 Pull down on the silver handle Figure 3 6 Pull the holding rod off the latch plate Figure 3 7 With the mass transducer unlatched grasp the black knob Figure 3 4 and swing the bottom of the mass transducer downward exposing the tapered element TE Figure 3 8 An old TEOM filter may be already installed on the TE Refer to Section 3 1 4 to remove this filter NOTE Ifthe control unit is operating power is applied to the control unit when you open the mass transducer the tapered element TE will automatically stop oscillating 10 Pick up a new conditione
278. key and then press the lt ENTER gt key Section 4 3 1 Pace 4 2 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor SECTION 4 4 2 1 Status Line The status line Figures 4 3 and 4 4 of the Main screen provides a summary of the current operational conditions of the instrument The status line contains the following information OK SOFTWARE OVERVIEW This field contains the current status condition It is an alphanumeric code that summarizes the opera tional status of the instrument indicating whether any status condition exists Refer to Section 7 for an explanation of the unit s status codes This field contains the unit s current operating mode It indicates the instrument s current operational setting and the type of data being computed by the monitor The operating modes are Operating Mode 1 Mass values are not currently being computed because temper atures and flow rates are stabilizing The temperatures and flow rates must remain within a very narrow range of values Sec tion 5 for 30 minutes before the instrument enters Operating Mode 2 The monitor al ways starts in Operating Mode 1 when it is turnedonorreset Press the lt F1 gt or lt RUN gt key to reset the instrument from any oper ating mode This action always causes the instrument to enter Operating Mode 1 Operating Mode 2 Data collection has be gun but the first total mass value has not yet bee
279. l Prnt Var2 Prnt Var3 Prnt Var4 This field contains the time interval ssss between data output transmissions The default setting is 1 800 seconds This field contains the number of data columns 1 6 that the instrument will transmit in each data output transmission The default setting 1s 6 col umns of data This field contains the data variable PRC that will be transmitted in Column 1 during each data output transmission This field contains the data variable PRC that will be transmitted in Column 2 during each data output transmission This field contains the data variable PRC that will be transmitted in Column 3 during each data output transmission This field contains the data variable PRC that will be transmitted in Column 4 during each data output transmission PAGE 9 29 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Prnt Var5 Prnt Var6 Station This field contains the data variable PRC that will be transmitted in Column 5 during each data output transmission This field contains the data variable PRC that will be transmitted in Column 6 during each data output transmission This field contains the station number ASCII char acter string which is a representation of a numeric field that can be up to three digits long The station variable is transmitted during each data transmis sion and is stored with every data record in the monito
280. l min when anew TEOM filter is placed on the mass transducer or if the lifetime of consecutive TEOM filters becomes noticeably shorter you may need to replace the in line filter in the main flow line Section 12 Testing performed for official U S EPA PM 10 measurements must be conducted with TEOM filters Section 2 2 made of Teflon coated glass fiber filter paper Filters should be stored inside the sensor unit for easy access and to keep them dry and warm Section 3 1 3 SECTION 3 SAMPLE PREPARATION Pace 3 17 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure 3 27 Control unit with the CHECK STATUS light A highlighted 3 2 4 FILTER Lire Filter life depends upon the nature and concentration of the particulate matter sampled as well as the main flow rate setting TEOM filters must be replaced when the filter loading value approaches 100 This generally corresponds to a total mass accumulation on the filter of approximately 3 5 mg Filter life at a main flow rate of 3 l min is generally 21 days at an average PM 10 concentration of 50 ug m Filter life is longer at lower flow rates because the particulate matter accumulation on the filter is slower Flow splitter adapters Section 2 for 1 l min and 2 l min operation can be used in areas with elevated particulate matter concentrations or where a longer filter life is required 3 2 2 When ro Replace TEOM Fitters TEOM f
281. l min for the Aux Flow Any greater deviation may indicate that the in line filters are plugged or other blockages exist in the system 8 Attach a reference flow meter such as a bubble meter dry gas meter or mass flow meter to the top of the flow audit adapter This reference flow meter should have been recently calibrated to a primary standard have an accuracy of 1 at 3 l min and 16 67 l min and a pressure drop of less than 0 07 bar 1 psi 9 Read the total flow approximately 16 67 l min on the reference flow meter If you are using a mass flow meter you must make any necessary corrections to translate this reading to volumetric l min at the current ambient temperature and barometric pres sure No adjustment is necessary in the case of a volumetric flow meter The total volumetric flow measured by the reference flow meter must be 16 67 1 0 l min to be acceptable 10 Disconnect the bypass flow line from the bypass extension on the bottom of the flow splitter Figure 12 22 SECTION 12 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE AND VERIFICATION PROCEDURES Pace 12 21 Revision B 001 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure 12 22 Disconnect ing the bypass flow line from the bypass extension 11 Cap the exit of the flow splitter bypass extension with the 3 8 inch Swagelok cap Figure 12 23 Figure 12 23 Bypass flow extension with 3 8 inch Swagelok cap SECTION 12 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE
282. le dialog box displayed MS VIEW MUXVIEWR PIS E3 Aulo aele m erat A Top Window TEOM Series 1408a Monitor Page 1 five Time Muxviewr v5 1 Mass Rate ugh Mode E Mass Cone ug m 3 Status m Total Mass ___ stag Load Configuration from File lt Fi gt Help lt Alt Fi gt Specific Help lt End gt Close Window Name of file view cfy Path C TEOMCOMM ACCU CFU INPUTS CFU UIEW CFU lt PgUp gt lt PgDn gt to scroll Serial Number _ Amb Temp _ Cal Constant Amb Pres _ ee lt F2 gt Muxview Commands A lt Fi gt Help lt Alt Fi gt Specific Help lt F1i gt View Window APPENDIX M TEOMPLUS SorrwARE Pace M 14 Operating Manual Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure M 11 TEOMPLUS VIEW screen with Muxview Load Program mux File Window dialog box displayed 5 VIEW MUXVIEWR mj e z Al Top Window Load mux Window TEOM Series 146 a Monitor Page 1 _ l Muxview Load Program mux gt File Window l 1 Hr Mass Conc 8 Hr Mass Conc 24 Hr Mass Conc Filt Load Case Temp fi r Temp Cap Temp Enclosure Temp Main Flov fiuxiliary Flov Serial Number Amb Temp Cal Constant fimb Pres Press lt F2 gt to toggle command mode Figure M 12 TEOMPLUS VIEW screen with Muxview Load Communications Window dialog box dis played ME VIEW MUXVIEWR ele Aj
283. le name to save the data filename Figure L 12 Figure L 12 TEOMCOMM Main screen with data file name entered fou m E qoe E oti ee Al TEOMCOMM v1 41 Request the value of a register Modify the value of a register Set instrument mode Download storage Set storage pointer Fast Storage Out Exit program Enter filename to store data uniti4 1 txt_ Fi Help F2 Comm Config F3 Set Station F4 Options APPENDIX L TEOMCOMM Sortware Pace L 18 Revision B 000 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor An MS DOS compliant file name is an 8 character file name a period or dot and then a 3 character file extension such as txt For example site256 txt would be an acceptable file name When the user enters an MS DOS compliant file name the computer will request that the user change the monitor s RS232 Mode to Fast Storage Out Figure L 13 Figure L 13 TEOMCOMM Main screen with request to change monitor s RS232 mode to Fast Store Out displayed VA TEOMCOMM an iee E3 sf al TEOMCOMM v1 41 Request the value of a register Modify the value of a register Set instrument mode Download storage Set storage pointer Fast Storage Out Exit program Set RS 232 mode on instrument to Fast Storage Out ESC to abort Fi Help F2 Comm Config F3 Set Station F4 Options When the user changes the monitor s RS232 Mode to Fast Storage Out the PC
284. lease the mouse button The graph will be resized according to the box dimensions Decreases the scale ofthe x axis With this icon selected press and hold the left mouse button at the beginning of the area that you want to zoom into Drag the cursor horizontally to the end ofthe zoom area and release the mouse button The graph will be resized according to the new x axis dimensions Decreases the scale ofthe y axis With this icon selected press and hold the left mouse button at the beginning of the area that you want to zoom into Drag the cursor vertically to the end of the zoom area and release the mouse button The graph will be resized according to the new y axis dimensions Enables panning Panning allows the user to move the graph area so that a different section ofthe x or y axis will be displayed without affecting the scale of either axis With this icon selected place the mouse cursor somewhere within the graph area and hold down the left mouse button Move the mouse to display the desired section of the graph Selecting this icon will undo the last zoom or panning step Rescales the x and y axes so that all the graphs for the selected data are displayed Toggles between the two possible x axis scales date and time and time only This does not affect the way the data are displayed on the graph These two boxes define the number of axis divisions on the graph The left box refers to the x axis and the right box refers to t
285. lete the incorrect code by selecting the code in the Con nection Command box and pressing the Delete key on your computer s keyboard 8 The remaining portions of the screen should have been set while establishing the modem connection step 1 Do not modify these settings 9 Select the OK button to exit the AK Protocol Setup screen The Connection Type screen will display 10 When in the Connection Type screen select the OK button to finish the connection setup 11 To initiate a modem connection to a selected instrument high light the connection name on the Connection List screen Figure H 1 and select the Connection icon z on the tool bar The connection to the instrument will be initiated and the proper command codes will be sent to the serial switching device When communication is established the Download Data screen will display Figure H 7 NOTE Ifthe connection is successful the unit s serial number will be displayed atthe top ofthe screen Ensure thatthe correct serial number is displayed to verify that the proper command codes were sent and that the serial port trigger is functioning properly If the connection is not successful or if there is no instrument attached then the serial number will be blank or will display 99999 Ifthe modem loses its connection wait at least 1 minute before trying to establish another connection This allows the modem to reset itself 12 RPComm can now be
286. llers measure flow on a mass basis All of the size selective inlets Section 2 including the PM 10 inlet operate on a volumetric flow basis To measure accurate mass concentration levels when using a size selective inlet the user must make a density adjustment to the mass flow controllers using the temperature and pressure values Follow these steps to use the average temperature and pressure values to control the volumetric flow 1 Press the DATA STOP key 2 When in the Main screen Figure 6 1 press the STEP SCREEN key to display the Menu screen Figure 6 4 3 When in the Menu screen press the up 1 and down lt gt arrow keys to select Set Temps Flows and then press the ENTER key to display the Set Temps Flows screen Figure 6 6 You also can press the 1 and 9 keys and then press the ENTER key to display the Set Temps Flows screen 4 Press the EDIT key 5 When in the Set Temps Flows screen press the arrow keys to select the left hand column in the T A S line 6 Use the monitor s keypad to enter the average temperature at the site For example press the 2 and 0 keys to change the average temperature to 20 C 7 Press the arrow keys to select the left hand column in the P A S line 8 Use the monitor s keypad to enter the average pressure at the site For example press the 0 lt gt 9 and 3 keys to change the average pressure to 0 93 atm
287. loads to occur 5 minutes apart to ensure smooth data transmission Section 10 RPComm SOFTWARE Pace 10 28 Revision B 000 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor During a scheduled download RPComm assigns file numbers or names to the downloaded data according to the file numbers that already exist in the download directory RPComm increments the file numbers by a value of one more than the largest file number that already exists in the download directory For example if the download directory has one file init with the number 201 14s01 txt at the next scheduled setpoint data download RPComm will assign the file name 20114s02 txt to the new downloaded data The number 02 was the next available file number SEcTION 10 RPComm SOFTWARE Pace 10 29 Revision B 000 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 10 2 6 VIEWING INSTRUMENT OPERATION 10 2 6 1 VIEWING System REGISTERS A system register is a value entered into calculated by or measured by the unit Examples of system registers are the unit s serial number entered the calibration constants calculated and the ambient temperature measured Every system register can be displayed by RPComm SEcTION 10 RPComm SOFTWARE Pace 10 30 Revision B 000 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Follow these steps to view system registers 1 When in the Download Data scre
288. lt ENTER gt key 11 Press the lt F1 gt or lt RUN gt key to restart data collection SECTION 6 SOFTWARE SETUP Pace 6 18 Revision B 003 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure 6 8 Set Hardware screen Figure 6 9 Set Hardware screen with additional lines displayed 6 4 Set HARDWARE SCREEN The Set Hardware screen Figure 6 8 allows the user to view and change selected hardware parameters SET HARDWARE Cal Const gt 9605 Ser Num 22822 Inst Type AB You can display the Set Hardware screen on the four line display of the control unit in three different ways 1 When in the Main screen Figure 6 1 press the lt STEP SCREEN gt key on the control unit s keypad to display the Menu screen Figure 6 4 When in the Menu screen press the up T and down lt gt arrow keys to select Set Hardware and then press the lt ENTER gt key 2 When in the Set Temps Flows screen Section 6 3 press the STEP SCREEN key 3 Press the 17 and 3 keys and then press the lt ENTER gt key The Set Hardware screen contains additional lines that cannot be seen when the screen first displays on the control unit s four line display Figure 6 9 Press the up 1 and down lt gt arrow keys to view the additional lines of the Set Hardware screen SET HARDWARE Cal Const 9605 Ser Num 22822 Inst Type AB Wait Time 0 MR MC Ave 300 TM Ave 300 XX Hr M
289. lt STEP SCREEN gt key to display the Menu screen Figure 6 4 When in the Menu screen press the up lt T gt and down 1 arrow keys to select Set Temps Flows and then press the ENTER key to display the Set Temps Flows screen Figure 6 6 You also can press the lt 1 gt and lt 9 gt keys and then press the ENTER key to display the Set Temps Flows screen Press the EDIT key When in the Set Temps Flows screen set the unit s volumetric flow control setting Section 6 3 1 or Section 6 3 2 Press the arrow keys to select the right hand column in the T A S field Enter the standard temperature value in this field If you are set ting the unit to report to the U S EPA equivalent PM 10 measurements press the 2 and 5 keys 25 on the monitor s keypad This sets the standard temperature to 25 Pace 6 17 Revision B 003 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor which causes the monitor to use the standard temperature in flow rate calculations 8 Press the arrow keys to select the right hand column in the P A S field 9 Enter the standard pressure value in this field If you are setting the unit to report to the U S EPA equivalent PM 10 measure ments press the lt 1 gt key on the monitor s keypad This sets the standard pressure to 1 which causes the monitor to use the standard pressure in flow rate calculations 10 Press the
290. lume field of the View ACCU System screen To use this channel again replace the filter and reset the channel The ACCU System is only operational if the monitor is in Operating Modes 1 4 If the monitor is not in Operating Modes 1 4 only the internal bypass flow channel Channel 0 of the ACCU hardware is active After the user presses the F1 or lt RUN gt key on the monitor s keypad the ACCU System will begin operation 1 minute after the monitor enters Operating Mode 1 Section 14 ACCU System Pace 14 34 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 14 6 ResETTING ACCU CHANNELS The user would generally reset an ACCU channel after installing a new filter cartridge in that channel Section 14 3 2 When the user resets an ACCU channel the Time and X When the user resets an Volume fields for that channel Section 14 5 are reset to 0 Therefore you should a aca reset a channel only after you have recorded the values that are displayed in the Time are reset to 0 and Volume fields of the View ACCU System screen Figure 14 31 because this information will be lost after the channel is reset Follow these steps to reset an ACCU channel 1 Press the lt DATA STOP gt key on the monitor s keypad to enter Setup Mode 2 Press the lt 1 gt and lt 4 gt keys and then press the lt ENTER gt key to display the View ACCU System screen Section 14 5 3 Press the left lt
291. m and instrument configurations have been verified disconnect the direct connection Set up the unit for modem communications Section H 1 NOTE R amp P recommends that the modem connections be tested before the unit is placed in the field The test will require the use of two phone lines When in the Connection List screen Figure H 1 select the name of the connection used to verify the direct connection APPENDIX H MopEM COMMUNICATIONS Pace H 3 Revision B 000 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure H 1 Connection List screen S RPComm Connection List Group Default of xi File Help 2 C sl OX eam d Connection Name Instrument Type Status Modem Status Ez 6 Select the Edit Selected Connection icon The Connection Type screen will display Figure H 2 Type screen m 2000 FRM 2025 __ Creel 2100 Settings gt gt 2300 5400 8400 APPENDIX H Mopem COMMUNICATIONS Pace H 4 Revision B 000 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 7 When in the Connection Type screen ensure that 1400 and select the Settings button to display the AK Protocol Setup screen Figure H 3 Figure H 3 AK Protocol AK Protocol Setup Setup screen COM v OK Station Setup Station Number 4 052 Channel Number 0754 048 Cancel ai Comm Setup gt gt Delay Time m Phone Number Connection Command
292. m contains one internal bypass flow line and eight user definable flow lines that normally contain one collection cartridge each The ACCU System directs the auxiliary bypass flow from the flow splitter of the monitor through one of the eight collection cartridges or the internal bypass line Within the unit conductive tubing is used to minimize the static attraction effects of particulate matter to the tubing walls Figures 14 3 and 14 4 SAMPLE FLOW INLET f A f 4 SAMPLE ala FLOW AAA OUTLET PS Pak A e rfs e The control unit closely monitors the bypass flow rate through the ACCU System to ensure the integrity of a total flow volume of 16 67 l min through the sample inlet If a cartridge installed in the ACCU enclosure causes the bypass flow to deviate from the standard 13 67 l min by 0 40 l min this cartridge is not used again until the user exchanges the cartridge and resets the channel To indicate that a cartridge has caused a high pressure drop the monitor places a negative sign in front of the value for that channel s total flow volume Using the monitor s software the user defines the conditions under which each ofthe eight ACCU channels operates Oz v one channel is active at any one time Every 10 seconds the instrument determines which of the ACCU System s eight channels should currently be active The unit systematically checks the c
293. m the instrument Number of variables transmitted by the 3 digit Instrument Identifier as instrument as specified by RS Para 3 defined by RS Para 1 These three May be 01 02 or 03 bytes are optional e e pee emen DENEN aos by RS Para 1 CRC The CRCs may be replaced by a single lt CR gt character DEFINITION OF CRC BYTES The CRC bytes above bytes 8 and 9 are the hexadecimal Value of variable being transmitted in representation of the exclusive or of bytes 1 through 7 The the format NNNN EE high byte of the CRC is transmitted as byte 8 and the low byte is sent as byte 9 For example a value of 63 7 is represented as 0637 01 If a syntax error exists or the value of the variable is 0 the instrument returns 0000 00 CAE APPENDIX C Two Way SERIAL COMMUNICATION Pace C 11 Revision B 000 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor German Network Protocol continued Transmission to Instrument Response from Instrument ce mesmo C ereetleewr eser 3 2 digit hexadecimal representation of current instrument edis ng mode see CURRENT OPERATING MODE Bytes 20 21 The two digit hexadecimal representation of the current operating mode is determined as follows 2 digit hexadecimal representation of current instrument status condition see Mode 1 description at left Mode 2 Mode 3 Mode 4 0 decimal 16 Mode S 0 Mode X 20 decimal 32 3 digit PRC of t
294. makes contact otherwise the channel remains open SEcTION 9 DATA INPUT AND OUTPUT PAGE 9 21 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor In the monitor s default configuration contact closure channels 1 and 2 are defined as follows Channel 1 Current Status Code NAND y Channel 2 Current Filter Pressure Drop lt 90 SEcTION 9 DATA INPUT AND OUTPUT Pace 9 22 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 9 4 Downtoapine DATA The Series 1400a Monitor can transmit information to other devices through a number of different means including analog output RS232 output a parallel printer output user defined logic level outputs and contact closure In addition to providing on line printing capabilities the instrument directly supports a number of RS232 communi cation protocols such as the AK Protocol and the German Ambient Network Protocol Appendix C When using the AK Protocol the user can change the value of system variables and download stored data from a remote location Also the instrument can download its stored data records directly to a serial printer or other serial device such as a personal computer PC This section explains how to download data through the RS232 port to a serial printer personal computer PC and other data capture devices such as a data logger Users also can download data files from the Series 1400a Monit
295. mass flow controller or the vacuum pump in the system If the flow read ings do not exceed these calculated values go to step 18 18 Slowly open the valve located on the flow audit adapter IMPORTANT Before removing the flow audit adapter open the valve on the adapter slowly to gradually release the vacuum in the system 19 Remove the flow audit adapter from the flow splitter SECTION 3 SAMPLE PREPARATION Pace 3 24 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 20 Install the sample inlet onto the flow splitter Section 2 21 Replace the TEOM filter in the mass transducer Sections 3 1 4 and 3 1 2 22 Close the mass transducer and the sensor unit door SECTION 3 SAMPLE PREPARATION Pace 3 25 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor This page left intentionally blank SECTION 3 SAMPLE PREPARATION Pace 3 26 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Section 4 Software Overview This section describes the steps involved in navigating through the basic screens of the Series 1400a Monitor and interacting with the unit Follow the procedures outlined in Sections 2 and 3 before attempting to operate the monitor 4 1 TITLE SCREEN When the power switch Figure 4 1 ofthe monitor is pressed the Title screen Figure 4 2 momentarily appears on the instrument s display to identify
296. mbient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure M 8 TEOMPLUS VIEW screen with additional lines displayed M 4 TEOMPLUS VIEW Screen The TEOMPLUS VIEW screen Figure M 4 displays the current set points and values for many operational parameters including mass concentration averages temperatures and flow rates The TEOMPLUS VIEW screen contains additional lines that cannot be seen when the screen first displays on the personal computer s PC s display Figure M 8 Press the lt PgDn gt and lt PgUp gt keys on your PC s keyboard to view the additional lines of the TEOMPLUS VIEW screen Top Window VIEW Muxviewr v5 1 TEOM Series 1400a Monitor Page 2 14 14 20 27 Dec 99 ANALOG OUTPUT SETTINGS DATA STORAGE SETTINGS Chan Var Min Max Var 57 0 00 500 00 Var 58 0 00 500 00 Var 8 0 00 5000 00 Var Max Volt 3 O lV 1 2V 2 5V 3 10V Var Jumper Interval Columns Var Var Var Var Var Var Station Low Pass 0 2V 1 10V Var Var COMM 2 WAY SETTINGS Var Interval Stor Vars change 8 deletes storage Station Constant A 3 000 Constant B 1 030 ANALOG CALIBRATION Cal Mode O Off 1 0n Analog Out Value X 100000 Analog In Chan Value High Pass 100000 The user can enter new values for selected system variables in the highlighted fields of these screens Press the up T down 1 left lt gt and right lt gt arrow keys to select a highli
297. mine the current ambient pressure in mm Hg absolute pressure not corrected to sea level Verify the monitor s ambient pressure by measuring the current ambient station pressure in mm Hg with an external measurement device To convert from Atmospheres 0 C to mm Hg multiply by 760 To convert from millibars to mm Hg multiply by 0 75012 To convert from inches Hg 32 F to mm Hg multiply by 25 4 Verify that the value of the for Amb Pres field is within 10 mm Hg of the measured ambient pressure If this is not the case perform the ambient pressure calibration procedure Service Manual SECTION 12 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE AND VERIFICATION PROCEDURES Pace 12 18 Revision B 001 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure 12 18 Removing the PM 10 inlet 12 2 4 FLow Aupit PROCEDURE The flow audit procedure checks the flow rates in the Series 1400a Monitor The tolerances in this audit procedure should not be confused with the tighter specifica tions outlined in the calibration procedures of the Service Manual Perform the ambient air temperature verification Section 12 2 2 pressure verifica tion Section 12 2 3 and leak check Section 3 before executing the flow verification procedure Section 12 2 4 Tools Needed Flow audit adapter kit 57 001243 Flow audit adapter 3 8 inch Swagelok cap Materials None Follow these steps to perform a flow audit 1 Press the lt F
298. models 59 008298 Refill for mass calibration verification kit all models 59 008299 5 filter mass calibration verification kit 59 008298 0005 Refill for 5 filter mass calibration verification kit 59 008299 0005 Bypass line water trap filter 32 005933 APPENDIX E CONSUMABLES AND PARTS Pace E 1 Revision B 003 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor E 2 Parts The following is a list of major parts in the Series 1400a Monitor along with their R amp P part numbers Flow Controllers and Flow Accessories Main flow controller 5 l min 00 AA 10 000354 Auxiliary flow controller 20 l min 00 AA 10 000355 Flow splitter all models 57 001667 Bypass fine particle filter assembly kit 00 AA 57 001007 Nylon tubing 3 8 OD all models 24 000483 Flow controller upgrade kit AA 59 002496 Brooks flow controller service tool AA 10 003443 Dual flow controller 55 003326 AB with old style flow controller Dual flow controller 55 003326 AB with old style flow controller exchange Single flow controller 55 003603 AB with old style flow controller Single flow controller 55 003603 AB with old style flow controller exchange Old style flow controller maintenance package AB 55 003603 Flow sensor 20 l min 10 002415 Flow sensor 5 l min 10 003312 New style flow controller AB 55 007675 New style flow controller AB exchange 55 007675 1400AB flow controller upgrade package 55 007758
299. mp FO Force DCD Data Carrier Detect ON at all times amp CO Ignore DTR Data Terminal Ready from instrument amp DO Set auto answer to ring S0 1 Set local flow control to RTS CTS Code varies Store settings in profile 0 amp WO Use stored settings in profile 0 on power up amp YO 4 Disconnect your computer from the modem 5 Attach the 9 to 9 pin cable to the RS232 connector on the front or back of the monitor APPENDIX H MobpEM COMMUNICATIONS Pace H 1 Revision B 000 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 6 Attach the null modem adapter to the other end of the 9 to 9 pin cable NOTE Not all null modem adapters can be used in this application because pin connections are not standard The null modem adapter 10 005671 that is available from R amp P is acceptable for use with the Series 1400a Monitor 7 If your modem is equipped with a 9 pin connector go to step 8 If your modem is equipped with a 25 pin connector go to step 9 8 Install the null modem adapter onto the 9 pin connector on your modem Go to step 11 9 Attach a 9 to 25 pin serial adapter 06 005895 0925 to the null modem adapter NOTE Not all 9 to 25 pin serial adapters can be used in this application because pin connections are not standard The 9 to 25 pin serial adapter 06 005895 0925 available from R amp P is acceptable for use with the Series 1400a Monitor 10 Install the 9 to 25 pin
300. mp P for PM 2 5 and PM 1 monitoring Section 2 Pace 1 7 Revision B 001 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION 1 4 GENERAL SvsrEM CONFIGURATION The Series 1400a Monitor is composed of two major components the TEOM sensor unit and TEOM control unit Figure 1 1 The system s sample inlet and flow splitting hardware are not shown in this figure The user enters the system parameters into the control unit with the keypad located on the front of the unit Additionally the system is furnished with software for personal computers PCs to allow the user to view the operation of the instrument in real time and to allow the user to enter system values directly from the PC The instrument does not require a dedicated computer to function in the field The sensor unit contains the mass measurement hardware that continuously monitors the accumulated mass on the system s exchangeable filter cartridge By maintaining a flow rate of 3 l min through the instrument and measuring the total mass accumu lated on the filter cartridge the device can calculate the mass concentration of the sample stream in real time The control unit houses an industrially hardened microprocessor system flow control hardware a gauge to determine filter lifetime transformers and power supplies This part of the monitor can be mounted on a 19 inch rack for convenient installation Pace 1 8 Revision B 001
301. mperature setting Set the tempera ture to 27 C 80 F 4 After you have adjusted the temperature setting close the air conditioner cover and tighten the three fasteners on the cover 5 Restore power to the air conditioner Unplug the air conditioner from its power source during winter months in areas where ambient temperatures regularly drop below 10 C 50 F When you unplug the air conditioner from its power source the blower will turn off Otherwise the blower will constantly operate when the air conditioner is plugged into its power source APPENDIX K COMPLETE OUTDOOR ENCLOSURE Pace K 13 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor K 5 ADJUSTING THE HEATER Set the heater to 10 C 50 F using the thermostat installed in the enclosure V The temperature in the NOTE The temperature requirements for the Series 1400a outdoor enclosure must Monitor range from 2 to 40 C 35 to 104 F Therefore remain between 2 and 40 the temperature inside the outdoor enclosure must be main c tained between 2 and 40 C at all times during instrument operation APPENDIX K COMPLETE OUTDOOR ENCLOSURE Pace K 14 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor K 6 INSTALLING THE OPTIONAL SLIDING SHELF The user must install the control unit onto the sliding shelf Locate the following parts to install the sliding shelf 1 Shdin
302. n E This will copy the selected data to the Windows clipboard The data can then be pasted into another application NOTE Column heading information will be included with these data even if the entire column was not selected Section 10 RPComm SOFTWARE Pace 10 22 Revision B 000 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 10 2 4 2 GRAPHING DOWNLOADED DATA Follow these steps to graph the downloaded data 1 When in the Download Data screen Figure 10 16 ensure that the the Storage Data tab is selected 2 To select data place the cursor on the data cell where you wish to begin the selection Press and hold down the left mouse button and drag the cursor until all the desired data are selected 3 An alternate way to select data is to place the cursor on the col umn heading where you wish to begin the selection Press and hold down the left mouse button and drag the cursor across the columns until all the desired data is selected This will choose all the data in the selected columns 4 When the desired selection has been made select the Graph icon X This will send the selected data to the Download Graph tab 5 When in the Download Data screen select the Download Graph tab The data that were selected should now be graphed and will appear in the Download Graph screen Figure 10 19 The color key on the right portion of the Download Graph screen shows the variables being graphed and th
303. n the Series 1400a Monitor always measures the entire mass of the system using the equation M K f 4 At the end of the instrument s 30 minute flow and temperature equilibration period the monitor averages the frequency for a short period and uses this frequency to compute the baseline mass Until the next time the unit is reset or taken out of its data collection mode the frequency is sampled every two seconds and the system mass is calculated The difference between this mass and the baseline mass is the mass change of particulate matter collected on the filter cartridge Pace 1 14 Revision B 001 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 1 5 3 Mass Computation METHODOLOGY The calculation of the total mass accumulation on the filter mass rate and mass concentration are discussed in this section All of the formulas assume consistent units In the operating software unit conversions are made as required Several variables are used by the system software to compute mass data Gate_Time 2 T Ave 300 v Each TEOM instrument has a unique calibration constant K MR MC Ave 300 K calibration constant The sampling period seconds for each individual frequency measurement The effective time seconds over which frequency data points are smoothed to compute total mass Smoothing is done exponentially and this value represents the time required for 86 of a step change i
304. n B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor IMPORTANT The instrument will begin download data to the PC or other serial data recording device such as a data logger immediately after the user changes the RS232 Mode to Fast Store Out If you want to use this RS232 Mode be sure to turn on your PC or other serial data recording device connect it to the monitor and set it to retrieve data BEFORE setting the RS232 Mode to Fast Store Out When the user selects an RS232 Mode the abbreviation for the selected RS232 Mode displays on the status line of the Main screen Figure 9 21 The abbreviation for the current RS232 Mode is the first letter of the RS232 Mode s full name Figure 9 21 Main screen with RS232 Mode field A OK 4 highlighted Mass Conc gt 30 Min MC 01 Hr MC SEcTION 9 DATA INPUT AND OUTPUT Pace 9 27 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 9 4 2 Com Print SETTINGS SCREEN The Com Print Settings screen Figure 9 22 allows the user to determine the format of the data download when the monitor is in the Print On Line RS232 Mode Section 9 4 1 Although the name of the Print On Line Mode implies that the user would only use this RS232 mode when connecting to a serial printer this is not the case The user can set the monitor to download data to any type of serial data capture device using the Print On Line Mode Fig
305. n computed Operating Mode 3 The first total mass value has been computed but mass concen tration and mass rate are not yet available Operating Mode 4 The unit is fully opera tional in Operating Mode 4 and normally resides in this mode All mass values are being computed Pace 4 3 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor SECTION 4 SOFTWARE OVERVIEW Setup Mode When the unit is in this oper ating mode it continues to draw a sample flow and maintain operational temperatures but it does not collect any data Certain operating parameters such as temperatures and flow rates can only be changed in this mode because doing so during data collec tion Operating Modes 1 4 would affect the data Press the DATA STOP gt key to enter the Setup Mode while in any operating mode When the unit is in the Setup Mode S the user can change all of the system s param eters To leave the Setup Mode and start data collection press either the lt F1 gt or lt RUN gt key to return the monitor to Operating Mode 1 If the instrument remains in the Setup Mode for 5 minutes without the user press ing any key on the keypad the monitor will automatically return to Operating Mode 1 Stop All Mode When the unit is in this operating mode it suspends operation of the instrument In this mode data collec tion ceases flow rates in the system drop to zero and the output to the temperature
306. n on the four line display of the control unit in three different ways 1 Press the lt A O gt key on the monitor s keypad This will display the Set Analog Outputs screen Figure 9 12 When in the Set Analog Outputs screen press the lt STEP SCREEN gt key 2 When in the Main screen Figure 9 7 press the lt STEP SCREEN gt key to display the Menu screen Figure 9 8 When in the Menu screen press the up T and down lt J gt arrow keys to select Set Contact Closure and then press the lt ENTER gt key 3 Press the lt 2 gt key twice and then press the lt ENTER gt key The Set Contact Closure screen contains additional lines that cannot be seen when the screen first displays on the control unit s four line display Figure 9 18 Press the up lt T gt and down arrow keys to view the additional lines of the Set Contact Closure screen Figure 9 18 Set Contact Closure screen with SET CONTACT CLOSURE additional lines displayed Cont1 PRC gt Status NAND 7 00 Cont2 PRC Pres Drop SEcTION 9 DATA INPUT AND OUTPUT Pace 9 20 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor The Set Contact Closure screen contains the following information Contl PRC NAND 7 00 Cont2 PRC 90 00 This field contains the program register code PRC Appendix B of the variable whose current value is to be tested When in the Edit Mode use the up T and down
307. n screen with the current status OK 4 11 NU condition A highlighted Mass Conc gt 30 Min MC 01 Hr MC Whenever a status code other than OK is displayed on the Main screen the instrument automatically turns on the CHECK STATUS light Figure 7 2 on the front panel of the control unit Figure 7 2 Control unit with the CHECK STATUS light A highlighted CHECK E STATUS SEcTION 7 STATUS CODES Pace 7 1 Revision B 001 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor The status condition can consist of one or more of the following codes OK M Normal operation No current status conditions Frequency signal failure Control unit is not receiv ing a frequency signal Temperature s outside of operational bounds The range is 0 5 C for the air temperature and 0 1 C for the cap and case temperatures Flow s outside of operational bounds The range is 0 1 l min Exchange filter This status code becomes active when the filter loading percentage reaches 90 capacity Voltage low This status code becomes active when the AC voltage reading drops below 15 volts NOTE A frequency signal failure M status condition automatically triggers the temperature outside of opera tional bounds T status code because the monitor turns off the air and case temperature controls when the mass transducer does not output a frequency When in the Ma
308. n the screen first displays on the control unit s four line display Figure 12 15 Press the up T and down 1 arrow keys to view the additional lines of the KO Confirmation screen Figure 12 15 KO Confirma tion screen with additional lines displayed KO Confirm gt Filt Wght 287 53182 Audit KO Actual KO Diff 209 44188 0 07903 209 44186 9683 The KO Confirmation screen contains the following information 209 44188 Filt Wght 287 53182 209 44186 Audit KO Actual KO Diff SECTION 12 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE AND VERIFICATION PROCEDURES This field contains the current value of the calibra tion constant K0 This field contains the weight units of the pre weighed calibration verification filter This field contains the oscillating frequency units of the tapered element oscillating microbalance TEOM with a TEOM filter installed This field contains the oscillating frequency units of the tapered element oscillating microbalance TEOM without a TEOM filter installed This field contains the audit value of the calibration constant K This field contains the current calibration constant KO value that was entered into the monitor by R amp P or the user This field contains the percentage difference be tween the audit value and the currently entered K value Pace 12 13 Revision B 001 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 M
309. n the screen up or down one line at a time To move the cursor up six lines press the lt SHIFT gt key and hold it down while pressing the up T arrow key To move the cursor down six lines press the lt SHIFT gt key and hold it down while pressing the down arrow key To move the cursor to the first line of the screen press the lt CTRL gt key and hold it down while pressing the up T arrow key To move the cursor to the last line of the screen press the lt CTRL gt key and hold it down while pressing the down lt gt arrow key Figure 4 10 Keypad arrows SECTION 4 SOFTWARE OVERVIEW Pace 4 14 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure 4 11 Menu screen Figure 4 12 Menu screen with additional information lines displayed 4 3 3 Menu SCREEN The user can access all of the monitor s screens directly or indirectly through the Menu screen Figure 4 11 LISTING OF SCREENS gt Set Temps Flows Set Hardware View ACCU System You can display the Menu screen on the four line display of the control unit in two different ways 1 When in the Main screen Figure 4 3 press the lt STEP SCREEN gt key on the control unit s keypad 2 Press the lt 2 gt and lt 0 gt keys and then press the lt ENTER gt key The Menu screen contains more information lines than can be viewed at one time Press the down lt gt arrow key on the control u
310. n the monitor s keypad 2 When in the Main screen Figure 9 7 press the lt STEP SCREEN gt key to display the Menu screen Figure 9 8 When in the Menu screen press the up T and down 1 arrow keys to select Set Analog Outputs and then press the lt ENTER gt key 3 Press the 07 and lt 4 gt keys and then press the lt ENTER gt key The Set Analog Outputs screen contains additional lines that cannot be seen when the screen first displays on the control unit s four line display Figure 9 13 Press the up T and down 1 arrow keys to view the additional lines of the Set Analog Outputs screen SET ANALOG OUTPUTS Max Volt 10 VDC A01 Var 30 Min MC A01 Min 0 00 500 00 01 Hr MC 0 00 500 00 Tot Mass 0 00 5000 00 10 VDC SEcTION 9 DATA INPUT AND OUTPUT Pace 9 14 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor The Set Analog Outputs screen contains the following information Max Volt AOI Var AOI Min AO2 Max AO2 Var AO2 Min AO2 Max SEcTION 9 DATA INPUT AND OUTPUT This field contains the full scale voltage setting The range for this variable is 1 2 5 or 10 VDC If you are unable to select 5 or 10 VDC while setting this variable then you must change the setting for the Jumpers variable to 10 VDC This field contains the PRC value of analog output 1 that will be output Whenever a variable is as signed to one of the analog ou
311. n the raw total mass to be reflected in the smoothed total mass output i e 2 time constants Even if the TM Ave is changed by the user to an averaging time that is different from 300 seconds the 30 minute 1 hour 8 hour and 24 hour mass concentration averages are all computed based upon a TM Ave of 300 seconds that 1s calculated inter nally by the instrument The effective time seconds over which the differ entials between successive total mass data points are smoothed to compute mass rate and mass con centration The exponential smoothing function used to compute smoothed mass rate mass concentra tion is identical to that of the total mass The calibration constant of the system s mass transducer 1s determined by R amp P before the instru ment is shipped to the user This constant is unique for every TEOM system and is based upon the physical characteristics of the tapered element 2 x Gate Time TMAlpha A constant used in the total mass TM Ave SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION exponential smoothing routine Pace 1 15 Revision B 001 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION 2 x Gate_Time MR_MCAIpha A constant used in the mass rate_mass MR_MC Ave concentration smoothing routine After the Series 1400a Monitor is turned on or reset by pressing the lt F1 gt or lt Run gt key on the control unit the system software determines whether set point tempe
312. name When the user enters an MS DOS compliant file changed remotely name the PC will download the appropriate number of records and save them on its hard drive Also the PC will display a confirmation message that will show the number of data records that were saved to the appropriate file name Figure L 10 TEOMCOMM Main screen with data file name entered Ae Heel a efe A TEOMCOMM v1 41 Request the value of a register Modify the value of a register Set instrument mode Download storage Set storage pointer Fast Storage Out Exit program Enter filename to store data uniti1466 txt Fi Help F2 Comm Config F3 Set Station F4 Options NOTE After TEOMCOMM downloads the data records it will position the storage pointer after the last data record that was transmitted This will ensure that the previously trans mitted data records will not be transmitted again at the next data download Ifthe user wishes to transmit the data records a second time they must change the position of the storage pointer by using the Set Storage Pointer command Section L 3 5 APPENDIX L TEOMCOMM Sortware Pace L 15 Revision B 000 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor L 3 5 Set STORAGE Pointer This command allows the user to change the location of the storage pointer in the monitor s internal data storage buffer When the user selects this command the personal computer PC will display the cu
313. nc gt 30 Min MC 01 Hr MC The instrument always returns the display to numeric values whenever the user changes to a new screen on the four line display SECTION 4 SOFTWARE OVERVIEW Pace 4 20 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 4 3 7 NO ann YES Keys The lt NO gt and lt YES gt keys Figure 4 6 can serve two functions changing a YES NO value or eliminating unwanted negative concentration values 4 3 7 1 CHANGING A NO or YES VALUE Follow these steps to change the value of a NO or YES variable 1 Ensure that the appropriate screen is displayed on the control unit s four line display 2 Press the up 1 or down 1 arrows to move the cursor to the line that you want to edit or change 3 Press the EDIT key 4 Press the NO or YES key or press 0 for NO or 1 for YES If you pressed the NO or YES key to change the value you do not need to press the ENTER key after pressing the NO or YES key to save the change However if you pressed 0 for NO or 1 for YES to change the value you must press the ENTER key to save the change 4 3 7 2 CHANGING A NEGATIVE CONCENTRATION VALUE Follow these steps to eliminate or display a negative concentration value 1 Ensure that the appropriate screen is displayed on the control unit s four line display 2 Press the up 1 or down 1 a
314. nch long hex bolts O Pace 14 11 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure14 9 Optional ACCU stand hardware ACCU System Enclosure 14 2 3 2 ASSEMBLING THE OPTIONAL ACCU STAND Follow these steps to assemble the optional ACCU stand Figure 14 9 1 Place the right and left horizontal supports G and H on the floor so that the legs containing the holes are pointing upward The angles should be positioned on the floor so that the longer 2 inch legs are pointing toward each other 2 Attach the right vertical support A to the right horizontal support G using the J K L and M hardware The longer 2 inch leg of item A should be pointing inward 3 Attach the left vertical support B to the left horizontal support H using the J K L and M hardware The longer 2 inch leg of item B should be pointing inward Section 14 ACCU System Pace 14 12 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 4 Attach the cross support C to the vertical supports using the J K L and M hardware The cross support should be oriented as shown in Figure 14 9 and be attached to the ACCU enclosure side of the stand 5 Attach the right gusset D and left gussets E to the gusset support F using items the J K L and M hardware The gusset suppor
315. nd hold it down while pressing the up lt T gt arrow key To move the cursor to the last line of the screen press the lt CTRL gt key and hold it down while pressing the down lt gt arrow key Figure 8 5 View Storage screen with additional lines displayed 16 20 03 gt Mass Conc 30 Min MC Main Flow Frequency Noise Null Null Null VIEW STORAGE 2056 15 Jan 01 74 9 72 3 3 0 248 3217 5 438 The View Storage screen contains the following information 2056 16 20 03 15 Jan 01 SECTION 8 VIEWING STORED DATA This field contains the record number of the current physical data record displayed The instrument uses acircular storage buffer which means that when the monitor reaches the end of the data storage buffer fills up its internal data logger with data records it replaces the very first physical data record that was stored with a new data record This field contains the beginning sample time hh mm ss of the current data record displayed This field contains the date dd mmm yy of the current data record displayed Pace 8 3 Revision B 003 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Mass Conc 30 Min MC Main Flow Freqency Noise Null This field contains the value of a user defined stor age variable that was stored in the internal data logger If this field displays Null this means that the user did not define a variable to be stored
316. ndard and enter the necessary parameters Sec tion 6 Enter the appropriate values for the main SAMPLE and auxiliary BYPASS flow adjustment factors if necessary Section 6 Press the lt ENTER gt key to save your changes 9 Press the lt STEP SCREEN key to display the Set Hardware screen Figure 5 6 Figure 5 6 Set Hardware screen SET HARDWARE Cal Const 9605 Ser Num 22822 Inst Type AB SEcTION 5 Basic OPERATION Pace 5 3 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure 5 7 Set Storage screen Figure 5 8 Set RS 232 Mode screen 10 When in the Set Hardware screen check the unit s serial number and calibration constant Section 12 to ensure that they are correct If these values are correct go to step 11 If these values are not correct press the lt EDIT gt key and enter the correct pa rameters Then press the lt ENTER gt key to save your changes and go to step 11 11 Press the lt STORE gt key to display the Set Storage screen Figure 5 7 SET STORAGE Stor Varl gt Mass Conc Stor Var2 30 Min MC Stor Var3 01 Hr MC 12 When in the Set Storage screen select which variables will be stored in the monitor s internal data logger how many data fields exist per record and the interval at which records are stored Section 6 Press the ENTER key to save your changes 13 Press the RS232 key to display the Set RS 232 Mode screen F
317. ne of the analog output channels the program register codes PRCs for the variable s name minimum value and maximum value are all assigned to that channel In the case of a 10 VDC output the minimum value for the selected output variable is set to 0 VDC and the maximum value is set to 10 VDC AO3 Min This field contains the minimum value setting of the output PRC for analog output 3 AO3 Max This field contains the maximum value setting of the output PRC for analog output 3 Jumpers This field contains the jumper settings of the three analog output channels in the analog output hard ware In the default configuration the analog output jumpers are set to 10 VDC In most cases the value for the jumpers variable should remain at 10 VDC and no change must be made to the hardware In a typical installation one of the monitor s three analog outputs will be defined as the instantaneous mass concentration average PRC 8 and this output will be scaled for output over a range of 100 to 900 This output is transmitted to a data logger that is set for a 1 hour averaging time The instrument has an analog output resolution of 12 bits including the sign If the user wants the monitor to produce 1 or 2 VDC analog outputs the user can change the jumpers in the monitor to their alternate setting of 2 VDC to receive the best voltage resolution An appropriate analog output voltage setting depends on the input characteristics of the instr
318. nge Using the up and down arrow keys to change a variable is very convenient when chang ing a variable that is not entirely numeric For example when in the Set Analog Outputs screen Section 9 you can press the lt EDIT gt key the up T arrow key and then the ENTER key to change the value of AO2 Var from 01 Hr MC to 08 Hr MC It is generally a good practice to use the up 1 and down 1 arrow keys to change the value of alphanumeric variables such as the Month value in the Set Time screen and Max Volt and Jumpers values in the Set Analog Out puts screen In certain cases two editable variables may appear on the same line For example in the Set Temps Flows screen Section 6 the average and standard temperature variables T A S are on the same line If you want to change the value of these variables make sure the Set Temps Flows screen is displayed on the control unit s four line display When in the Set Temps Flows screen press the press up 1 and down 1 arrow keys to move the cursor to the T A S field and press the lt EDIT gt key A will appear next to both editable variables on the current display line Press the left lt lt gt or right 7 arrow keys to choose which variable to change This causes one of the two indicators to disappear leaving only one next to the selected variable Enter the new value by pressing the appropriate numbers
319. nit s keypad Figure 4 1 to view the additional information lines Figure 4 12 LISTING OF SCREENS gt Set Temps Flows Set Hardware View ACCU System View Analog Inputs Set Time Set Analog Outputs Set Contact Closure Set RS 232 Mode View Storage Set Passwords Analog Calibration KO Calibration FTS Calculation SECTION 4 SOFTWARE OVERVIEW Pace 4 15 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor The following screens can be accessed through the Menu screen Figure 4 12 Set Temps Flows screen Section 6 Set Hardware screen Section 6 View ACCU System screen Section 14 View Analog Inputs screen Section 9 Set Time screen Section 6 Set Analog Outputs screen Section 9 Set Contact Closure screen Section 9 Set RS 232 Mode screen Section 9 View Storage screen Section 8 Set Passwords screen Section 11 Analog Calibration screen Section 12 KO Confirmation screen Section 12 FTS Calculation screen Section 12 Follow these steps to view an instrument screen through the Menu screen 1 When in the Main screen Figure 4 3 press the lt STEP SCREEN gt key to display the Menu screen Figure 4 11 You also can press the 2 and 0 keys and then press the ENTER key to display the Menu screen 2 When in the Menu screen press the up 1 or down 1 arrow keys to move the cursor to the name of the screen that you want to view 3 Press the
320. nnection Com Port Settings Phone 6 Number x1 Direct 1 coni Addr CHex gt i Modem x1 COM2 IRQ Modem LATQEVUS 6k 1 48C18D25 C 1 Comk Init 7 68 F2 Save Changes APPENDIX L TEOMCOMM Sortware Pace L 6 Revision B 000 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 7 Ensure that the communication parameters are set properly for direct or modem communications Section L 4 depending on your setup If you want to change the communication param eters go to step 8 If you do not want to change the communication parameters go to step 11 8 Press the right lt gt and left lt lt gt arrow keys on the PC s key board to move the cursor to the desired parameter field 9 Press the up 1 and down lt gt arrow keys on the PC s key board to select the appropriate communication parameter 10 Press the spacebar on the PC s keyboard to select the new value for the communication parameter An asterisk will appear next to the newly selected communication parameter 11 Press the F2 key on the PC s keyboard The TEOMCOMM Main screen Figure L 1 will now display APPENDIX L TEOMCOMM SorrwARE Pace L 7 Revision B 000 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor L 3 TEOMCOMM Main Screen The TEOMCOMM Main screen Figure L 1 contains a list of commands that are available in the TEOMCOMM software Press the up lt T gt an
321. nnel by one Press the left arrow key to decrease the chan nel by one To increase the channel by four press the lt SHIFT gt key and hold it down while pressing the right lt gt arrow key To decrease the channel by four press the lt SHIFT gt key and hold it down while pressing the left arrow key To display ACCU channel 8 press the lt CTRL gt key and hold it down while pressing the right lt gt arrow key To dis play ACCU channel 1 press the lt CTRL gt key and hold it down while pressing the left lt gt arrow key Pace 14 20 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 1 gt Mass Conc 100 0 1000 0 2 Curr Ti Da 600 0 600 0 3 Null Section 14 ACCU System This field contains the program register code PRC Appendix B of the first variable whose value is to be tested in ACCU channel 1 If the user specifies fewer than four conditions for a given channel the user should enter a 0 in the PRC variable field s that is not being used This field contains the minimum permissible value of the first PRC variable in ACCU channel 1 This field contains the maximum permissible value of the first PRC variable in ACCU channel 1 This field contains the program register code PRC Appendix B of the second variable whose value is to be tested in ACCU channel 2 If the user specifies fewer than four conditions for a given channel the u
322. ns the setting and current value of the auxiliary BYPASS FLOW flow rate l min The default setting is 13 67 l min and can be ad justed when the monitor is in the Setup Mode The current value can not be edited This field contains the average and standard tem perature C settings The default setting for both parameters is 25 C and can be adjusted when the monitor is in the Setup Mode The user can use these values to set the unit s volumetric flow control Sections 6 3 1 and 6 3 2 and to determine how the unit reports the mass concentration levels Sections 6 3 3 and 6 3 4 If the instrument has been used before and the user wants to return it to its original settings the user should first re initialize the unit Section 13 before setting the unit s reporting stan dards This field contains the average and standard atmo spheric pressure atm settings The default setting for both parameters is atm and can be adjusted when the monitor is in the Setup Mode The user can use these values to set the unit s volumetric flow control Sections 6 3 1 and 6 3 2 and to determine how the unit reports the mass concentration levels Sections 6 3 3 and 6 3 4 Ifthe instrument has been used before and the user wants to return it to its original settings the user should first re initialize the unit Section 13 before setting the unit s report ing standards This field contains the current ambient temperature C at the sit
323. nt Particulate PM 10 Monitor PROGRAM REGISTER CODES 000 024 Nal NA WA NA totediabe ur N e p N op wa Na ec ay Day used for setting time date d N o2 E EH 0 0 A A A A A A A A N A not editable N A 0 0 A A A 0 0 0 0 z z gt gt 1 zZ gt M O2 AlLnl nl nln n n a 010 Mass Rate Mass Conc Averaging Time sec 3 2 3 4 S 3 2 3 4 S 300 011 Total Mass Averaging Time sec 2 14 400 300 gt 012 Frequency current oscillating frequency N 009 Total Mass averaging time set by PRC 011 014 Operating Mode O S 1 2 3 4 5 X 0 5 N A not editable gt z gt N N N N O2 w O2 O2 n n n n n n qe qe qe qe Nn Nn Nn n x1 xX xX Ps not editable 005 Month used for setting time date O Jan mo 9 9 N A not editable ois 6 digis L2345 X 016 6 digis 2 3 45 017 6 digis uis 6 digis EE 019 100 100 i 0 25 4 008 Mass Conc averaging time set by PRC 010 9 45 M3 Ty M Ambient 80 Ferne IDE APPENDIX B PROGRAM REGISTER CODES Pace B 3 Revision B 001 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor PROGRAM REGISTER CODES 025 049 Los acne mesi e m s 5 s a v e 3 Len nere eite wm oss 3 23 5 en pem nett fa 0 3 Les ia iw niens tow oaran e o
324. nual for the other instrument 29 After the connection has been verified disconnect the modem connection to the instrument 30 Obtain a serial switching device from a commercial manufac turer R amp P has found that devices manufactured by Black Box Corp work properly with its instrumentation although other devices should function properly The part number and cost of the device will vary depending on how many serial devices the user wishes to connect to it 31 From the serial switching device s instruction manual determine the command codes required to trigger activation of each serial port being used 32 Unplug the serial cable and its adapter s from the modem and plug the cable assembly into the serial switching device Follow the instructions provided with the serial switching device and connect it to the modem APPENDIX H MopEM COMMUNICATIONS Pace H 17 Revision B 000 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 33 When in the Connection List screen Figure H 1 select the name of one of the connections used to verify the modem connection above and then choose the Edit Selected Connection icon The Connection Type screen will then display Figure H 2 34 When in the Connection Type screen ensure that the correct instrument type is selected and select the Settings button to display the AK Protocol Setup screen Figure H 3 35 Examine the list of command codes on the righ
325. o be edited Then press the lt EDIT gt key on the monitor s keypad to enter the Edit Mode A will appear on the screen in place of the gt cursor Edit the system parameter and then press the lt ENTER gt key to save the change Press the lt ESC gt key to exit the Edit Mode while in any screen In certain cases the instrument will beep when the lt EDIT gt key is pressed The monitor will beep for three different reasons the selected variable cannot be changed or edited the selected variable can be edited only when the monitor is in the Setup Mode the monitor is in the low lock or high lock mode Section 12 If the monitor is displaying a screen that can be edited and the monitor beeps when the user presses lt EDIT gt key the user must press the DATA STOP gt key to enter Setup Mode before attempting to edit a variable Ifthe monitor is in the low lock or high lock mode Section 12 and the user attempts to edit a variable by pressing the lt EDIT gt key the cursor will not change to a and the monitor will not beep New values can be entered in one of two ways Direct keypad entry Display the screen that has the operating parameters that you want to change or edit Press the lt EDIT gt key Enter a new value directly by pressing the number keys including the minus sign and decimal point keys ifnecessary Figure 4 5 Then press the ENTER key to save the change If you make a mistake while enter
326. o obtain volumetric flow under the test conditions You do not need to adjust your flow meter for temperature and pressure if you are using a volumetric flow meter 20 Set the F Main field to 0 5 l min and observe the actual reading on the flow meter After approximately 10 seconds adjust poten tiometer R101 Figure J 5 on the mass flow controller board until the flow is correct within 0 03 l min 21 Set the F Main field to 4 5 l min and observe the actual reading on the flow meter After approximately 10 seconds adjust poten tiometer R105 Figure J 5 on the mass flow controller board until the flow is correct within 0 03 l min 22 Repeat steps 20 21 until both conditions are met 23 Set the F Main field to its operational rate step 12 and observe the actual reading on the flow meter After approximately 10 seconds adjust potentiometer R101 on the mass flow controller board until the flow is correct within 0 03 l min 24 Connect the reference flow meter to the BYPASS FLOW port located on the back panel of the control unit Do not attach the flow meter to the large bypass in line filter and do not attach any system components to the air input side of the flow meter NOTE If a mass flow meter is being used its reading must be adjusted for temperature and pressure to obtain volumetric flow under the test conditions No adjustment is necessary in the case of a volumetric flow meter 25 Set the F Aux field to 2
327. o step 4 If your personal computer is equipped with a 25 pin connector go to step 5 4 Plug the other end of the 9 to 9 pin computer cable into the 9 pin RS232 port of your PC Go to step 8 5 Locate the 9 to 25 pin computer cable adapter 6 Plug the 9 to 25 pin computer cable adapter into the 25 pin port on your PC 7 Plug the other end of the 9 to 9 pin computer cable into the 9 to 25 pin computer cable adapter Go to step 8 NOTE Do not use the 9 to 25 pin modem cable to connect the control unit with the PC The 9 to 25 pin modem cable is configured for use only with a modem 8 Ensure that the Main screen is displayed on the control unit s four line display 9 Press the lt F2 gt key on the control unit s keypad until an N None Mode displays in the RS232 Mode field of the Main screen s status line Figure 10 1 The instrument must remain in the None Mode while executing the computer routines described in this section RS232 Mode field OK 4 11 Mass Conc gt 30 Min MC 01 Hr MC SEcTION 10 RPComm SOFTWARE Pace 10 2 Revision B 000 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 10 2 Usinc RPComm NOTE This section assumes that RPComm was installed in the default locations when the installation program was executed Appendix D 10 2 1 STARTING RPComm NOTE The Windows operating system screens shown in this section are from the Windows 98 operating system
328. oad the new RPComm program 2 Anew PRC list can be downloaded from the website and installed on your computer This will update the PRC list within RPComm without requiring the user to reinstall the entire program Follow these steps to update the PRC list within RPComm 1 Go to the RPComm directory on your computer s hard drive and look at the files The PRC lists are located in this directory Deter mine which PRC list revision you have in your RPComm directory The file name for the PRC lists have the following format Rp instrument n nnn where instrument instrument model 2000FRM 2025 1400 or 5400 nnn PRC list revision 2 Go to the Software to Download area of the website If there is a new PRC list available for the TEOM 1400a Monitor it will be listed on this web page APPENDIX D INSTALLING NEw SvsrEM SOFTWARE Pace D 7 Revision B 003 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 3 There may be multiple PRC lists on this page one for each instru ment that RPComm supports Determine if there is an updated PRC list for the TEOM 1400a Monitor Select the appropriate PRC list and save it to a file NOTE Be sure to remember what folder the PRC list file is saved in 4 Disconnect from the World Wide Web 5 If RPComm is running exit the program 6 Copy the downloaded PRC list to the RPComm directory on your computer s hard drive The next time you execute RPComm the program
329. ogram is equipped with an Auto Start Autorun function This means that every time that you turn on your PC the RPComm software application will automatically begin running If youclose the RPComm software application to use other software you may start it manually from the Start menu APPENDIX D INSTALLING NEw SvsrEM SOFTWARE Pace D 6 Revision B 003 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor D 2 4 UPDATING THE List oF PROGRAM REGISTER Copes INRPComm NOTE Refer to Section 10 for further information on using the RPComm software program All TEOM 1400 instruments have a list of system variables that is specific to that type of unit A system variable is any value that is entered into calculated by or measured by the instrument This list of system variables is called the program register code PRC list When the monitor s software is modified the PRC list often is affected usually new PRCs must be added for software enhancement If there are new PRCs then the PRC list must be updated within the RPComm software program This can be accom plished by 1 The entire RPComm program can be downloaded from the Thermo Scientific website and installed on the computer as described in Section D 2 However this is necessary only if the revision number of the RPComm software program has changed Changes to the unit s operating software do not always require that you downl
330. ol unit has a scrollable four line display that shows the current values of computed data Pace 1 9 Revision B 001 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure 1 2 Schematic diagram of flow system Total system flow rate 16 67 l min lt PM 10 inlet TEOM Bypass flow line P Sensor unit Mass transducer Air tubes Main flow controller 3 l min Large TEOM in line filters X al ami Auxiliary flow controller 13 67 l min SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION Pace 1 10 Revision B 001 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION 1 5 1 THe Flow System Figure 1 2 shows the flow of the sample stream through the Series 1400a Monitor The particle size separation at 10 um diameter takes place as the sample proceeds through the PM 10 inlet The flow splitter separates the total flow 16 7 l min into two parts a main flow of 3 l min that enters the sensor unit through the sample tube and the auxiliary bypass flow of 13 7 l min The main flow passes through the exchangeable filter in the mass transducer Figure 1 3 and then proceeds through an air tube and in line filter to a mass flow controller The bypass flow is filtered in the large bypass in line filter before it enters a second mass flow controller A single pump provides the vacuum necessary to draw the sample stream through the system Pace 1 11 Revision B 00
331. ollection criteria for each channel starting at channel 1 and determines whether that criteria are met If the criteria are met the system activates the channel for the next 10 seconds If the criteria for channel are not met the instrument performs the same evaluation for the SEcrioN 14 ACCU System Pace 14 4 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor next channel This process continues through the successive channels in the ACCU System until the monitor finds a channel whose operating conditions are currently met If none of the channels meet the conditions for operation the monitor diverts the flow is diverted through the internal bypass flow line for that 10 second period If the monitor has disqualified a channel because the pressure drop of the installed cartridge causes the bypass flow to fall outside of the acceptable limits the instrument skips over this channel when evaluating the cartridges for operation For example if channels 1 2 and 3 fail to meet the criteria for activation and channel 4 has been disqualified because of a high pressure drop the monitor evaluates channel 5 after it evaluates channel 3 Because channel 1 is always evaluated first this cartridge can be used to override the settings of the remaining channels For example if channels 2 through 8 are defined by time of day e g midnight to 3 00 a m channel 1 could be used to capture all episodes in which the
332. omm SOFTWARE If a previous version of RPComm has been loaded onto your personal computer PC you must remove it before uploading a new or updated version of software Use the Add Remove Control Panel function on your PC to remove the old program D 2 2 OsrAmiNG RPComm INSTALLATION FILES The RPComm installation files can be downloaded from Thermo Scientific s Web site Users must log in and obtain a password to download new software Go to http www tagteam com TagTeam Client login asp D 2 3 INSTALLING RPComm Onto A PERSONAL Computer PC Follow these steps to install RPComm onto a PC 1 Exit all Windows programs that you currently have running on your PC 2 The software program rpcomm exe as downloaded from the company website is a self executable file and will install itself onto the computer when executed Double click on the file name to start the installation process 3 Follow the instructions in the RPComm InstallShield Wizard screen to complete the installaton NOTE If your PC displays an Overwrite Protection screen that asks you to choose whether you would like overwrite any installation files that may already be on your computer select the Yes button 4 The RPComm InstallShield Wizard screen with an InstallShield Wizard Completed message will display You do not need to restart your computer to use RPComm It is now available in your PC s Program menu NOTE The RPComm pr
333. on or other user defined averaging time 24 Hr MC 24 hour average mass concentra tion TM Total mass accumulation on the TEOM filter since entering Operating Mode 2 Status The status is expressed as a summation of the currently active codes where 0 no sta tus conditions 1 M 2 T 4 F and 8 X To turn the REPORT function on enter REPORT ON after the cursor and then press the lt Enter gt key on your PC s keyboard If you turn on the REPORT function more than once per day the latest data are appended to the end ofthe TEOMmmdd RPT file To turn the REPORT function off enter REPORT OFF after the cursor and then press the lt Enter gt key on your PC s keyboard Pace M 17 Revision B 000 Operating Manual Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor This page left intentionally blank APPENDIX M TEOMPLUS SorrwARE Pace M 18
334. on B 000 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor H 3 SETTING UP THE SERIAL SWITCHING DEVICE For applications where two or more R amp P instruments are installed at the same site a serial switching device can be installed to allow communications with each instrument including non R amp P serial devices using one phone line The serial switching device enables communication to occur with multiple instruments includ ing non R amp P serial devices with the use of only one phone line Command codes can be sent over the phone line to trigger a particular serial port and therefore allow communication with the connected instrument RPComm can be configured to operate with these devices and send the required command codes H 3 1 MuctipLte R amp P InstRUMENTS OF THE SAME MopeEL Refer to this section if you are connecting two or more R amp P instruments of the same model to a serial switching device Follow these steps to set up a serial switching device 1 Set up the unit for modem communications Section H 1 Verify that modem communications to each instrument are successful before adding the serial switching device 2 Obtain a serial switching device from a commercial manufac turer R amp P has found that devices manufactured by Black Box Corp work well with its instrumentation although other devices also should function properly The part number and cost of the device will vary depending on how man
335. on B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor This page left intentionally blank SECTION 11 PASsworD PROTECTION Pace 11 6 Revision B 001 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Section 12 Routine Maintenance and Verification Procedures This section describes the routine maintenance and verification procedures for the Series 1400a Monitor 12 1 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES Maintenance Procedures Interval Sample inlet Clean the sample inlet each time that you exchange a TEOM filter Appendix G Large in line filters Replace the large in line filters every 6 months or as necessary Section 12 1 1 Air inlet system Clean the air inlet system once a year or as neces sary Section 12 1 2 Sample pump Rebuild the sample pump once every 18 months or as necessary The pump rebuild kit 59 008630 contains instructions for rebuilding the pump that was shipped with the Series 1400a Monitor These maintenance intervals are guidelines Requirements for routine maintenance are site specific and may vary from one location to another SECTION 12 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE AND VERIFICATION PROCEDURES Pace 12 1 Revision B 001 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor v The instrument must be operated with both large in line filters installed to avoid contamination of the flow controllers Figure 12 1 Replacing the larg
336. on List screen Figure 10 3 select the Display Connection Properties button The AK Protocol Setup screen will display Figure 10 11 Station Setup Station Number 42 052 Channel Number 0754 048 OK Cancel ai Comm Setup gt gt Delay Time SN Phone Number Connection Command 2 When in the AK Protocols Setup screen select the Comm Setup button The Properties screen with the telephone setup infor mation will display Figure 10 12 in front of the AK Protocols Setup screen SEcTION 10 RPComm SOFTWARE Pace 10 13 Revision B 000 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Fue duis opens screen with telephone setup information Connection Country region Enter the area code without the long distance prefix Area code Phone number Connect using cow M Configure Cancel 3 Select the Configure button The Properties screen with COM connection information Figure 10 13 will display Figure 10 13 Properties screen with COM connec tion information Connection Bits per second io Data bits e Parity None Stop bits ho xz Flow contro RATS v Restore Defaults Cancel SEcTION 10 RPComm SOFTWARE Pace 10 14 Revision B 000 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 4 When in the Properties screen with COM connection informat
337. on and sample programming It also describes the unit s operational modes Do not attempt the procedures described in this section until you have read Sections 2 5 Appendix A contains all of the instrument s screens and Appendix B contains a complete list of the monitor s program register codes PRCs 6 1 Mobes or OPERATION The Series 1400a Monitor displays its current operating mode in the upper left hand corner of the Main screen Figure 6 1 Figure 6 1 Main screen with operating mode field OK 4 11 A highlighted Mass Conc gt 30 Min MC 01 Hr MC The unit s operating modes Figure 6 2 are defined as follows SECTION 6 SOFTWARE SETUP Operating Mode 1 Operating Mode 2 This operating mode indicates that the unit has not begun to compute mass values because the monitor s temperatures and flow rates are stabilizing The temperatures and flow rates must remain within a very narrow range of values Section 6 3 for 30 minutes before the instrument enters Operating Mode 2 The monitor always starts in Operating Mode 1 when it is turned on or reset Press the lt F 1 gt or lt RUN gt key to reset the instrument from any operating mode This action always causes the in strument to enter Operating Mode 1 This operating mode indicates that the unit has begun to collect data records but the monitor has not yet computed its first total mass value Pace 6 1 Revision B 003 Operating Manual
338. onitor 12 2 1 2 VERIFYING THE CALIBRATION CONSTANT Tools Needed Mass calibration verification kit 59 002107 Pre weighed calibration filter Filter exchange tool Dessicant for humidity protection Humidity indicator Materials None NOTE Refill kits for the mass calibration verification kit are available from R amp P 59 002019 Follow these steps to confirm the system s K calibration 1 When in the Main screen Figure 12 13 press the lt DATA STOP gt key on the monitor s keypad 2 Press the lt STEP SCREEN gt key The Menu screen will display on the four line display 12 14 3 When in the Menu screen press the up 1 and down lt gt arrow keys to select K0 Confirmation 4 Press the ENTER key The KO Confirmation screen will dis play Figure 12 12 You also can display the K0 Confirmation screen by pressing 1 7 and then the ENTER key 5 Press the EDIT key 6 Press the up and down arrow keys to select the Filt Wght field 7 Using the monitor s keypad enter the weight of the pre weighed calibration verification filter in the Filt Wght field 8 Press the F1 or the RUN key 9 Wait for the oscillating frequency value on the KO Confirm line to stabilize 10 When the frequency stabilizes press the lt FIRST LAST gt key to record the frequency f 11 Install the pre weighed calibration filter in the instrument Section 3 and wait for the frequ
339. or using PalmOS based handheld personal computers Refer to the Palm Pilot PC Operating Manual for instructions on using the PalmOS based handheld computer to download data from the Series 1400a Monitor SEcTION 9 DATA INPUT AND OUTPUT PAGE 9 23 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure 9 19 Set RS 232 Mode screen Figure 9 20 Set RS 232 Mode screen with additional lines displayed 9 4 1 Set RS 232 Move Screen The Set RS232 Mode screen Figure 9 19 allows the user to select an RS232 mode to download the unit s stored data records SET RS 232 MODE Mode None gt None Print On Line Youcan display the Set RS232 Mode screen on the four line display of the control unit in three different ways 1 Press the lt RS232 gt key on the monitor s keypad 2 When in the Main screen Figure 9 7 press the lt STEP SCREEN gt key to display the Menu screen Figure 9 8 When in the Menu screen press the up T and down lt gt arrow keys to select Set RS 232 Mode and then press the lt ENTER gt key 3 Press the 07 and 5 keys and then press the lt ENTER gt key The Set RS232 Mode screen contains additional lines that cannot be seen when the screen first displays on the control unit s four line display Figure 9 20 Press the up T and down 1 arrow keys to view the additional lines of the Set RS232 Mode screen SET RS 232 MODE Mo
340. ou can convert the original PM 10 inlet to a modified PM 10 inlet by using the PM 10 Inlet Conversion Kit 55 004747 Conversion instructions are included with the kit SECTION 2 SYSTEM INSTALLATION Pace 2 47 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure 2 71 left Original PM 10 inlet 16 7 l min Figure 2 72 right Modi fied PM 10 inlet 16 7 l min Figure 2 73 left Sharp cut cyclone SCC PM 2 5 second stage inlet 16 7 l min Figure 2 74 right Sharp cut cyclone SCC PM 1 second stage inlet 16 7 l min 2 4 5 1 INSTALLING A SAMPLE INLET Follow these steps to install a sample inlet onto the sampling system setup 1 Choose an appropriate sample inlet for your sampling needs Figures 2 71 2 72 2 73 2 74 2 75 and 2 76 o Ww In N P SECTION 2 SYSTEM INSTALLATION Pace 2 48 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure 2 75 left Old style PM 1 inlet 16 7 l min Figure 2 76 right U S os TSP inlet 16 7 l min B installed onto a flow splitter 2 Slide the sample inlet onto the top of the flow splitter until it stops Figure 2 77 Ensure that the entrance to the sample inlet Figure 2 78 is 1 8 to 2 1 m above the roof Figure 2 77 left Flow splitter with an installed modified PM 10 air inlet A highlighted Figure 2 78 right
341. ould enter the date and time as one value for the beginning and ending sample times in the minimum and maximum parameters For example if you wanted to sample from 6 00 a m to 6 00 p m on June 3 you would enter 6030600 month day hour minute in the minimum permissible value field and 6031800 in the maximum permissible value field Figure 14 20 SET ACCU SYSTEM 1 1 gt Curr Ti Da 6030600 6031800 2 Null 0 If you wanted to sample from 10 00 p m on March 17 to 10 00 a m on March 18 you would enter 3172200 in the minimum permissible value field and 3181000 in the maximum permissible value field If you wanted to sample for a complete 24 hour period such as midnight to midnight on December 31 you would enter 12310000 in the minimum permissible value field and 1010000 in the maximum permissible value field Section 14 ACCU System Pace 14 25 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 14 4 1 3 ACCU SawPLING BY CONCENTRATION LEVEL To define an ACCU channel to be active only when the short term mass concentration is higher than 100 you would first enter PRC 8 Mass Conc in one of the PRC variable fields of the channel Section 14 4 Then you would enter 100 in the minimum permissible value field and an arbitrarily large value that 1s not expected to be exceeded such as 10000 in the maximum permissible value field
342. our modem is equipped with a 25 pin connector go to step 12 Install the null modem adapter onto the 9 pin connector on your modem Go to step 14 Attach a 9 to 25 pin serial adapter 06 005895 0925 to the null modem adapter NOTE Not all 9 to 25 pin serial adapters can be used in this application because pin connections are not standard The 9 to 25 pin serial adapter 06 005895 0925 available from R amp P is acceptable for use with the Series 1400a Monitor APPENDIX H MopEM COMMUNICATIONS Pace H 15 Revision B 000 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 13 Install the 9 to 25 pin serial adapter onto the 25 pin connector on your modem Go to step 14 14 Attach a phone line to the modem The modem is now ready to communicate with the monitor 15 When in the Connection List screen Figure H 1 select the name of one of the connections used to verify the direct connection above and choose the Edit Selected Connection icon The Connection Type screen will then display Figure H 2 16 When in the Connection Type screen ensure that the correct instrument type is selected and select the Settings button to display the AK Protocol Setup screen Figure H 3 17 Place your cursor on the small black down arrow located to the right of the white box in the top left hand corner of the AK Proto col Setup screen A menu will display Figure H 4 Select the appropriate modem connection
343. ow audit adapter kit 57 001243 Materials None Follow these steps to perform a flow audit 1 Press the lt F1 gt or lt RUN gt key on the control unit s keypad NOTE Any data generated by the instrument during this audit procedure are invalid Therefore do not runa flow audit procedure during a valid sampling run 2 Remove the sample inlet from the flow splitter Figure 5 11 SEcTION 5 Basic OPERATION Pace 5 10 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 3 Locate the flow audit adapter Figure 5 12 Figure 5 12 Flow audit adapter with valve open 4 Ensure that the valve of the flow audit adapter is in its open posi tion Figure 5 12 5 Install the flow audit adapter onto the flow splitter Figure 5 13 Figure 5 13 Flow audit adapter installed on flow splitter with valve open SEcTION 5 Basic OPERATION Pace 5 11 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 6 When in the Main screen press the up 1 and down 1 arrow keys until the Main Flow SAMPLE FLOW and Aux Flow BYPASS FLOW lines display on the screen Figure 5 14 These values represent the actual volumetric flows as measured by the monitor s flow controllers Figure 5 14 Main screen with Main Flow and Aux OK 4 Flow lines displayed Main Flow Aux Flow 7 Confirm that these flows are within 2 of their set poin
344. ow channel in the sequence Set the minimum permissible value field to the length oftime seconds that you want each flow channel to be active Then set the maximum permissible value field to 0 You also may enter additional conditions to define each channel in conjunction with the Time variable For example you could set ACCU channel 1 to sample for 1 hour without any additional conditions Figure 14 28 Then you could set channel 2 to sample for 1 hour only if the 30 minute mass concentration average exceeds 100 ug m Figure 14 29 SET ACCU SYSTEM 1 gt Time 2 Null Section 14 ACCU System Pace 14 31 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure 14 29 Set ACCU System screen additional SET ACCU SYSTEM 2 lines displayed with 1 gt Time 3600 channel 2 set for sequential 0 sampling 2 30 Min MC 100 00 9999 00 0 0 0 0 If the 30 minute mass concentration average does not meet this minimum value the ACCU System will skip channel 2 and cycle to channel 3 Figure 14 30 where it will sample for 60 minutes again without additional conditions After the ACCU System has exposed all of the flow channels for their predefined lengths of time the instrument will return to channel 1 and begin the sampling sequence again Figure 14 30 Set ACCU System screen additional SET ACCU SYSTEM lines displayed with 1 gt Time channel 3 set for sequential sampling
345. ownload should begin After the data have been downloaded the unit sets the storage pointer to the end of the internal data storage buffer so that the next time data are downloaded only new data records are transmitted However if the user wants to download specific records for example from a particular date they can change the position of the storage pointer within the data storage buffer Section 10 2 3 1 Also you can move the storage pointer to re download data that has been lost from your personal computer PC or to skip forward to download more recent data records NOTE The Windows operating system screens shown in this section are from the Windows 98 operating system These screens may vary slightly from your computer s screens if you are operating RPComm under other Windows operating systems 10 2 3 1 SETTING THE STORAGE POINTER POSITION Follow these steps to set the storage pointer position 1 When in the Connection List screen Figure 10 3 highlight the desired connection in the Connection List screen and then select the Connection icon This will display the Download Data screen Figure 10 10 2 When in the Download Data screen select the Storage Pointers tab The Storage Pointer screen Figure 10 14 will display Section 10 RPComm SOFTWARE Pace 10 16 Revision B 000 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor dra 10 14 Storage 1400ab Site 11400 Version 3 012 Inst
346. peratures IMPORTANT If you have installed the ambient tempera ture sensor on the monitor you must enter 99 in the average temperature field and 9 in the average pressure field If the user installs the instrument at an altitude that is different from sea level the user must set the average pressure to a value other than 1 atm so that the instrument can maintain its proper volumetric flow within acceptable limits When the user enters an average pressure of less than 1 atm it reduces the instrument s mass flow rate but ultimately maintains the appropriate volumetric flow for the altitude Similarly average daily temperatures may not always be 25 C In such cases the user must adjust the average temperature seasonally to account for changes in mean temperatures If the user enters an average temperature of less than 25 C in the system the mass flow through the sampling head increases so that the proper volumetric flow remains within acceptable limits NOTE Ifthe user wants to use the instrument for U S EPA equivalent PM 10 measurements they must ensure that the standard temperature is set to 25 C and the standard pressure is set to 1 atm Section 6 3 4 regardless of the values that they entered for the average temperature and average pressure settings SECTION 6 SOFTWARE SETUP Pace 6 13 Revision B 003 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor The instrument s mass flow contro
347. placement inside the outdoor enclosure 2 PM 10 Inlet 1400a Control Unit Air Conditioner 1400a Sensor Unit Vacuum Pump APPENDIX K COMPLETE OUTDOOR ENCLOSURE Pace K 2 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor K 2 INSTALLING THE SAMPLE PUMP The outdoor enclosure includes a package containing the necessary hardware to install the sample pump Follow these steps to install the pump in the outdoor enclosure 1 Attach the mounting base of the sample pump to the pump mounting legs Figure K 2 using the 8 32 binder head screws and 8 lock washers Figure K 2 Sample pump installation 1 10 32 BINDER HEAD SCREW 6 2 RUBBER VIBRATION MOUNTS 7 8 LOCK WASHER 8 10 LOCK WASHER 3 SPACERS 4 10 FENDER WASHER 9 PUMP MOUNTING BASE 5 10 32 HEX HEAD SCREW 10 PUMP MOUNTING LEGS 8 32 BINDER HEAD SCREW APPENDIX K COMPLETE OUTDOOR ENCLOSURE Pace K 3 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 2 Fasten the spacers onto the male end of the rubber vibration mounts Figure K 2 Be sure to place a 10 fender washer be tween the spacers and the rubber vibration mounts 3 Fasten the vibration mount assemblies to the pump mounting legs using the 10 32 binder head screws and 10 lock washers Figure K 2 4 Insert the entire pump assembly into the enclosure s pump com partment 5 Ensure t
348. plastic or another protective material Soapy water alcohol or freon solution Soft brush Materials None Follow these steps to clean the air inlet system 1 Turn off the control unit 2 Open the door of the sensor unit Figures 12 2 and 12 3 Figure 12 2 Sensor unit Rupprecht amp Patashnick Co Inc TEOM Particulate Mass Monitor Series 1400 Sensor Unit SECTION 12 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE AND VERIFICATION PROCEDURES Pace 12 3 Revision B 001 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure 12 3 Sensor unit with door open 3 With the mass transducer in its closed upright position locate the thermistor in the cap of the mass transducer Figure 12 3 4 Press on the metal locking clip of the thermistor and pull it out of the cap 5 Locate the silver handle on the front of the mass transducer Figure 12 4 Note that there is a shipping latch in the middle of this handle SECTION 12 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE AND VERIFICATION PROCEDURES Pace 12 4 Revision B 001 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure 12 4 Mass trans ducer in the closed position with the silver handle A and black knob B high lighted 6 Grasp the silver handle and move the shipping latch upward with your thumb Figure 12 5 Figure 12 5 Lifting the shipping latch on the silver handle gl 7 Pull down on the silver handle Figure 12 6 Pace
349. ple tube extension highlighted Sample tube from flow splitter Figure K 11 right Sample tube from flow splitter with 3 Quick connect sample tube extension S inserted into the quick connect fitting Sample tube extension 16 Insert the sample inlet located on the top of the sensor unit into the quick connect fitting on the bottom sample tube of the flow splitter Figure K 11 You may cut the sample tube of the flow splitter as necessary however you must ensure that the cut ends of the sample tube are beveled and free of any sharp edges or burrs APPENDIX K COMPLETE OUTDOOR ENCLOSURE Pace K 12 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Y Unplug the air conditioner during the winter months at locations where the ambient tempera ture drops below 10 C K 4 ADJUSTING THE AIR CONDITIONER The outdoor enclosure is delivered with a McLean Midwest CR29 air conditioner installed The temperature setting of this unit must be adjusted before operating the enclosure Follow these steps to adjust the air conditioner 1 Ensure that the air conditioner is not operating Unplug the air conditioner from its power source 2 Loosen the three fasteners located on the outer cover of the air conditioner 3 The user can adjust the temperature control by turning the knob clockwise to increase the temperature setting and counter clockwise to decrease the te
350. pon flow rate setpoint con verted to EPA standard temperature and pressure The instrument updates the longer term mass concentration averages at the following times 30 minute average 30MC every half hour on the half hour 1 hour average 01MC every hour on the hour 8 hour average O8MC every hour on the hour 24 hour average 24MC every hour on the hour After the instrument has been turned on or reset these longer term averages are equal to 0 until a complete period s data has been collected Sampling 1s performed by the Series 1400a Monitor using a variable mass flow rate that maintains a constant volumetric flow rate appropriate to the PM 10 sampling inlet Because this flow rate is controlled by mass flow controllers MFCs the mass flow rate must be adjusted for temperature and pressure to maintain the appropriate volumetric flow rates within acceptable limits The mass flow controllers MFCs in the Series 1400a Monitor are internally calibrated for a standard temperature and pressure of 0 C and 1 Atmosphere 1013 2 millibars or 760 mm Hg The user must enter the seasonal average temperature Ave Temp and average barometric pressure Ave Pres at the measurement site to allow the instrument to sample at the correct volumetric flow rate Section 6 Alternately the user can set up the instrument to automatically measure the ambient temperature and pressure using hardware supplied with the unit The microprocessor calculates
351. procedures set forth in this section specify the use ofa volumetric flow meter Ifa non volumetric flow meter such as a mass flow meter is used you must convert the flow meter s indicated flow rate to a volumetric flow rate using the local temperature and pressure conditions at the flow meter J 1 Overview OF CALIBRATION PROCEDURES Calibration Procedures Interval Reference Mass flow controller calibration software 6 months Section J 2 Mass flow controller calibration hardware 1 year Section J 3 The calibration intervals provided above are guidelines Requirements for routine calibration are site specific and may be better defined by the user as necessary APPENDIX J ORIGINAL DESIGN Mass FLow CONTROLLERS Pace J 1 Revision B 000 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor J 2 FLow CONTROLLER CALIBRATION SOFTWARE The software procedure allows the user to calibrate the sample and bypass flow rates without having to adjust any hardware Items Needed Reference flow meter suchas a bubble meter dry gas meter or mass flow meter NOTE This reference flow meter should have been recently calibrated to a primary standard and should have an accuracy of 1 at 3 l min Follow the steps below to perform a software calibration of the original design mass flow controllers 1 Turn off the control unit 2 Disconnect the electric cable that links the control unit with the sensor unit 3 Remov
352. quick P T fitting connect fitting 3 Sample tube extension 3 Insert the sample tube extension into the quick connect fitting on the bottom sample tube of the flow splitter Figure 2 68 Use enough sample tube extensions to reach from the flow splitter to the air inlet on the top of the sensor unit Figure 2 66 Use the shortest possible length of sample tube extension for best re sults You may cut the sample tube extension as necessary however you must ensure that the cut ends of the sample tube extension are beveled and free of any sharp edges or burrs SECTION 2 SYSTEM INSTALLATION Pace 2 44 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 4 Position the end of the sample tube extension so that it is 2 5 cm 1 from the top of the sensor unit s air inlet You may need to slide the flow splitter up or down inside the tripod to position the end of the sample tube extension so that it is 2 5 cm 1 above the air inlet 5 Locate the rubber tube coupling Figure 2 69 6 Install the rubber tube coupling onto the end of the sample tube extension Figure 2 69 Figure 2 69 Installation of the tube coupling on the sample tube extension Sample tube Rubber tube coupling 7 Install the other end of the rubber tube coupling onto the air inlet of the sensor unit Figure 2 70 IMPORTANT The weight of the sampling system must not rest on the sensor unit Fig
353. quipped with a 1 or 2 l min flow adapter operate at main flow rate of 1 or 2 l min and auxiliary flow rate of 15 67 or 14 67 l min respectively Ifa2 l min flow adapter is installed in the Series 1400a system replace all references in this manual to a 3 l min main flow with 2 l min and all references to a 13 67 l min auxiliary flow with 14 67 l min Likewise for monitors equipped with the 1 l min flow adapter replace all references in this manual to a 3 l min main flow with 1 l min and all references to a 13 67 l min flow with 15 67 l min SECTION 2 SYSTEM INSTALLATION PAGE 2 26 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure 2 38 Flow splitter F with and without a flow Flow splitter without flow adapter Flow splitter with flow adapter adapter installed Sample tube Flow adapter 15 5 cm 6 from 15 5 cm 6 from top of flow splitter top of flow splitter Sample tube Flow adapter 4 installed on sample tube Sample tube Bypass flow outlet 1 2 sample tube fastener nut Fee Sample tube _ _ P To sensor unit Follow these steps to set up a flow splitter assembly 1 Locate the flow splitter Figure 2 37 2 If you will be installing a flow adapter onto the flow splitter go to step 3 If you will not be installing a flow adapter onto the flow splitter go to step 10 3 Loosen the 1 2 sample tube nut at t
354. r Figure 2 61 Ambient temperature sensor mount 12 Slide the ambient temperature sensor mount over the top of the flow splitter Figure 2 62 or mount it to another suitable outdoor location Figure 2 62 Ambient temperature sensor mount being installed onto the flow splitter SECTION 2 SYSTEM INSTALLATION Pace 2 40 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 13 Tighten the screw on the side of the ambient temperature sensor mount Figure 2 63 with a flat head screwdriver IMPORTANT To avoid damaging the flow splitter do not overtighten the ambient temperature sensor mount Figure 2 63 Fastening the ambient temperature sensor mount to the flow splitter 14 Insert the ambient temperature sensor into the ambient tempera ture sensor mount Figure 2 64 IMPORTANT Be sure to install the ambient temperature sensor when install ing the Series 1400a Monitor Figure 2 64 Installing the ambient temperature sensor into the ambient tempera ture sensor mount SECTION 2 SYSTEM INSTALLATION Pace 2 41 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 15 Tighten the ambient temperature sensor holding nut to secure the ambient temperature sensor Figure 2 65 inside the mount Figure 2 65 Tightening the ambient temperature sensor holding nut 16 Weather seal the opening in the roof 17 You must now assembl
355. r RUN keys to begin data collection Section 14 ACCU System Pace 14 17 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor v The tubing in the ACCU System should not be disconnected except during filter cartridge exchange X Never cut any of the tubing inside of the ACCU enclosure X When the user resets an ACCU channel the accumulators for that channel are reset to 0 14 3 2 FILTER CARTRIDGE EXCHANGE Follow these steps to exchange an ACCU filter cartridge 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Press the DATA STOP key to enter the Setup Mode Open the ACCU enclosure door Remove the filter cartridge from the stationary fitting pressing the fitting and pulling downward on the filter cartridge Disconnect the conductive tubing from the bottom of the filter cartridge by pressing the fitting on the conductive tubing and pulling downward on the fitting If you will be installing a new filter cartridge go to step 5 If you will not be installing a new filter cartridge go to step 6 Install the conductive tubing onto the outlet of the filter cartridge and install the cartridge into the top stationary fitting Figures 14 13 and 14 14 DO NOT cut the conductive tubing Go to step 7 IMPORTANT DO NOT cut modify or disconnect the tubing that runs down the center of the ACCU System It is used for the bypass flow Install the conductive tubing directly into the top st
356. r s internal data storage buffer Refer to Appendix I for a list of ASCII codes The default setting for the station number is 48048048 which is the ASCII code for 000 The monitor always outputs the current date and time and the station identifier at the beginning of each data output transmission SEcTION 9 DATA INPUT AND OUTPUT Pace 9 30 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure 9 24 Com 2 Way Settings screen Figure 9 25 Com 2 Way Settings screen with an additional line displayed 9 4 3 Com 2 Way SETTINGS SCREEN The Com 2 Way Settings screen Figure 9 24 allows the user to set up information exchange between the Series 1400a Monitor and a personal computer PC or other serial data recording device using the AK Protocol or the German Ambient Network Protocol Appendix C The AK Protocol is used in combination with the RPComm software program Section 10 and the TEOMCOMM software program Appendix L Refer to Appendix H for further information on modem communications COM 2 WAY SETTINGS RS Para 1 gt 52 RS Para 2 75048 RS Para 3 13010 Youcan display the Com 2 Way Settings screen on the four line display of the control unit in two different ways 1 When in the Main screen Figure 9 7 press the lt STEP SCREEN gt key to display the Menu screen Figure 9 8 When in the Menu screen press the up T and down lt gt arrow keys to
357. r The AK Protocol is used in combination with the RPComm software program Section 10 and the TEOMCOMM software program Appen dix L The user must set up the unit for transmitting data via the AK Protocol when in the Com 2 Way Settings screen Section 9 4 3 Refer to Appendix H for further information on modem communica tions This field contains the German Ambient Network Protocol RS232 Mode Appendix C When the monitor is in the German Ambient Network Proto col Mode the user can define the Series 1400a Monitor as a station with up to three predetermined system variables in each response transmission The user must set up the unit for transmitting data via the German Ambient Network Protocol when in the Pace 9 25 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor SEcTION 9 DATA INPUT AND OUTPUT Com 2 Way Settings screen Section 9 4 3 Refer to Appendix H for further information on modem communications Store to Print This field contains the Store to Print RS232 Mode When the monitor is in the Store to Print Mode the unit downloads all data records from the storage pointer to the end of the data storage buffer to a serial printer The monitor sends one new data record to the serial printer every 2 seconds If the user leaves the monitor in the Store to Print Mode after the monitor has transmitted the last data record in its data storage buffer the monitor will continue to tran
358. r threaded spacer standoffs and set aside APPENDIX G INLET MAINTENANCE Pace G 3 Revision B 001 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 3 Remove and inspect the insect screen for contamination Figure G 4 Clean the screen by lifting it off the lower plate rain deflec tor and brushing or rinsing it with water until it is clean Then allow the screen to dry Figure G 4 Removing the insect screen _ Insect screen 4 Using a general purpose cleaner and paper towel clean the top plate deflector cone Figure G 5 Figure G 5 Top plate with plate deflector cone highlighted APPENDIX G INLET MAINTENANCE Pace G 4 Revision B 001 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 5 Clean the internal wall surface of the acceleration assembly Figure G 6 NOTE Be sure that after cleaning the assembly the acceleration nozzle is clean If not use a cotton swab and cleaner to remove any contamination Figure G 7 Figure G 6 Acceleration assembly with internal wall highlighted 7 Internal wall of acceleration assembly Figure G 7 Acceleration assembly with acceleration nozzle highlighted Bl Acceleration nozzle APPENDIX G INLET MAINTENANCE Pace G 5 Revision B 001 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 6 Inspect the large diameter impactor nozzle O ring for damage or wear Replace it if
359. ra tures are within acceptable tolerance ranges Section 6 If the temperatures and flow rates are not within these ranges the instrument waits until all temperatures and flow rates have remained within these limits for 30 minutes before starting data collection The monitor is in Operating Mode 1 during this stabilization period Once this stabilization period ends the Series 1400a Monitor enters Operating Mode 2 and computes the system mass of the mass transducer Mass This is equal to the summation ofthe effective mass ofthe tapered element the mass ofthe filter and the mass of any particulate matter collected on the filter This computation is performed by averaging the tapered element frequency over ten 2 second periods Gate Time and then employing the following formula derived in equation 4 Mass K f 5 where Mass the baseline mass of the mass transducer tare weight of filter and tapered element K the calibration constant of the mass transducer f the average tapered element frequency during the initial ten 2 second periods After the instrument has sampled the tapered element frequency for these ten 2 second periods it begins computing a new system total mass value Mass every 2 seconds using equation 4 With these Mass and Mass values the system then computes a new particulate matter total mass value TM every 2 seconds TM Mass Mass 6 To provide data smoothing an exponential smoothin
360. ressing F1 or RUN on the control unit s keypad SECTION 3 SAMPLE PREPARATION Pace 3 9 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure 3 19 Main screen with the TEOM tapered element TE oscillating frequency highlighted 22 Wait 5 minutes to allow the temperatures to stabilize inside the transducer and sensor unit 23 Press the DATA STOP key on the control unit s keypad 24 Open the door of the sensor unit 25 Open the mass transducer 26 Press straight down on the filter with the bottom of the filter exchange tool Figure 3 13 This ensures that the filter is prop erly seated after it has experienced an increase in temperature 27 Close the mass transducer and sensor unit door 28 Reset the unit by pressing F1 or RUN on the control unit s keypad 29 Wait 5 minutes 30 Look at the change in the TE s oscillating frequency on the Main screen of the control unit Figure 3 19 The last two digits of the reading will fluctuate due to noise and the rest will remain steady If more than the last two digits fluctuate in this reading this indicates that the TEOM filter is loose Repeat steps 23 30 to re seat the filter OK 4 09 39 Aux Flow 13 66 Noise 0 034 Frequency 187 05705 Oscillating frequency SECTION 3 SAMPLE PREPARATION Pace 3 10 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Mon
361. ries 1400a Monitor as well as the theory of operation of the instrument s patented mass transducer Section 2 Hardware Installation This section describes how to set up the system hardware and optimize operating performance Section 3 Sample Preparation A TEOM filter cartridge must be installed in the system before the unit is turned on This section explains the steps required to install and exchange filter cartridges Section 4 Sofiware Overview This section describes the operation of the Series 1400a Monitor including such topics as viewing system data on the four line display and changing instrument operating parameters The monitor gives the user full control over its operations directly from its keypad Section 5 Basic Operation This section gives brief step by step instructions on how to turn on the instrument and initiate a sampling run It also explains how to download data and how to perform a audit of the instrument Section 6 Software Setup This section explains how to set up the instrument s software to run a sample Section 7 Status Codes This section explains all of the status code information and screens Section amp Viewing Stored Data This section explains how to view the data stored in the Series 1400a Monitor Pace 1 4 Revision B 001 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION Section 9 Data Input and Output This section explains how
362. rint Settings screen COM PRINT SETTINGS Interval gt Columns Prnt Var 1 Figure A 18 Com Print 1800 6 Mass Conc Settings screen with COM PRINT SETTINGS additional lines displayed Interval gt Columns Prnt Varl Prnt Var2 Prnt Var3 Prnt Var4 Prnt Var5 Prnt Var6 Station Figure A 19 Com 2 Way Settings screen RS Para 1 RS Para 2 RS Para 3 Figure A 20 Com 2 Way Settings screen with additional lines displayed RS Para 1 gt RS Para 2 RS Para 3 APPENDIX A OVERVIEW OF INSTRUMENT SCREENS 1800 6 Mass Conc 30 Min MC 01 Hr MC 24 Hr MC Tot Mass Null 48048048 COM 2 WAY SETTINGS 52 75048 13010 COM 2 WAY SETTINGS 52 75048 13010 Revision B 001 Pace A 8 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure A 21 View Storage screen VIEW STORAGE 16 20 03 gt Mass Conc 30 Min MC Figure A 22 View Storage screen with additional lines VIEW STORAGE displayed 16 20 03 gt Mass Conc 30 Min MC Main Flow Frequency Noise Null Null Null APPENDIX A OVERVIEW OF INSTRUMENT SCREENS 2056 15 Jan 01 74 9 72 3 2056 15 Jan 01 74 9 723 3 0 248 3217 5 438 Revision B 001 Pace A 9 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure A 23 Set Storage screen Figure A 24 Set Storage screen with additional lines displayed Stor Stor Stor Stor Stor Stor SET STORAGE Varl M
363. rinter by sending one new record every 2 seconds Follow these steps to download data using the Store to Print Mode 1 Connect one end of the 9 to 9 pin computer cable to one of the RS232 ports on the control unit 2 Ensure that nothing is connected to the other RS232 port of the control unit 3 If your serial printer is equipped with a 9 pin RS232 connector go to step 4 If your serial printer is equipped with a 25 pin connec tor go to step 5 4 Plug the other end of the 9 to 9 pin computer cable into the 9 pin RS232 port of your serial printer Go to step 8 5 Locate the 9 to 25 pin computer cable adapter 6 Plug the 9 to 25 pin computer cable adapter into the 25 pin port on your serial printer 7 Plug the other end of the 9 to 9 pin computer cable into the 9 to 25 pin computer cable adapter Go to step 8 NOTE Do not use the 9 to 25 pin modem cable to connect the control unit with the serial printer The 9 to 25 pin modem cable is configured for use only with a modem 8 If you want to set the storage pointer to the first data record to be downloaded go to step 9 If you do not want to move the storage pointer go to step 12 9 Press the lt STORE gt key on your monitor s keypad to display the View Storage screen Figure 9 24 10 Press the right lt gt and left lt gt arrow keys to move the storage pointer to the data record where you want the data down load to begin Section 8 11 Press
364. rman Ambient Network Protocol allows the user to request the value of 1 2 or 3 predetermined system variables Due to the definition of this protocol it is not possible to remotely select a system variable Appendix B to be queried The following pages show how RS Para 1 through RS Para 4 are defined in the German Ambient Network Protocol and also detail the format of the transmission and response messages APPENDIX C Two Way SERIAL COMMUNICATION Pace C 10 Revision B 000 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor German Network Protocol COM 2 WAY SETTINGS RS Para 1 56052053 ASCII codes for 3 digit Instrument Identifier for example 845 056 052 053 The Instrument Identifier must be 3 bytes in length RS Para 2 48048049 ASCII codes for 3 digit Location ID for example 001 048 048 049 The Location ID must be 3 bytes in length RS Para 3 PRC of the variable to be transmitted by the instrument Up to 3 PRCs may be designated for transmission by the instrument for example MC 30 Min MC and TM 008 057 009 RS Para 4 13010 Optional Up to 3 ASCII codes can be added to response from the instrument In this case CR and lt LF gt ASCII codes 013 and 010 are appended to the response Enter O if nothing is to be appended Transmission to Instrument Response from Instrument BHL EBEN DC S DER MN NEN The DA command signifies a Response identifier to the DA request for data fro
365. rmo Fisher Scientific PAGE II Revision B 003 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Patents Copyrights and Trademarks This instrumentation from Thermo Fisher Scientific is covered by one or more of the following patents U S Patent Office 3 926 271 4 391 338 4 696 181 4 836 314 other European and Asian patents also other U S and foreign patents pending This documentation contains trade secrets and confidential information proprietary to Thermo Fisher Scientific The software supplied with the instrumentation documen tation and any information contained therein may not be used duplicated or disclosed to anyone in whole or in part other than as authorized ina fully executed Thermo Fisher Scientific End User License Agreement or with the express written permission of Thermo Fisher Scientific TEOM is a registered trademarks of Thermo Fisher Scientific ACCU is a trademark of Thermo Fisher Scientific Other trademarks are the property of their respective holders Mention of specific product names other than Thermo Fisher Scientific products in this manual does not constitute an endorsement or recommendation by Thermo Fisher Scientific of that equipment PAGE III Revision B 003 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Safety Notice Repair of instrumentation manufactured by Thermo Fisher Scientific should be attempted only by properly trained se
366. roperly installed on a filter cartridge Figure 14 12 Filter cartridge with inlet and outlet fittings properly installed 2 Press the lt DATA STOP gt key on the monitor s keypad to enter the Setup Mode V The tubing in the ACCU 3 Open the ACCU enclosure door System should not be 4 Disconnect the top of the conductive tubing on the first ACCU disconnected except during filer carfridas exchange channel by pressing the fitting and pulling it downward 5 Install the conductive tubing onto the outlet of the filter cartridge EET onthe and install the cartridge into the top stationary fitting Figures 14 tubing inside of the ACCU 13 and 14 14 DO NOT cut the conductive tubing enclosure IMPORTANT DO NOT cut modify or disconnect the tubing that runs down the center of the ACCU System It is used for the bypass flow Section 14 ACCU System Pace 14 15 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure 14 13 Filter cartridge installed inside the ACCU System Figure 14 14 Two filter race eee ihe ACCU System ACCU SYSTEM Automatic Cartridge Collection Unit Section 14 ACCU System Pace 14 16 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 6 Close the ACCU enclosure door 7 After you install the filter cartridges in the ACCU System you must define each ACCU channel Section 14 4 8 Press lt F1 gt o
367. rrent location of the storage pointer and v Set the storage pointer to the desired location request the new storage pointer position before executing the The user may enter the following values to move the storage pointer s position Download Storage com mand B V The location of the storage pointer may be changed remotely Positive number Negative number This value will move the storage pointer to the beginning ofthe data storage buffer The beginning of the data storage buffer contains the oldest record in the buffer This value will move the storage pointer to the end of the data storage buffer The end of the data storage buffer contains the most recent data record that was recorded The entry of a positive number causes the storage pointer to move from its current position forward through the data records by the number entered This command moves the storage pointer toward the end of the data storage buffer i e toward the most data record that was recorded The entry of a negative number causes the storage pointer to move from its current position backward through the data records by the number entered This command moves the storage pointer toward the beginning of the data storage buffer 1 e toward the oldest record in the buffer After the user entered a value the PC will display the contents of the data record at the new location of the storage pointer APPENDIX L TEOMCOMM SorrwARE Pace L 16
368. rrows to move the cursor to the line that you want to edit or change 3 Press the lt CTRL gt key If you want to eliminate an unwanted negative concentration value go to step 4 If you want to display a negative concentration value go to step 5 4 Press the NO key You do not need to press the ENTER key after pressing the NO key to save the change 5 Press the YES key You do not need to press the ENTER key after pressing the YES key to save the change SECTION 4 SOFTWARE OVERVIEW Pace 4 21 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor This page left intentionally blank SECTION 4 SOFTWARE OVERVIEW Pack 4 22 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Section 5 Basic Operation This section explains how to program a sampling run retrieve data after a sampling run in the field and verify your monitor s performance characteristics 5 1 PROGRAMMING THE MONITOR This section describes the procedures for programming the Series 1400a Monitor for a sampling run Refer to Section 4 for more detailed information on navigating through the monitor s software screens Follow these steps to program the monitor for a sampling run 1 Install a TEOM filter Section 3 2 Press the lt DATA STOP gt key to ensure that your monitor is in the Setup Mode Section 4 3 Perform a leak check Section 3 4 W
369. rument Serial 22416 ointer screen K DI lt gt 1 Y Down Load Data Registers Real time Graph Key Pad Storage Data 05 4pr 99 08 09 05 000 8 23 13 0 031 3 When in the Storage Pointer screen select the appropriate control button to move the storage pointer Refer to Figure 10 15 for a complete description of the control buttons on the Storage Pointer screen SEcTION 10 RPComm SOFTWARE Pace 10 17 Revision B 000 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure 10 15 Control buttons on the Storage Moves the storage pointer to the first record in the buffer The Soler screen displayed position of the storage pointer will change unless the storage pointer was already at the beginning of the buffer Moves the storage pointer to the last record in the buffer The displayed position of the storage pointer will change unless the storage pointer was already at the end of the buffer ee o Moves the storage pointer back x number of records where x is defined in the Change Record Step box Moves the storage pointer forward x number of records where x is defined in the Change Record Step box Change Record Step box The step size can be 1 5 10 100 or 1000 4 After you have set the storage pointer position go to Section 10 2 3 2 for information on downloading the data records SEcTION 10 RPComm SOFTWARE Pace 10 18 Revision B 000 Opera
370. rument configuration SEAL PLATE ASSEMBLY FLOW SPLITTER TUBE RTV around the perimeter of the seal plate amp enclosure BYPASS FLOW EXTENSION 1 1 4 20 Truss Head Screw 2 Sealing Washer 3 1 4 Flat Washer INSULATION amp 4 External Star Washer SAMPLE TUBE 5 1 4 20 Hex Nut APPENDIX K COMPLETE OUTDOOR ENCLOSURE Pace K 7 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 4 On top of the seal plate insert the 1 4 20 truss head screws with sealing washers into the seal plate mounting holes Figure K 5 5 Place the 1 4 inch flat washers onto the 1 4 20 hex nuts Figure K 5 6 Place the 1 4 inch external star washers onto the 1 4 inch flat washers Figure K 5 7 On the inside ceiling of the enclosure insert the 1 4 20 hex nuts with 1 4 inch flat washers and 1 4 inch external star washers into the seal plate mounting holes Figure K 5 8 Apply room temperature vulcanizing RTV sealer around the perimeter of the seal plate to prevent leakage Figure K 5 If you are setting up a standard installation Figure K 5 go to step 9 If you are setting up an ACCU System installation Figure K 6 go to step 10 9 Insert the flow splitter up through the bottom of the seal plate nut so that the bypass flow extension is inside the enclosure Figure K 5 Go to step 11 10 Insert the flow splitter down into the seal plate nut from the top so that the bypass flo
371. rvice personnel and should be conducted in accordance with the Thermo Fisher Scientific system documentation Do not tamper with this hardware High voltages may be present in all instrument enclosures Use established safety precautions when working with this instrument The seller cannot foresee all possible modes of operation in which the user may attempt to use this instrumentation The user assumes all liability associated with the use of this instrumentation The seller further disclaims any responsibility for consequential damages Use of this product in any manner not intended by the manufacturer will void the safety protection provided by the equipment and may damage the equipment and subject the user to injury PAGE IV Revision B 003 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Warranty U S Seller warrants that the Products will operate or perform substantially in conformance with Seller s published specifications and be free from defects in material and workmanship when subjected to normal proper and intended usage by properly trained personnel for the period of time set forth in the product documentation published specifications or package inserts If a period of time is not specified in Seller s product documentation published specifications or package inserts the warranty period shall be one 1 year from the date of shipment to Buyer for equipment and ninety 90 days for all other products t
372. s This appendix contains all of the software screens displayed by the TEOMPLUS software program APPENDIX A OVERVIEW OF INSTRUMENT SCREENS Pace A 32 Revision B 001 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure A 59 TEOMPLUS VIEW screen Top Window VIEW TEOM Series 1400a Monitor Page 1 Ave Time Mass Rate 14 3 ug h Mode Muxviewr v5 1 12 41 16 27 Dec 99 1 Mass Conc 79 4 ug m 3 Status OK No Curr Conditions Total Mass 974 56 ug 300 0 30 Min Mass Conc 72 3 ug m 3 O1 Hr Mass Conc 78 4 ug m 3 Q8 Hr Mass Conc 85 8 ug m 3 24 Hr Mass Conc 69 3 ug m 3 Filt Load Volts 18 60 Case Temp c 0 04 Air Temp 5 C 0 22 Cap Temp E S 0 06 Enclosure Temp i 0 14 Main Flow l min 9005 Auxiliary Flow l min 10259 Serial Number 2374 Amb Temp 49 00 Cal Constant 9605 000 Amb Pres 1 005 Press cF2 to toggle command mode APPENDIX A OVERVIEW OF INSTRUMENT SCREENS 0 037 187 05684 hz Wait Time Ave Temp Std Temp Ave Pres Std Pres Adj Main Flow Adj Aux Flow OK 4 38 4 NU 12 41 Mass Conc 79 4 30 Min MC 72 3 O1 Hr MC 78 4 v 3 013 Pace A 33 Revision B 001 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure A 60 TEOMPLUS VIEW screen with additional lines displayed Top Window VIEW f Muxviewr v5 1 TEOM Series 1400a Monitor Page 2 e i 14 14 20 27 Dec 99 ANALOG OUTPUT SETTINGS DATA STORAGE SETTINGS Chan V
373. s operating manual following is a list of the manual sections with their respective revision numbers Section Number and Description Revision Number Section 1 Introduction B 001 Section 2 Hardware Installation B 002 Section 3 Sample Preparation B 002 Section 4 Software Overview B 002 Section 5 Basic Operation B 002 Section 6 Software Setup B 002 Section 7 Status Codes B 002 Section 8 Viewing Stored Data B 003 Section 9 Data Input and Output B 002 Section 10 RPComm Software B 002 Section 11 Password Protection B 001 Section 12 Routine Maintenance and Verification Procedures B 000 Section 13 Resetting the Monitor B 000 Section 14 ACCU System B 000 PAGE VIII Revision B 003 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Section Revision List continued Section Number and Description Revision Number Appendix A Overview of Software Screens B 001 Appendix B Program Register Codes B 001 Appendix C Two Way Serial Communication B 001 Appendix D Installing New Software B 003 Appendix E Consumables and Parts B 003 Appendix F Filter Log B 001 Appendix G Inlet Maintenance B 001 Appendix H Modem Communications B 001 Appendix I ASCII Codes B 000 Appendix J Original Design Mass Flow Controllers B 000 Appendix K Complete Outdoor Enclosure B 000 Appendix L TEOMCOMM Software B 001 Appendix M TEOMPLUS Software B 000 PAGE Ix Revision B 003 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Partic
374. s Screen seessseesss 9 6 9 1 2 Define Analog Inputs A I Screen 9 10 9 2 Analog OBIDUls so iesus de ODE AN IE 9 13 9 2 1 Set Analog Outputs Screen eessssssusss 9 14 9 2 2 Changing Analog Input and Output Jumpers 9 17 9 3 Contact Closure Circuits 9 19 9 3 1 Set Contact Closure Screen sssssssss 9 20 9 4 Downloading Data eoe eed 9 23 9 4 1 Set RS 232 Mode Screen esses 9 24 9 4 2 Com Print Settings Screen sese 9 28 9 4 3 Com 2 Way Settings Screen ssesssusss 9 31 9 4 4 Downloading Data One Way Communication 9 33 9 4 4 1 Fast Store Out Mode sese 9 33 9 4 4 2 Print On Line Mode sseeeeeneee 9 36 9 4 4 3 Store to Print Mode ee eeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 9 38 9 4 5 Data Downloading Two Way Communication 9 40 SECTION TO RPComm SOFTWARE cette ned etae Tete Gp e n TOS Mia o iban ranee 10 1 10 1 Instrument Setup for Direct Communication 10 2 10 27 Using HPOOImldm es o er ecd edere ie 10 3 10 2 1 Starting RPCOMM utter ac dendi e es 10 3 10 2 1 1 Exiting AP COMM se sederet ed aite peto ima ec eret 10 6 10 2 2 Creating a New Connection eesssseeeesse 10 8 10 2 2 1 Checking Connection
375. s received the following major regulatory recognitions U S EPA PM 10 equivalency approval EQPM 1090 079 PM 2 5 measurements within the context of a U S EPA correlated accept able continuous monitor 40 CFR 58 European Union PM 10 recognition within the context of European Norm EN 12341 German EPA approval as an equivalent TSP monitor The Series 1400a Monitor Figure 1 1 incorporates the patented Tapered Element Oscillating Microbalance TEOM technology developed by Rupprecht amp Patashnick Co Inc to measure particulate matter mass concentrations continuously The Series 1400a Monitor can be configured with a variety of sample inlets to measure PM 10 PM 2 5 PM 1 or TSP concentrations The microprocessor based unit accommodates all siting requirements and provides internal data storage and analog and serial data input output capabilities Filter based direct mass measurements are considered the standard technique for determining particulate matter mass concentration TEOM instruments from R amp P are the only filter based systems with real time data output and real time mass measure ment capability The exchangeable filter in the Series 1400a Monitor also can be used to determine heavy metal concentrations using standard analytical laboratory meth ods Pace 1 1 Revision B 001 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION 1 1 ADVANCED FEATURES On October
376. screen OK Mass Conc 30 Min MC 01 Hr MC SECTION 3 SAMPLE PREPARATION Pace 3 19 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 3 Plug the pump Figure 3 17 into an appropriate power source to draw a sample stream through the system Once the power switch is pressed the CHECK STATUS light Figure 3 27 will light because the flow rates and temperatures are outside of tolerance ranges The CHECK STATUS light will remain lit during the first 30 minutes after the power switch is pressed while the monitor warms up The status light automatically turns off after all flow rates and temperatures reach tolerance ranges Section 4 3 1 2 The flow controllers inside the control unit make a slight clicking sound when the instrument is turned on The instrument automatically resets itself when it is turned on As part of this initialization procedure the monitor waits until the flow rates and temperatures stabilize within a narrow range Section 6 for 30 minutes before starting data collection This ensures the validity of all data points computed by the system SECTION 3 SAMPLE PREPARATION Pace 3 20 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure 3 31 Main screen with main and auxiliary flow rates displayed 3 4 Leak CHECK Ifyou have installed the ACCU System Section 14 on the monitor be sure to include the ACCU Syst
377. select Set RS 232 Mode and then press the lt ENTER gt key to display the Set RS 232 Mode screen Figure 9 19 When in the Set RS 232 Mode screen press the lt STEP SCREEN key to display the Com Print Settings screen Figure 9 22 When in the Com Print Settings screen press the STEP SCREEN key 2 Press the 07 and lt 7 gt keys and then press the lt ENTER gt key The Com 2 Way Settings screen contains additional lines that cannot be seen when the screen first displays on the control unit s four line display Figure 9 25 Press the up T and down lt gt arrow keys to view the additional lines of the Com 2 Way Settings screen COM 2 WAY SETTINGS RS Para 1 52 RS Para 2 75048 RS Para 3 13010 SEcTION 9 DATA INPUT AND OUTPUT Pace 9 31 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor The Com 2 Way Settings screen contains the following information SEcTION 9 DATA INPUT AND OUTPUT RS Para 1 RS Para 2 RS Para 3 RS Para 4 This field contains an ASCII code The definition of this parameter depends on whether the user selects the AK Protocol or the German Ambient Network Protocol This variable must be set to use either the AK Protocol or the German Ambient Network Pro tocol to transmit data to and from the Series 1400a monitor This field contains an ASCII code The definition of this parameter depends on whether the user selects the AK Protocol or t
378. ser should enter a 0 in the PRC variable field s that is not being used This field contains the minimum permissible value of the second PRC variable in ACCU channel 1 This field contains the maximum permissible value of the second PRC variable in ACCU channel 1 This field contains the program register code PRC Appendix B of the third variable whose value is to be tested in ACCU channel 2 If the user specifies fewer than four conditions for a given channel the user should enter a 0 in the PRC variable field s that is not being used In this case the user is not using this PRC variable field and has entered a 0 for the third PRC variable Null displays in the PRC variable field where the name of the variable is ordinarily shown This field contains the minimum permissible value of the third PRC variable in ACCU channel 1 This field contains the maximum permissible value of the third PRC variable in ACCU channel 1 Pace 14 21 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Section 14 ACCU System 4 Null This field contains the program register code PRC Appendix B of the fourth variable whose value is to be tested in ACCU channel 2 If the user specifies fewer than four conditions for a given channel the user should enter a 0 in the PRC variable field s that is not being used In this case the user is not using this PRC variable field and h
379. serial adapter onto the 25 pin connector on your modem Go to step 11 11 Attach a phone line to the modem The modem is now ready to communicate with the monitor APPENDIX H MopEM COMMUNICATIONS Pace H 2 Revision B 000 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor H 2 SETTING up RPCoww FOR USE WITH A MODEM NOTE The Windows operating system screens shown in this appendix are from the Windows 95 operating system The screens may vary slightly if you are operating RPComm under other Windows operating systems The first two steps of this procedure describe how to set up the unit for direct communication Direct communication must be successfully completed Section 10 1 before modem communication is attempted This will verify that RPComm and the Series 1400a Monitor have been configured properly Refer to Section 10 for instructions on obtaining installing and using RPComm Follow these steps to set up the unit for modem communications 1 2 3 4 5 Set up the Series 1400a Monitor for direct communications Sec tion 10 1 Create a new direct connection Section 10 2 2 and verify that the unit is communicating properly NOTE If the connection is successful the unit s serial number will be displayed at the top of the screen If the connection is not successful or if there is no unit attached then the serial number field will be blank or will display 99999 When the RPCom
380. set the monitor to its original settings 1 Press the DATA STOP key on the control unit s keypad to enter the Setup Mode 2 When in the Main screen Figure 13 1 press the SHIFT key and hold it down Figure 13 1 Main screen SH OK 4 Mass Conc gt 30 Min MC 01 Hr MC 3 Then press the lt STOP ALL gt key This will reset the system vari ables to their original values 4 Release the lt SHIFT gt key 5 Follow the procedures in Section 5 Basic Operation to enter the appropriate average temperature and pressure for the sampling location or to select automatic measurement Refer to the program register codes PRCs Appendix B for a list of the original settings SECTION 13 RESETTING THE MONITOR Pace 13 2 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 13 3 SvsrEM OPERATION AFTER A PowER FAILURE When a power failure occurs and then power is returned to the instrument the Series 1400a Monitor automatically resets itself It will enters the same RS232 mode that it was set at before the power failure occured Upon starting up again the instrument waits until temperatures and flow rates have stabilized for 30 minutes before automatically resuming data evaluation and collection Operating parameters such as temperature and flow settings are maintained in the system s battery backed CMOS memory The system also contains a battery backed clock calendar SECTION 1
381. set up the system you must check the voltage setting of the control unit Section 2 3 1 assemble the sensor flow connections Section 2 3 2 1 bypass flow connections Section 2 3 2 2 pump connections Section 2 3 2 3 sensor unit connections Section 2 3 4 flow splitter Section 2 4 1 tripod Section 2 4 2 sampling system components Section 2 4 3 and the sample tube Section 2 4 4 and install a sample inlet onto the flow splitter Section 2 4 5 1 After you have set up the system you must perform a leak check on the monitor Section 3 4 and install a TEOM filter Section 3 1 1 in the mass transducer before starting a sample run If you want to mount the control unit in a rack Section 2 3 3 you must install the control unit into the rack directly after you assemble the pump connections Section 2 3 2 3 If you want to install the monitor in an outdoor location refer to Appendix K for further instructions Consult R amp P for specific site recommendations 2 1 INSTALLATION CONSIDERATIONS The Series 1400a Monitor consists of two basic components the sensor unit containing the sample inlet and mass transducer and the control unit containing the operator terminal and control electronics The two units are connected by a 10 meter optionally 2 or 20 m cable tube assembly The control unit is suitable for standard rack mounting and may be located in any convenient indoor location which is maintained between 2 and 40 C 3
382. smit stored data records to the serial printer as data records are stored in its data storage buffer The user sets the rate at which data records are stored in the data storage buffer and the stored variables that will be downloaded to the serial printer when in the Set Storage screen Section 6 IMPORTANT The instrument will begin download data to the serial printer immediately after the user changes the RS232 Mode to Store to Print If you want to use this RS232 Mode be sure to turn on your serial printer and connect it to the monitor BEFORE setting the RS232 Mode to Store to Print Fast Store Out This field contains the Fast Store Out RS232 Mode When the monitor is in the Fast Store Out Mode the unit downloads all data records from the storage pointer to the end of the data storage buffer to a personal computer PC or other serial data record ing device such as a data logger If the user leaves the monitor in the Fast Store Out Mode after the monitor has transmitted the last data record in its data storage buffer the monitor will continue to transmit stored data records to the PC or other serial data recording device as data records are stored in its data storage buffer The user sets the rate at which data records are stored in the data storage buffer and the stored variables that will be downloaded to the PC or other serial data recording device when in the Set Storage screen Section 6 PAGE 9 26 Revisio
383. strument The flow rates referenced internally by the instrument to 0 C are converted to EPA standard conditions using the following computation Std Temp 273 15 1 atm Flow Rate Flow Rate x x 13 273 15 Std Pres This Flow Rate is used to determine the mass concentration reported by the instrument as shown in equation 10 The Total Flow referenced in equation 11 for computing longer term mass A Pace 1 19 Revision B 001 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor concentration averages is obtained by summing the Flow Rate over the period of the longer term average For example the 1 hour Total_Flow is obtained by Total_Flow m Flow_Rate l min x period minutes x 1 1000 l m 14 EPA EPA NOTE When reporting concentrations to actual conditions the values for standard and average temperatures must be set to 99 and the standard and average pressures must be set to 9 when in the Set Temps Flows screen Section 6 This will ensure that the monitor uses the current actual values for temperature and pressure in equation 13 SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION Pace 1 20 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor v The instrument must be located in a weather protected environment X Be sure to install the ambient temperature sensor Section 2 Hardware Setup To install the Series 1400a Monitor and
384. t Connecting Thread Upper Inlet Body a Auxiliary Flow from amp Acceleration Jet as the 1400a monitor S mpactor Plate Lower Inlet Connector to ACCU System Auxiliary Flow to ACCU System APPENDIX G INLET MAINTENANCE Pace G 19 Revision B 001 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure G 24 In line PM 2 5 ACCU inlet installed on the sample distributor cone V Do not scrub the interior of the inlet You may damage the Teflon coating APPENDIX G INLET MAINTENANCE Follow these steps to maintain the ACCU inlet 1 Disassemble the inlet Figures G 23 2 Soak the inlet in soapy water any non organic laboratory deter 3 4 5 6 gent is appropriate Do not scrub the interior of the inlet Scrubbing may damage the Teflon coating IMPORTANT Do not scrub the interior of the inlet Scrubbing may damage the Teflon coating Rinse the inlet several times with deionized water The last rinse may be with acetone to facilitate drying The inlet also can be dried with air Reassemble the inlet Place a small drop of impactor plate oil 22 002666 onto the center of the impactor plate If it is not completely absorbed in 30 seconds wipe off any remaining oil Install the inlet onto the sample distributor cone or cap it until it is ready for use Pace G 20 Revision B 000 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor
385. t key on your PC s keyboard The TEOMCOMM Main screen Figure L 1 Section L 3 will now display Figure L 1 TEOMCOMM Main screen VA TEOMCOMM auto uee E3 efe Al TEOMCOMM v1 41 Request the value of a register Modify the value of a register Set instrument mode Download storage Set storage pointer Fast Storage Out Exit program Fi Help F2 Comm Config F3 Set Station F4 Options APPENDIX L TEOMCOMM Sortware Pace L 4 Revision B 000 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor L 2 2 SETTING THE COMMUNICATION PARAMETERS Follow these steps to set TEOMCOMM s communication parameters 1 Ensure that your personal computer PC is in MS DOS mode 2 Begin running the TEOMCOMM software program Section L 2 1 3 When in the TEOMCOMM Main screen Figure L 1 press the F3 key on the PC s keyboard to view the Set Station parameters currently stored in the program The PC will display the alphanu meric settings for the station number RS Para 1 and channel number RS Para 2 Figure L 2 Figure L 2 TEOMCOMM Main screen with Set Station parameters dis played A TEOMCOMM w ae E sf Al TEOMCOMM v1 41 Request the value of a register Modify the value of a register Set instrument mode Download storage Set storage pointer Fast Storage Out Exit program Current Station 4 Current channel K Enter a one character station number Fi Help F2
386. t or RUN key to return the monitor to Operating Mode 1 If the instrument remains in the Setup Mode for 5 minutes without the user pressing any key on the keypad the monitor will automatically return to Operating Mode 1 Pace 6 3 Revision B 003 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 6 2 Set Time SCREEN The user can set the system time and date when in the Set Time screen Figure 6 3 Figure 6 3 Set Time screen SET TIME 16 20 03 15 Jan 01 Second gt 0 Minute 20 Youcan display the Set Time screen on the four line display of the control unit in three different ways 1 Press the lt TIME DATE gt key on the control unit s keypad 2 When in the Main screen Figure 6 1 press the lt STEP SCREEN gt key to display the Menu screen Figure 6 4 When in the Menu screen press the up T and down 1 arrow keys to select Set Time and then press the ENTER key 3 Press the 07 and 3 keys and then press the lt ENTER gt key Figure 6 4 Menu screen LISTING OF SCREENS gt Set Temps Flows Set Hardware View ACCU System The Set Time screen contains additional lines that cannot be seen when the screen first displays on the control unit s four line display Figure 6 5 Press the up T and down lt gt arrow keys to view the additional lines of the Set Time screen SECTION 6 SOFTWARE SETUP Pace 6 4 Revision B 003 Operating Manual TEOM Ser
387. t Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure 6 6 Set Temps Flows screen 6 3 Set TEwPs FLows SCREEN The user can view and set the temperatures and flow rates when in the Set Temps Flows screen Figure 6 6 SET TEMPS FLOWS T Case 50 00 50 00 T Air 50 00 50 01 T Cap 50 00 49 98 You can display the Set Temps Flows screen on the four line display of the control unit in three different ways 1 When in the Main screen Figure 6 1 press the lt STEP SCREEN key on the control unit s keypad to display the Menu screen Figure 6 4 When in the Menu screen press the up T and down 1 arrow keys to select Set Temps Flows and then press the lt ENTER gt key 2 When in the Set Hardware screen Section 6 4 press the STEP SCREEN key 3 Press the 17 and lt 9 gt keys and then press the lt ENTER gt key Each temperature and flow rate has two numbers associated with it The left hand value is the parameter setting and can be changed The right hand number is the current value and cannot be changed The Set Temps Flows screen contains additional lines that cannot be seen when the screen first displays on the control unit s four line display Figure 6 7 Press the up T and down 1 arrow keys to view the additional lines ofthe Set Temps Flows screen SECTION 6 SOFTWARE SETUP Pace 6 6 Revision B 003 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure 6 7 Set Temps
388. t hand side of the AK Protocol Setup screen and select the correct series of com mand codes needed to trigger the desired instrument As the codes are chosen they will appear on the bottom of the screen in the Connection Command box If the user enters an incorrect code they can delete it by selecting the code in the Connection Command box and pressing the Delete key on your computer s keyboard 36 The remaining portions of the screen should have been set while establishing the modem connection Do not modify these set tings 37 Select the OK button to exit the AK Protocol Setup screen The Connection Type screen will display 38 When in the Connection Type screen select the OK button to finish the connection setup 39 When in the Connection List screen highlight one of the instru ments and select the Connection icon on the tool bar t The connection to the instrument will be initiated and the proper command codes sent When communication is established the Download Data screen will be displayed NOTE Ifthe connection is successful the unit s serial number will be displayed at the top ofthe screen Ensure that the correct serial number is displayed to verify that the proper command codes were sent and that the serial port trigger is functioning properly If the connection is not successful or if there is no instrument attached then the serial number will be blank or will display 99999 Ifthe modem
389. t removed with voltage setting switch highlighted setting switch au 10 Locate the voltage setting switch Figure 2 12 near the front center of the control unit Figure 2 11 Figure 2 12 Voltage setting Switch setting I switch SECTION 2 SYSTEM INSTALLATION Pace 2 9 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 11 Insert a slotted screwdriver into the slot on the top of the voltage setting switch and turn the switch to the correct voltage setting 12 Replace the cover of the control unit 13 Insert the power cord into the fuse power cord socket Figure 2 2 14 You must now assemble the sensor flow connections Section 2 3 2 1 SECTION 2 SYSTEM INSTALLATION Pace 2 10 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure 2 13 Sensor flow components with parts disassembled 1 4 black sensor flow flow tubing of the electric and air connecting cable A 3 8 to 1 4 reducer fitting B large in line filter C and 3 8 flow line tubing D Figure 2 14 3 8 flow line tubing inserted into the SENSOR FLOW fitting 2 3 2 Controt Unit CONNECTIONS 2 3 2 1 SENSOR FLow CONNECTIONS Follow these steps to assemble the sensor flow connections 1 Locate the small piece of 3 8 flow line tubing Section 2 2 Figure 2 13 2 Cut a 13 cm 5 length of tubing with a clean perpendicular cut
390. t should be oriented as shown in Figure 14 9 6 Align the gusset assembly on the horizontal supports G and H and secure the horizontal supports using the J K L and M hard ware 7 Place the gusset spacers I between the gusset assembly and the horizontal supports G and H Secure the gusset spacers using the J K L and M hardware If one or more of the gussets does not seem to line up properly loosen the bolts that secure the horizontal and vertical supports and adjust them until the gusset fits properly 14 2 3 3 MouNTING THE ACCU ENcLosunE ONTO THE OPTIONAL STAND Follow these steps to mount the ACCU enclosure onto the optional stand Figure 14 9 1 Place a 3 8 sealing washer N onto each 3 8 bolt O with the rubber side facing away from the head of the bolt 2 Push the sealing washer bolt assembly through the mounting holes in the stand 3 Place a piece of tape across the head of the bolt so that it stays in place while you install the ACCU enclosure onto the stand 4 Lift the ACCU enclosure onto the stand and secure it to the stand using with the sealing washer bolt assemblies Section 14 ACCU System Pace 14 13 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor X Never cut any of the tubing inside of the ACCU enclosure v The tubing in the ACCU System should not be disconnected except during filter cartridge exchange Figure 14 10 Inlet fitting properly
391. t the unit to report the mass concentration levels to actual conditions they must they should set the average and standard temperatures to 99 and the average and standard pressures to 9 when in the Set Temps Flows screen SECTION 6 SOFTWARE SETUP Pace 6 9 Revision B 003 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure 6 6 This will cause the monitor to use the actual ambient temperature and ambient pressure in its flow rate calculations If the user chooses to set the unit to report the mass concentration levels to standard conditions they must set the standard temperatures and pressures to the appropriate standard regulatory values when inthe Set Temps Flows screen Figure 6 6 This will cause the monitor to use the standard temperature and pressure values in its sample volume calculations Section 1 NOTE If the user wants to use the instrument for U S EPA equivalent PM 10 measurements they must ensure that the standard temperature is set to 25 C and the standard pressure is set to 1 atm Section 6 3 4 regardless of the values that they entered for the average temperature and average pressure settings SECTION 6 SOFTWARE SETUP Pace 6 10 Revision B 003 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 6 3 1 Active Vo_umetric Flow CONTROL The Series 1400a Monitor uses mass flow controllers to ensure a constant and precise volumetric flow through t
392. the lt CTRL gt key and hold it down then press the LAST FIRST key This will move the storage pointer to the data record just before your beginning data record SEcTION 9 DATA INPUT AND OUTPUT Pace 9 38 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 12 Ensure that your serial printer is turned on and is ready to begin printing 13 Press the lt RS232 gt key on the monitor s keypad to display the Set RS 232 Mode screen Figure 9 19 14 When in the Set RS 232 Mode screen press the lt EDIT gt key 15 Press the up 1 and down 1 arrow keys to select Store to Print 16 Press the ENTER key The instrument will begin downloading data to the serial printer immediately after you press the EN TER key NOTE If you leave the monitor in the Store to Print Mode after the monitor has transmitted the last data record in its data storage buffer the monitor will continue to transmit stored data records to the serial printer as data records are stored in its data storage buffer The user sets the rate at which data records are stored in the data storage buffer and the stored variables that will be downloaded to the serial printer when in the Set Storage screen Section 6 17 When the data download is complete set the RS232 protocol to None 18 Disconnect the RS232 cable from the monitor and the serial printer SEcTION 9 DATA INPUT AND OUTPUT Pa
393. the valve located on the flow audit adapter Figure 3 33 and discon nect or unplug the vacuum pump IMPORTANT Be sure to open the valve on the adapter s ow y to gradually release the vacuum in the system 13 Wait 1 minute and observe the main flow and auxiliary flow readings These are the NOVs for both the main flow and auxiliary flow Record these values 14 Plug in or reconnect the vacuum pump and wait 3 5 minutes to allow the main flow and auxiliary flow to stabilize 15 When both flow rates have stabilized close the valve on the flow audit adapter Figure 3 34 16 When in the Main screen the main flow reading should read less than 0 15 l min plus the main flow NOV and the auxiliary flow reading should read less than 0 60 l min plus the auxiliary flow NOV For example if the NOV for the main flow was recorded as 0 08 l min add 0 08 to 0 15 for a total of 0 23 0 08 0 15 0 23 The main flow reading should be less than 0 23 l min If the NOV for the auxiliary flow was recorded as 0 12 l min add 0 12 to 0 65 for a total of 0 77 0 12 0 60 0 77 The auxiliary flow reading should be less than 0 77 l min 17 If the flow readings exceed these calculated values the NOVs plus 0 15 l min for the main flow and 0 65 for the auxiliary flow perform an analog board calibration and mass flow controller calibration refer to service manual This also may indicate that there is a faulty connection or component such as the
394. the up 1 and down 1 arrow keys to select the Stor Var 1 8 fields that you want to edit You can change the variable in each Stor Var field in one of two ways SECTION 6 SOFTWARE SETUP Pace 6 25 Revision B 003 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor X Changing the value for Stor Vars erases the storage buffer 1 Enter the number of the appropriate program register code PRC Appendix B using the control unit s keypad 2 Press the up T and down lt gt arrow keys to increase or decrease the PRC number To increase the PRC number by one press the up 1 arrow key For example if the mass concentration PRC 008 is displayed in Stor Var1 and the user wants to change the PRC to total mass PRC 009 the user would press the up lt T gt arrow key To decrease the PRC number by one press the down lt gt arrow key To increase the PRC number by 10 steps at a time press the lt SHIFT gt key and hold it down while pressing the up 1 arrow key To decrease the PRC number by 10 steps at a time press the lt SHIFT gt key and hold it down while pressing the down arrow key To increase the PRC number by 20 steps at a time press the lt CTRL gt key and hold it down while pressing the up T arrow key To decrease the PRC number by 20 steps at a time press the lt CTRL gt key and hold it down while pressing the down 1 arrow key 6 Press
395. the up 1 and down 1 arrow keys to select the Inter val field 7 Enter the time interval using the control unit s keypad 8 Press the up 1 and down 1 arrow keys to select the Stor Vars field IMPORTANT All data presently stored in the internal data logger will be lost when you change the value of the Stor Vars parameter 9 Enter the number of storage variables Stor Var 1 8 that you want the monitor to store For example if you set Stor Var1 to record mass concentration PRC 008 Stor Var 2 to record mass rate mass concentration averaging time PRC 010 Stor Var 3 to record total mass PRC 009 and Stor Var4 to record total mass averaging time PRC 011 you would set the Stor Vars field to a 10 Press the up 1 and down 1 arrow keys to select the Sta tion field 11 Enter the station number using the control unit s keypad 12 Press the ENTER key The cursor will now change to the gt cursor 13 Press the F1 or RUN key to restart data collection To erase the contents of the circular storage buffer internal data logger change the value of the Stor Vars variable For example if the Stor Vars variable has a value of 8 change the value to 0 and then back to 8 to clear the buffer and resume storing eight data fields per record SECTION 6 SOFTWARE SETUP Pace 6 26 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Amb
396. ther instructions Consult R amp P for specific site recommendations To achieve the best results locate the TEOM sensor unit in an environment with relatively slow temperature fluctuations Avoid sampling locations with direct exposure to sunlight or that are in close proximity to a heating or air conditioning outlet To avoid condensation in the sample tubing R amp P strongly recommends that the user insulate the sample tube extensions with pipe insulation when operating the instrument in areas of high humidity SECTION 2 SYSTEM INSTALLATION Pace 2 2 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 2 2 STANDARD SYSTEM HARDWARE Inits most basic U S EPA approved PM 10 configuration the Series 1400a Monitor is supplied with the following components TEOM control unit with auxiliary flow controller TEOM sensor unit 2 Rack mounting brackets for the control unit Temperature sensor and cable 10 m TEOMCOMM software Electric and air connecting cable 3 8 to 1 4 Reducer fitting 3 8 green tubing for bypass flow 0 9 m 3 ft 3 8 nylon tubing to pump 5 m 16 5 ft Conductive rubber tubing with coupling 2 Sample tubing extensions 1 m 40 9 to 9 pin computer cable 9 to 25 pin computer adapter 9 to 25 pin modem cable Box of 20 TEOM filter cartridges Pallflex TX40 4 Large in line filters Filter exchange tool Pre filter assembly for baseline testing Flow splitter R amp P
397. ticulate PM 10 Monitor Figure A 30 Set ACCU System screen SET ACCU SYSTEM 1 gt Mass Conc 2 Curr Ti Da Figure A 31 Set ACCU System screen with SET ACCU SYSTEM additional lines displayed 1 Mass Conc 2 Curr Ti Da APPENDIX A OVERVIEW OF INSTRUMENT SCREENS 3 100 0 1000 0 600 1 100 0 1000 0 Revision B 001 Pace A 13 Revision B 001 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure A 32 View Analog Inputs screen Figure A 33 View Analog Inputs screen with addi tional lines displayed Figure A 34 Define Analog Inputs screen Figure A 35 Define Analog Inputs screen with addi tional lines displayed VIEW ANALOG INPUTS gt 0 000 17 363 27 463 VIEW ANALOG INPUTS gt A I A I A I A I Wind Spd Wind Vel Wind Dir DEFINE A I A I FS gt A I Type Const A DEFINE A I A I FS gt A I Type Const A Const B Const C A I Ave APPENDIX A OVERVIEW OF INSTRUMENT SCREENS 0 17 1 4 83 WndSpeed 0 000 1 4 83 WndSpeed 000 Pace A 14 Revision B 001 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure A 36 Set Password screen SET PASSWORD Cur Lo Pass gt New Lo Pass Cur Hi Pass Figure A 37 Set Password screen with SET PASSWORD additional lines displayed Cur Lo Pass New Lo Pass Cur Hi Pass Figure A 38 Analog Calibration screen ANALOG CALIBRATION Calibrate gt YES
398. ting Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 10 2 3 2 Down toapinc DATA Follow these steps to download data with RPComm 1 Ensure that the storage pointer is in the correct position Section 10 2 3 1 2 When in the Connection List screen Figure 10 3 select the Connection icon on the tool bar The Download Data screen will display Figure 10 16 Figure 10 16 RPComm Download Data screen i New Connection 1400 Version 3 012 Instrument Serial 00604 Voi BY ESX Down Load Data Registers Real time Graph Key Pad Storage Data Down load Graph Storage Pointers SEcTION 10 RPComm SoFTWARE Pace 10 19 Revision B 000 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 3 When in the Download Data screen select the appropriate control button to initiate the data downloading process Refer to Figure 10 17 for a complete description of the control buttons on the Download Data screen After the data downloading procedure is complete the Download Data screen will display with the data records that were downloaded Figure 10 18 Figure 10 17 Control buttons on the Download Downloads all stored data in the data buffer starting at the first data Data screen record After the data are downloaded the storage pointer will move to the end of the data storage buffer When the data have been downloaded the data will be displayed in the Download Data screen Downloads
399. tive Not Used E 1400 Inactive Not Used E 1Defaul 1400 Inactive Not Used E 2 1400 Inactive Not Used E 3 1400 Inactive Not Used E 1400 Inactive Not Used E 1400 Inactive Not Used m ix Section 10 RPComm SOFTWARE Pace 10 6 Revision B 000 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 2 The RPComm Connection List screen will display with a Quit R amp P Communicator message Figure 10 5 3 Select Yes Figure 10 5 Connection List screen with Quit R amp P Communicator message ai x File Help Bs T alel S X162 5 02 13 2002 06 00 00028 Connection Name Instrument Type Status Modem Status 00029 1400 Inactive Not Used 21585 1400 Inactive Not Used 00604 1400 Inactive Not Used 00028 1400 Inactive Not Used 00231 14nn Inactive Nak lee E 21450 RPComm Connection List Default E3 00601 New Connection Quit A amp P Communicator SEcTION 10 RPComm SOFTWARE Pace 10 7 Revision B 000 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 10 2 2 CREATING A New CONNECTION A connection is the hardware software and proper settings that enable information to travel between your personal computer PC and unit The hardware part of the connection is established by using a 9 to 9 pin cable Section 6 The software connection is established when RPComm is started The proper settings must be set up within RPComm to complete the connection N
400. to use the monitor s seven user definable analog inputs two user definable contact closure circuits and three analog outputs This section also explains how to download data through the RS232 port to a serial printer personal computer PC and other data capture devices such as a data logger Section 10 RPComm Software RPComm is a communications software package for Windows operating systems that provides interactive remote communications with R amp P instrumentation This section describes how to set up a Series 1400a Monitor for direct communications with a PC and how to use RPComm Section 11 Password Protection This section explains how to set and remove the Series 1400a Monitor s password protection Section 12 Routine Maintenance and Verification Procedures This section describes the routine maintenance and verification procedures for the Series 1400a Monitor Section 13 Resetting The Unit This section explains how to reset the Series 1400a Monitor Section 14 ACCU System This section describes the installation and operation of the Automatic Cartridge Collection Unit ACCU System Appendix A Overview of Sofiware Screens This appendix provides an overview of the screens that appear on the Series 1400a Monitor and the RPComm TEOMCOMM and TEOMPLUS software programs Appendix B Program Register Codes This appendix lists the code assignments for system variables program register codes PRCs used to define the op
401. tor enters Operating Mode 4 At this point the smoothed mass concentration data 8moothMC are shown on the monitor s four line display and are transmitted to the monitor s analog and RS232 connectors Previous to this time the mass concentration indicated by the instrument is equal to 0 The 30 minute 1 hour 8 hour and 24 hour mass concentration averages are com puted differently from the instantaneous mass concentrations This notwithstanding the averaged results of the instantaneous readings are identical to these longer term averages except for a very slight time offset caused by the additional exponential smoothing performed on the short term data Because the longer term averages are all computed in the same manner only one example is given below The 1 hour mass concentration average 01 Hr MC is computed by recording the smoothed total mass SmoothTM internal TM Ave 300 sec every hour on the hour Pace 1 17 Revision B 001 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION and performing the following calculation SmoothTM u SmoothTM 01MC x 10 11 Total Flow where SmoothTM Smoothed total mass at the beginning of the averaging period internal TM Ave 300 sec SmoothTM pu Smoothed total mass at the end of the averaging period internal TM Ave 300 sec Total_Flow Total volumetric flow in m for the averaging period based u
402. tor s keypad to display the View Storage screen Figure 5 9 VIEW STORAGE 2056 16 20 03 15 Jan 01 gt Mass Conc 74 9 30 Min MC 72 3 5 When in the View Storage screen press the right and left arrow keys to move the storage pointer to the data record where you want the data download to begin Section 8 6 Press the lt CTRL gt key and hold it down then press the lt LAST FIRST key This will move the storage pointer to the data record just before your beginning data record 7 Initiate the data capture software such as TEOMCOMM or RPComm on your PC or other serial data recording device such as a data logger SEcTION 5 Basic OPERATION Pace 5 6 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 8 Set your data capture software to the data capture or data download function 9 If the monitor has been previously set up for data transfer to a PC go to step 14 If the monitor has not been previously set up for data transfer to a personal computer PC go to step 10 10 Press the lt RS232 gt key to display the Set RS 232 Mode screen Figure 5 8 11 When in the Set RS 232 Mode screen select the appropriate protocol for controlling the unit remotely or downloading the stored data records Section 9 Press the lt ENTER gt key to save your changes 12 Press the lt ESC gt key to return to the Main screen Go to step 13 13 If you will
403. tput channels the program register codes PRCs for the variable s name minimum value and maximum value are all assigned to that channel In the case of a 10 VDC output the minimum value for the selected output variable is set to 0 VDC and the maximum value is set to 10 VDC The behavior of analog output channel 1 can be modified ifthe user chooses to use the channel as a status indicator Refer to Section 4 3 1 3 for information concerning the Analog Out put 1 mode This field contains the minimum value setting ofthe output PRC for analog output 1 This field contains the maximum value setting of the output PRC for analog output 1 This field contains the PRC value of analog output 2 that will be output Whenever a variable is as signed to one of the analog output channels the program register codes PRCs for the variable s name minimum value and maximum value are all assigned to that channel In the case of a 10 VDC output the minimum value for the selected output variable is set to 0 VDC and the maximum value is set to 10 VDC This field contains the minimum value setting ofthe output PRC for analog output 2 This field contains the maximum value setting of the output PRC for analog output 2 Pace 9 15 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor AO3 Var This field contains the PRC value of analog output 3 that will be output Whenever a variable is as signed to o
404. ts 3 0 I min for the Main Flow and 13 67 l min for the Aux Flow Any greater deviation may indicate that the in line filters are plugged or other blockages exist in the system 8 Attach a reference flow meter such as a bubble meter dry gas meter or mass flow meter to the top of the flow audit adapter This reference flow meter should have been recently calibrated to a primary standard have an accuracy of t1 at 3 l min and 16 67 l min and a pressure drop of less than 0 07 bar 1 psi 9 Read the total flow approximately 16 67 l min on the reference flow meter If you are using a mass flow meter you must make any necessary corrections to translate this reading to volumetric l min at the current ambient temperature and barometric pres sure No adjustment is necessary in the case of a volumetric flow meter The total volumetric flow measured by the reference flow meter must be 16 67 1 0 l min to be acceptable 10 Disconnect the bypass flow line from the bypass extension on the bottom of the flow splitter Figure 5 15 SEcTION 5 Basic OPERATION Pace 5 12 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure 5 15 Disconnecting the bypass flow line from the bypass extension 11 Cap the exit of the flow splitter bypass extension with the 3 8 inch Swagelok cap Figure 5 16 Figure 5 16 Bypass flow extension with 3 8 inch Swagelok cap SEcrioN 5 Basic OPERATI
405. ture located on the left hand side of this field and the average pressure located on the left hand side of this field readings back to their original values step 8 18 Turn off the control unit 19 Install the main and bypass flow lines onto the back panel of the control unit Section 2 20 Connect the electric cable that links the control unit with the sensor unit 21 Turn on the control unit and make sure that the pump is on 22 Perform a system leak check Section 3 15 16 APPENDIX J ORIGINAL DESIGN Mass FLow CoNTROLLERS Pace J 4 Revision B 000 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor J 3 FLow CONTROLLER CALIBRATION HARDWARE NOTE Always wear appropriate anti static devices when working with the system electronics Items Needed Reference flow meter such as a bubble meter dry gas meter or mass flow meter NOTE This reference flow meter should have been recently calibrated to a primary standard and should have an accuracy of 196 at 3 l min Potentiometer adjustment tool Follow these steps to perform a hardware calibrate of the original design mass flow controllers 1 Perform an analog board calibration Service Manual 2 Turn off the control unit 3 Disconnect the cable that connects the control unit and the sensor unit 4 Remove the top cover of the control unit Section 2 NOTE Always wear appropriate anti static devices when
406. ty or area codes and then the phone number For the U S 1 518 555 5555 14 Select the OK button The Connection Type screen will now appear as the active screen on your computer 15 When in the Connection Type screen select the OK button 16 To connect to your Series 1400a Monitor through the modem highlight the connection name on the Connection List screen Figure H 1 and then select the Connection icon on the tool bar lt The modem connection will now be initiated When commu nication is established the Download Data screen will be displayed Figure H 7 NOTE Ifthe connection is successful the unit s serial number will be displayed at the top of the screen If the connection is not successful or if there is no instrument attached then the serial number will be blank or will display 99999 Ifthe modem loses its connection waitat least 1 minute before trying to establish another connection This allows the modem to reset itself 17 RPComm can now be used as described in Section 10 APPENDIX H MopEM COMMUNICATIONS Pace H 9 Revision B 000 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure H 7 Download Data screen 3 New Connection 1400 Version 3 012 Instrument Serial 00604 Eile xi Yo SB ESX Down Load Data Registers Real time Graph Key Pad Storage Data Down load Graph Storage Pointers APPENDIX H MobEM COMMUNICATIONS Pace H 10 Revisi
407. ulate PM 10 Monitor Table of Contents SECTION A INTRODUCTION sariso segere rinaire tans lord e or E puce EU eo a 1 1 1 1 Advanced FOalures oie ru po PE rue RS reb dede ang 1 2 1 2 Overview of Manuali raros iet etoile tendat oes 1 4 1 3 Application Range of the Series 1400a Monitor 1 7 1 4 General System Configuration ssssessesss 1 8 db Theory ot Operation zd eoe ires a pacee disciple tone Manna eae Depende 1 9 1 5 1 The Flow SySIOITI corte ete Patavii umet 1 11 1 5 2 Mass Transducer Operation ssssssssssss 1 13 1 5 3 Mass Computation Methodology ssssss 1 15 SECTION 2 HARDWARE SETUP ede ddo teen aectunu doe qe uiu adore ea hearth 2 1 2 1 Installation Considerations sseenee 2 1 2 2 Standard System Hardware sse 2 3 2 3 Installing the Control and Sensor Units 2 4 2 9 1 Voltage Seltiig ace cele a mt a aad 2 5 2 3 2 Control Unit Connections sseeee 2 11 2 3 2 1 Sensor Flow Connections sess 2 11 2 3 2 2 Bypass Flow Connections ssssssssss 2 15 2 3 2 3 PUMP Connections uiri ere restored 2 17 2 3 3 Control Unit Rack Mounts sese 2 19 2 3 4 Sensor Unit Connections ssssseseeee 2 22 2 3 5 Moving the Sensor Unit Connectors
408. ument receiving the signal for example the data logger from the monitor Consult the operating instructions that came with that instrument to determine what range of voltages it will accept and adjust the Series 1400a Monitor s analog output voltage levels from their factory settings 10 VDC to correspond with it ifnecessary SEcTION 9 DATA INPUT AND OUTPUT Pace 9 16 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor V Always wear appropriate anti static devices when working with the system electronics Figure 9 14 Analog output jumpers 9 2 2 CHANGING ANALOG INPUT AND OUTPUT JUMPERS Follow these steps to make hardware and software changes for 10 VDC or 2 VDC analog outputs 1 Unplug the monitor from its power source 2 Attach an antistatic wrist strap to your wrist Attach the other end of the wrist strap to the chassis of the control unit to discharge any static electricity while working on the unit NOTE Always wear appropriate anti static devices when working with the system electronics 3 Remove the cover of the control unit Section 2 4 Locate the L shaped analog input output board Figures 9 3 and 9 4 5 Locate the analog output jumpers Figure 9 14 on the analog input output board The jumpers are black plastic sleeves that cover 2 of the 3 pins corresponding to each output channel 6 Locate the jumper for output channel 1 Lift the jumper off of the
409. up until the shipping latch snaps into place 18 Close and latch the door to the sensor unit Keep the door open for as short a time as possible to minimize the temperature change in the system SECTION 3 SAMPLE PREPARATION Pace 3 12 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 19 Reset the unit by pressing F1 or RUN on the control unit s keypad 20 Wait 5 minutes to allow the temperatures to stabilize inside the transducer and sensor unit 21 Press the DATA STOP key on the control unit s keypad 22 Open the door of the sensor unit 23 Open the mass transducer 24 Press straight down on the filter with the bottom of the filter exchange tool Figure 3 13 This ensures that the filter is prop erly seated after it has experienced an increase in temperature 25 Close the mass transducer and sensor unit door 26 Reset the unit by pressing F1 or RUN on the control unit s keypad 27 Wait 5 minutes 28 Look at the change in the TE s oscillating frequency on the Main screen of the control unit Figure 3 19 The last two digits of the reading will fluctuate due to noise and the rest will remain steady If more than the last two digits fluctuate in this reading this indicates that the TEOM filter is loose Repeat steps 21 28 to re seat the filter SECTION 3 SAMPLE PREPARATION Pace 3 13 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient P
410. ure 2 70 Proper Sample tube installation of the rubber PE tube coupling between the air inlet of the sensor unit and the sample tube 1 inch extension gap Pa Rubber tube coupling Fr inier SECTION 2 SYSTEM INSTALLATION Pace 2 45 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 8 You must now install a sample inlet onto the flow splitter Section 2 4 5 1 SECTION 2 SYSTEM INSTALLATION Pace 2 46 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 2 4 5 INLET SELECTION The Series 1400a Monitor can be configured with a variety of inlet systems This appendix describes the procedures for installing a sample inlet onto the sampling system setup Section 2 4 5 1 and converting the Series 1400a Monitor from a PM 10 toa PM 1 monitor Section 2 4 5 2 a PM 2 5 monitor Section 2 4 5 3 ora total suspended particulate TSP monitor Section 2 4 5 4 It also includes a statement regarding the TEOM monitor adjustment factor Section 2 4 5 5 NOTE If your Series 1400a Monitor is configured for use as a PM 10 or PM 2 5 monitor with the original PM 10 inlet Figure 2 71 and you are experiencing difficulties with rain intrusion you can purchase the modified PM 10 inlet Fig ure 2 72 from R amp P 57 004742 This inlet substantially reduces the possibility of rain intrusion and is installed in the same manner as the PM 10 inlet Also y
411. ure 9 22 Com Print Settings screen COM PRINT SETTINGS Interval gt 1800 Columns 6 Prnt Var 1 Mass Conc You can display the Com Print Settings screen on the four line display of the control unit in two different ways 1 When in the Main screen Figure 9 7 press the lt STEP SCREEN gt key to display the Menu screen Figure 9 8 When in the Menu screen press the up T and down lt gt arrow keys to select Set RS 232 Mode and then press the lt ENTER gt key to display the Set RS 232 Mode screen Figure 9 19 When in the Set RS 232 Mode screen press the lt STEP SCREEN key 2 Press the lt 0 gt and lt 6 gt keys and then press the lt ENTER gt key The Com Print Settings screen contains additional lines that cannot be seen when the screen first displays on the control unit s four line display Figure 9 23 Press the up T and down lt gt arrow keys to view the additional lines of the Com Print Settings screen SEcTION 9 DATA INPUT AND OUTPUT Pace 9 28 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure 9 23 Com Print Settings screen with additional lines displayed COM PRINT SETTINGS Interval gt Columns Prnt Varl 1800 6 Mass Conc 30 Min MC 01 Hr MC 24 Hr MC Tot Mass Null 48048048 The Com Print Settings screen contains the following information SEcTION 9 DATA INPUT AND OUTPUT Interval Columns Prnt Var
412. used as described in Section 10 13 To connect to a different instrument through the serial switching device the current connection must be terminated Select the amp Disconnect icon on the tool bar to terminate the current connection APPENDIX H MopEM COMMUNICATIONS Pace H 12 Revision B 000 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 14 Enter the proper command codes for the desired instrument as described in step 7 and initiate the modem connection as ex plained in step 11 If the modem loses its connection wait at least 1 minute before trying to establish another connection This allows the modem to reset itself APPENDIX H MopEM COMMUNICATIONS Pace H 13 Revision B 000 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor H 3 2 Muctipte R amp P Instruments or DirFERENT MopELs Refer to this subsection if two or more R amp P instruments of different models are being connected to a serial switching device The following combinations involving the Series 1400a Monitor can be supported at this time Series 1400a and a Model 2025 Series 1400a and a Series 5400 Monitor Although RPComm supports both the Series 1400a and the Model 2000 FRM monitors it is not possible to connect these instruments to a single serial switching device This is because the Series 1400a Monitor requires the local communication flow control to be set to RTS CTS and the Model 2000 FRM sampler
413. w extension is outside the enclosure Figure K 6 Go to step 11 NOTE If you will be using the outdoor enclosure with an ACCU System you must leave the bypass extension outside the enclosure To leave the bypass extension outside the enclosure you must use an adapter which is provided as part of the Complete Enclosure Kit for the ACCU System 59 001680 You must purchase this kit separately All other setup instructions remain the same APPENDIX K COMPLETE OUTDOOR ENCLOSURE Pace K 8 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure K 6 Seal plate installation ACCU system configuration FLOW SPLITTER TUBE BYPASS FLOW EXTENSION OUTDOOR ENCLOSURE FLOW SPLITTER ADAPTER SEAL PLATE RTV around the perimeter of the seal plate amp enclosure 1 1 4 20 Truss Head Screw 2 Sealing Washer 3 1 4 Flat Washer 4 External Star Washer 5 1 4 20 Hex Nut INSULATION amp SAMPLE TUBE APPENDIX K COMPLETE OUTDOOR ENCLOSURE Pace K 9 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 11 Secure the seal plate nut around the flow splitter 12 Loosen the 1 2 sample tube nut at the base of the flow splitter Figure K 7 Figure K 7 Close up view of bottom of flow splitter Flow splitter Bypass extension b 1 2 sample tube nut Sample tube 13 Slide the sample tube that is located insid
414. will automatically use the new PRC list in its operations APPENDIX D INSTALLING NEw SvsrEM SOFTWARE Pace D 8 Revision B 003 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Appendix E Consumables and Parts This appendix lists the consumables and parts available for the Series 1400a Monitor E 1 CONSUMABLES The operation of the Series 1400a Monitor requires the following consumable items Replacement intervals will vary depending upon sampling location and particle loading Average annual consumables pack 59 008158 AB with new style flow controller includes TX40 filters box of 20 57 007225 0020 4 large bypass in line filters 57 002758 Average annual consumables pack 59 003578 AB with old style flow controller includes TX40 filters box of 20 57 007225 0020 4 large bypass in line filters 57 002758 2 flow controller filters 30 003097 4 flow controller orifices 32 003339 Average annual consumables pack 59 003058 00 AA with old style flow controller includes TX40 filters box of 20 57 007225 0020 2 large bypass in line filters 57 002758 4 in line filters 32 000380 TX40 filters box of 10 57 007225 0010 TX40 filters box of 20 57 007225 0020 In line filter 00 AA 32 000380 Bypass flow splitter filter early 1400 32 000393 Large bypass in line filter all models 57 002758 Flow controller filter AB 30 003097 Flow controller orifice AB 32 003339 Mass calibration verification kit all
415. wo different ways 1 When in the Main screen Figure 14 16 press the lt STEP SCREEN gt key on the control unit s keypad to display the Menu screen Figure 14 17 When in the Menu screen press the up lt T gt and down lt gt arrow keys to select View ACCU System screen Press the lt ENTER gt key to display the View ACCU System screen Section 14 5 When in the View ACCU System screen press the lt STEP SCREEN gt key 2 Press the lt 1 gt and lt 5 gt keys and then press the ENTER key OK 4 Mass Conc gt 30 Min MC 01 Hr MC Section 14 ACCU System Pace 14 19 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure 14 17 Menu screen LISTING OF SCREENS gt Set Temps Flows Set Hardware View ACCU System The Set ACCU System screen contains additional lines that cannot be seen when the screen first displays on the control unit s four line display Figure 14 18 Press the up T and down 1 arrow keys to view the additional lines of the Set ACCU System screen Figure 14 18 Set ACCU System screen with SET ACCU SYSTEM additional lines displayed 1 gt Mass Conc 2 Curr Ti Da 1 100 0 1000 0 600 The Set ACCU System screen contains the following information 1 Section 14 ACCU System This field contains the number of the ACCU chan nel that is currently being viewed Press the right lt gt arrow key to increase the cha
416. working with the system electronics 5 Locate the mass flow controller board Figure J 4 and ensure that all connectors are fully seated on the mass flow controller board APPENDIX J ORIGINAL DESIGN Mass FLow CONTROLLERS Pace J 5 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure J 4 Mass flow controller board Revision B 000 TOPSILK OL JOR108 dix cio D oL o D181 FSseT O sOg LOO R1320 o U182 R1300 oo O R1890 OOo e R1020 lOO O R1290 OO 56 Dece oo R1310 o9 Ones OL R1280 O R1830 O0 olo Ole Q SET C105 O Or104 MFSA O O SCALSUM O D ERRINV O 15v C103 OO Dci 5 Q o oro OR es a OL JOr115 a R1200 O O R1250 og Ob ofws R1230 OO O c1e4 O c119 SPAN G Q Q101 Gi EA oO ern 40 90 0 Oo Oo oy lef le t 16 P a al e gm mel O O O Qe wvour OOOOOOOD Deis U103 OO0000000 Bg D102 O C120 15VALVE VALVE 1SVALVERET VALVE POWER gt m se O_O 2 ASSY 50 APPENDIX J ORIGINAL DESIGN Mass FLow CONTROLLERS Pace J 6 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 6 Revision B 000 Turn on the control unit and make sure that the pump is on Allow the instrument to warm up for 30 minutes from a cold start or 5 minutes if it has just been operated
417. wuwuwo nuozznium muomummcoou APPENDIX I ASCII Copes Pace l 1 Revision B 001 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor This page left intentionally blank APPENDIX I ASCII Copes Pace l 2 Revision B 000 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Appendix J Original Design Mass Flow Controllers This appendix describes the maintenance and verification procedures for the Original Design Mass Flow Controllers of the Series 1400a Monitor As of February 2001 R amp P began manufacturing the Series 1400a Monitor with newly designed mass flow controllers Second Generation Flow Controller Design in the control unit If you purchased your Series 1400a Monitor before February 2001 or if the serial number on your monitor is 1404B234170011 or below your control unit has the original version mass flow controllers If you purchased a monitor with the original mass flow controller design follow the instructions in this section If your monitor has the Second Generation mass flow controllers installed refer to the Service Manual Also if you purchased the Flow Controller Upgrade Kit 55 7758 and installed the Second Generation mass flow controllers in your Series 1400a Monitor refer to the Service Manual R amp P recommends that the user perform the analog calibration Service Manual before performing the mass flow controller MFC calibrations Note that the
418. y serial devices the user wishes to connect to it 3 From the serial switching device s documentation determine the command codes required to activate each serial port being used 4 Unplug the serial cable and its adapter s from the modem and plug the cable assembly into the serial switching device Follow the instructions provided with the serial switching device and connect it to the modem NOTE R amp P recommends that the serial switching device s connections be tested before the unit is placed in the field This test requires the use of two phone lines 5 When in the Connection List screen Figure H 1 select the name of the connection used to verify the modem connection above Er The and then select the Edit Selected Connection icon Connection Type screen will display Figure H 2 APPENDIX H MobpEM COMMUNICATIONS Pace H 11 Revision B 000 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 6 When in the Connection Type screen ensure that the correct instrument type is selected and select the Settings button to display the AK Protocol Setup screen Figure H 3 7 Examine the list of command codes on the right hand side of the AK Protocol Setup screen Select the correct series of command codes needed to trigger the desired instrument As codes are chosen they will appear on the bottom of the screen in the Con nection Command box If a code is entered incorrectly the user can de
419. ystem Pace 14 7 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor Figure 14 6 Sample distributor cone assembly Union Fitting Section 14 ACCU System 4 Bypass Flow Line from Flow Splitter 74 Sample Distributor Cone p x Sample Distributor Gasket pmo Sample Distributor ACCU System Enclosure Pace 14 8 Revision B 002 Operating Manual TEOM Series 1400a Ambient Particulate PM 10 Monitor 3 Locate the sample distributor cone and slide it over the top of the Figure 14 7 Sample distributor cone installed on top of the ACCU System enclosure 4 5 6 7 Section 14 ACCU System sample distributor Figures 14 6 and 14 7 Ensure that the sample distributor gasket is properly seated and that the mount ing holes line up r bie amp Daui Secure the cone to the ACCU enclosure using the four 8 32 screws Figure 14 6 Run the 3 8 green nylon tubing from the bypass flow tube of the flow splitter to the union fitting located on the top of the sample distributor cone Figure 14 6 Ensure that the fitting is properly tightened to avoid leaks Insert the 3 8 bypass flow line from the electric and air connect ing cable into the sample flow outlet located on the side of the ACCU System enclosure Figure 14 7 Ensure that the fitting is properly tightened Turn the control unit off Pace 14 9 Revision B 002

TEOM 1400ab - User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents